e Commerce

Published on May 2016 | Categories: Types, Articles & News Stories | Downloads: 86 | Comments: 0 | Views: 2386
of 308
Download PDF   Embed   Report

Comments

Content

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

NOTES

UNIT I

FUNDAMENTAL OF E-COMMERCE
1.1 INTRODUCTION TO E-COMMERCE 1.1.1 Introduction Two thousand years ago, Roman roads brought trade and commerce to Europe in an unprecedented manner. A thousand years ago, the spice routes linked the cultures of East and West. At the dawn of the second millennium, the Internet, the world’s largest computer network, the network of networks, is making fundamental changes to the lives of everyone on the planet-changing forever the way business is conducted. Internet has become an important medium for doing global business based on the state of the art technology. Global business was conducted in a new way: electronically, using networks and the Internet. The availability of Internet has led to the development of E-Commerce (Electronic commerce), in which business transactions take place via telecommunication networks. E-Commerce has two major aspects: economical and technological. The stress of this course will show you how to get started in the complex and exciting world of Electronic Commerce. New standards and new facilities are constantly emerging and their proper understanding is essential for the success of an operation and especially for those who are assigned a duty to select, establish, and maintain the necessary infrastructure. 1.1.2 Brief History Of E-Commerce The history of E-commerce is a history of how Information Technology has transformed business processes. Some authors will track back the history of E-commerce to the invention of the telephone at the end of last century. The Internet was conceived in

1

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

1969, when the Advanced Research Projects Agency (a Department of Defence organization) funded research of computer networking. The Internet could end up like EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) without the emergence of the World Wide Web in 1990s. EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) is widely viewed as the beginning of E-commerce if we consider E-Commerce as the networking of business communities and digitalization of business information. EDI, which expanded from financial transactions to other transaction processing and enlarged the participating companies from financial institutions to manufacturers, retailers, services, and so on. Many other applications followed, ranging from stock trading to travel reservation systems. Such systems were described as telecommunication applications and their strategic value was widely recognized. With the commercialization of the Internet in the early 1990s and its rapid growth to millions of potential customers, the term electronic commerce was coined, and EC applications expanded rapidly. One reason for the rapid expansion of the technology was the development of networks, protocols, software, and specifications. The other reason was the increase in competition and other business pressures. From 1995 to 1999 we have witnessed many innovative applications ranging from advertisement to auctions and virtual reality experiences. Almost every medium- and large-sized organization in the United States already has a Web site many are very extensive; for example, in 1999 General Motors Corporation offered 18,000 pages of information that included 98,000 links to its products, services, and dealers. 1.1.3 Definition Of E-Commerce: Electronic commerce is an emerging model of new selling and merchandising tools in which buyers are able to participate in all phases of a purchase decision, while stepping through those processes electronically rather than in a physical store or by phone (with a physical catalogue). The processes in electronic commerce include enabling a customer to access product information, select items to purchase, purchase items securely, and have the purchase settled financially. It is an emerging concept that describes the process of buying and selling or exchanging of products, services; and information via computer networks including the Internet. E-commerce is basically, doing business-as-usual, but across the Internet. You advertise your products or services on your Web site, as you would in any other media like newspapers, TV or brochures. Advertising on your Web site can be done in two ways.
2 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The first is by use of a relatively simple Web site consisting of a few pages whereby you tell potential customers who you are, what you do, where you are and how they can contact you ( easiest done by giving them your email address). The second way of enabling world-wide customers to buy from you is to provide them with an On-Line Catalogue of your products which they can browse at their leisure without having to go to your place of business. On-Line Catalogue: On-Line Catalogue is that catalogue where people access via the Internet. OnLine Catalogue is an integral part of website, enabling customers to...       Browse through stock list, read about an item or service; Look at photographs of the products. Select which items they want to purchase And drop them into a shopping cart as they go along. When they have completed their shopping, they go to the Check-Out.

NOTES

The next step is to request the order by filling in their details and method of payment on a form which is waiting for them at the Check-Out. The form is already partially completed with a breakdown of the items in their shopping cart, prices inclusive of tax, and shipping & handling charges, if any. If they choose to pay by credit card, the form includes a place for them to fill in their credit card number. And then, with one press of a button, they send the order to you. Electronic Commerce under different perspectives: Let’s see how Electronic Commerce (EC) is defined under each perspective. 1. Communications Perspective EC is the delivery of information, products /services, or payments over the telephone lines, computer networks or any other electronic means.

3

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

2. Business Process Perspective EC is the application of technology toward the automation of business transactions and work flow. 3. Service Perspective EC is a tool that addresses the desire of firms, consumers, and management to cut service costs while improving the quality of goods and increasing the speed of service delivery. 4. Online Perspective EC provides the capability of buying and selling products and information on the internet and other online services. 1.1.4 Classifications of E-Commerce Applications Electronic Commerce (e-Commerce) is a general concept covering any form of business transaction or information exchange executed using Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs). E-Commerce takes place between companies, between companies and their customers, or between companies and public administrations. Electronic Commerce includes electronic trading of goods, services and electronic material. E-Commerce systems include commercial transactions on the Internet but their scope is much wider than this; they can be classified by application type: Electronic Markets: The principle function of an electronic market is to facilitate the search for the required product or service. Airline booking systems are an example of an electronic market. Electronic Data Interchange (EDI): Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) is the electronic exchange of business documents in a standard, computer processable, universally accepted format between-trading partners. EDI is quite different from sending electronic mail, messages or sharing files through a network. In EDI, the computer application of both the sender and the receiver, referred to as Trading Partners (TPs) have to agree upon the format of the business document which is sent as a data file over electronic messaging services.
4 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The two key aspects of EDI that distinguish it from other forms of electronic communication, such as electronic mail, are: 1. The information transmitted is directly used by the recipient computer without the need for human intervention is rarely mentioned but often assumed that EDI refers to interchange between businesses. It involves two or more organization or parts of organization communicating business information with each other in a common agreed format. The repeated keying of identical information in the traditional paper-based business. Communication creates a number of problems that can be significantly reduced through the usage of EDI. These problems include:     Increased time Low accuracy High labour charges Increased uncertainty.

NOTES

2.

To take full advantage of EDI’s benefits, a company must computerize its basic business applications. Trading partners are individual organization that agrees to exchange EDI transactions. EDI cannot be undertaken unilaterally but requires the cooperation and active participation of trading partners. Trading partners normally consists of an organization’s principal suppliers and wholesale customers. Since large retail stores transact business with a large number of suppliers they were among the early supporters of EDI. In the manufacturing sector, EDI has enabled the concept of Just-In-Time inventory to be implemented. JIT reduces inventory and operating capital requirements. EDI provides for the efficient transaction of recurrent trade exchanges between commercial organizations. EDI is widely used by, for example, large retail groups and vehicle assemblers when trading with their suppliers. Internet Commerce The Internet (and similar network facilities) can be used for advertising goods and services and transacting one-off deals. Internet commerce has application for both businessto-business and business to consumer transactions.

5

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

The three categories of E Commerce 1.1.5 Types of e-commerce

There are a number of different types of E-Commerce      B2B - Business to Business B2C - Business to Consumer C2B - Consumer to Business B2E - Business to Employee C2C - Consumer to Consumer

6

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

B2B - Business to Business E-commerce has been in use for quite a few years and is more commonly known as EDI (electronic data interchange). In the past EDI was conducted on a direct link of some form between the two businesses where as today the most popular connection is the internet. The two businesses pass information electronically to each other. B2B e-commerce currently makes up about 94% of all e-commerce transactions. Typically in the B2B environment, E-Commerce can be used in the following processes:    Procurement; order fulfilment; Managing trading-partner relationships.

NOTES

B2C - Business to Consumer Business to Consumer e-commerce is relatively new. This is where the consumer accesses the system of the supplier. It is still a two way function but is usually done solely through the Internet. B2C can also relate to receiving information such as share prices, insurance quotes, on-line newspapers, or weather forecasts. The supplier may be an existing retail outlet such as a high street store; it has been this type of business that has been successful in using E-Commerce to deliver services to customers. These businesses may have been slow in gearing-up for E-Commerce compared to the innovative dot.com start ups, but they usually have a sound commercial structure as well as in-depth experience of running a business something which many dotcoms lacked, causing many to fail. Example: A home user wishes to purchase some good quality wine. The user accesses the Internet site http://www.craigs.com.au and follows the links to read a report on the recommended wines. After reading the tasting notes the user follows the links to place an order along with delivery and payment details directly into the merchants’ inventory system. The wine is then dispatched from the supplier’s warehouse and in theory is delivered to the consumer without delay.

7

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

C2B - Consumer to Business Consumer to Business is a growing arena where the consumer requests a specific service from the business. Example: Harry is planning a holiday in Darwin. He requires a flight in the first week of December and is only willing to pay Rs. 250. Harry places a submission with in a web based C2B facility. Dodgy Brothers Airways accesses the facility and sees Harry’s submission. Due to it being a slow period, the airline offers Harry a return fare for Rs. 250. B2E - Business to Employee Business to Employee e-commerce is growing in use. This form of E-commerce is more commonly known as an ‘Intranet’. An intranet is a web site developed to provide employees of an organisation with information. The intranet is usually access through the organisations network, it can and is often extended to an Entrant which uses the Internet but restricts uses by sign on and password. C2C - Consumer to Consumer These sites are usually some form of an auction site. The consumer lists items for sale with a commercial auction site. Other consumers access the site and place bids on the items. The site then provides a connection between the seller and buyer to complete the transaction. The site provider usually charges a transaction cost. In reality this site should be call C2B2C. B2A is the least developed area of E-Commerce and it relates to the way that public sector organisations, at both a central and local level, are providing their services on-line. Also known as e-Government, it has the potential to increase the domestic and business use of e-Commerce as traditional services are increasingly being delivered over the Internet. The UK government is committed to ensuring this country is at the forefront of e-Commerce and it is essential that e-Government plays a significant part in achieving this objective. 1.1.6   Scope of E-Commerce Selling can be focussed to the global customer Pre-sales, subcontracts, supply
8 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

           

Financing and insurance Commercial transactions: ordering, delivery, payment Product service and maintenance Co-operative product development Distributed co-operative working Use of public and private services Business-to-administrations (e.g. customs, etc) Transport and logistics Public procurement Automatic trading of digital goods Accounting Dispute resolution

NOTES

1.1.7 E- Commerce in Action

9

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

How E-Commerce Works The consumer first moves through the internet to the merchant’s web site. At the web site, the consumer is briefly given an introduction to the product or services the merchant offers. It is at this point that the consumer makes the decision to visit the web store by clicking on a link or button located on the web page (e.g., Buy Now, Shop Online, or an image of a shopping cart button are common entry points into a web store). After choosing to visit the web store, the consumer is typically connected to an online transaction server located somewhere else on the internet which runs software commonly referred to as a shopping cart application. The shopping cart application has been setup by the merchant to display all products and services offered, as well as calculate pricing, taxes, shipping charges, etc. From there, the consumer decides that he wants to purchase something, so he enters all pertinent credit card information and a sales order is produced. Depending on the ecommerce implementation, the sales order can now take two totally different paths for confirming to the consumer that the order is officially placed. Scenario 1 The consumer’s credit card information goes directly through a private gateway to a processing network, where the issuing and acquiring banks complete or deny the transaction. This generally takes place in no more than 5-7 seconds and the consumer is then informed that the order was received, the credit card was authorized, and that the product will ultimately be shipped. Scenario 2 The consumer’s entire order and credit card information is electronically submitted back to the merchant’s server (usually via email, FTP, or SSL connection) where the order can be reviewed first and then approved for credit card authorization through a processing network. The consumer then receives an email shortly afterwards, confirming the order being received, the credit card being authorized, and status on when the product will exactly be shipped.

10

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

In both scenarios, the process is transparent to the consumer and appears virtually the same. However, the first scenario is a more simplistic method of setting up a shopping cart application and does not take into consideration any back office issues that may delay shipment (i.e., items out of stock, back orders, orders submitted after office hours or during holidays, etc.). ManageMore’s eCommerce Manager relies on the second scenario to handle all of its ecommerce orders. This second scenario keeps the consumer accurately informed throughout the entire ordering process. Let us assume an ecommerce implementation that uses the second scenario mentioned above. There are several basic steps you will need to accomplish before becoming Commerce enabled. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Getting a Merchant Bank Account Web Hosting Web Design Considerations Registering a Domain Name Obtaining a Digital Certificate

NOTES

Getting a Merchant Bank Account In order to be able to accept credit cards, you must apply for an account with a credit card merchant account provider. This can be relatively easy or somewhat difficult, depending on which country you live in, and the type of business you are running. When choosing a merchant account provider, the following should also be noted: 1. In order for credit card authorization to be automatic from within ManageMore, you must ensure that your merchant account provider has credit card processors that connect with IC Verify™, PC Charge™, or AuthorizeNet™ (i.e.Intellicharge Interface) software. These products are sold separately from ManageMore and eliminate the need for merchant terminal devices or separate time consuming steps to approve credit cards. Your merchant account provider must allow you to handle non-swiped credit card transactions. This refers to transactions where the customer is not present and only the credit card number and expiration date are being used for approving the charges.
11 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

2.

DBA 1727

NOTES

3.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

When choosing a merchant account provider, you should do a little research on the company’s reputation, years in business, and company size. Constantly changing to a new merchant account provider when your old one goes out-of business can be costly and time consuming. Avoid merchant account providers that ask for a non-refundable fee before you get approved. Avoid merchant account providers that require 1 or 2 year contract terms. Since there are so many merchant account providers available, it doesn’t make sense to lock your company into a commitment for any period of time. Expect merchant account providers to have some form of a sign up fee after being approved only. These fees can come in the form of an application fee, processing fee, software fee, etc. Typically expect to pay around $100 to $500 for getting an account setup to accept credit cards and sometimes electronic checks. You should be able to find a merchant account provider that can offer you discount credit cards rates ranging from 1.75% to 2.75% and no more than .25 cent per transaction. If not, contact Intellisoft regarding our merchant account provider affiliates and the free Intellicharge Interface just for signing up with them. You will need a dedicated phone line or data line for processing credit cards and electronic checks. Note: If your computer or local area network is already connected to the internet, a separate data line will not be necessary if you use the Intellicharge Interface for electronic payment.

Web Hosting Web hosting is a very important step in this process, as this is how you gain a presence on the internet in the first place. There are actually two scenarios that can be used for web hosting. Scenario1 involves setting up and maintaining your own web server, while Scenario 2 involves farming out all web hosting administration to an ISP. An Internet Service Provider (ISP) is a company that provides you with internet access and limited hard drive space on their web servers for hosting your web site. The following should be noted when searching for an Internet Service Provider: 1. Always try to find an ISP that can provide a local telephone number for you to connect to the internet.
12 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

2. 3. 4. 5.

Choose an ISP that is known for having few interruptions of service. Choose an ISP that is known for good technical support and has knowledgeable people familiar with ecommerce sites. Choose an ISP that consistently has fast connection speeds. As with any company you do business with, make sure the ISP is reputable.

NOTES

The online transaction providers that offer the actual web store itself can sometimes be hosted by your same ISP or may require a completely different provider, referred to as a Commerce Service Provider (CSP). Many small businesses tend to choose CSP’s for creating a web store because it gives them the flexibility of choosing a provider that offers competitive pricing and the best shopping cart application for their needs. Online transaction providers will usually provide one shopping cart solution they feel is better than the many others that exist and differ by price, appearance, layout, functionality, and ease of use. The following should be noted when dealing with shopping cart applications: 1. Online transaction providers will either sell or rent you the use of an online shopping cart application for your business. Be forewarned that purchasing an online shopping cart application is very expensive. Most businesses will rent these online web store programs rather than committing to such a steep investment. Rental pricing for the use of shopping cart programs vary depending on number of transactions generated a month, number of products listed on the shopping cart application, and the sophistication of the shopping cart application itself. There are a lot of online transaction providers out there, and they all have varying packages. Deciding on a provider’s package that fits your needs is perhaps the most important aspect.

2.

3.

Web Design Considerations With little knowledge of HTML and a lot of patience, you can probably create your own corporate web site with the help of products like Microsoft FrontPage™ or DreamWeaver™. However, when adding a web store to your web site, you may want to seek the help of professional web designers to make the look and feel of your web store consistent with the rest of your corporate web site. Most shopping cart applications, like SoftCart by Mercantec, allow its templates to be modified just for this purpose. In many cases, the same ISP or CSP you choose can provide web design and consultation.
13 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Registering a Domain Name Domain names are the names for computers on the Internet that correspond to IP (Internet protocol) numbers to route information to addresses on the Internet network. Domain names serve as a convenient way of locating information and people on the Internet. In layman terms, will it be important to you, for customers to find your web site by typing “123.123.456.456” or by typing something simple to remember like “www.mybiz.com?” Registering a domain name is one of the most important decisions you can make for your online identity. Your domain name says who you are to your clients, your peers - the whole world. The basics for registering a domain name are: Contact a domain name registrar on the internet to register for a domain name. There are many to choose from, just do a web search on “domain name registrar” to get you started. 2. Select a unique domain name you would like others to use for finding your web site. Obtaining a Digital Certificate A digital certificate, also known as a SSL Server Certificate, enables SSL (Secure Socket Layer encryption) on the web server. SSL protects communications so you can take credit card orders securely and ensure that hackers cannot eavesdrop on you. Any ecommerce company that provides you with an online web store will require you to have SSL before you can use their services. Thankfully, for most people obtaining a digital certificate is not a problem. For a minimal fee, one can usually use the certificate owned by the web hosting company where your page resides. If you are a larger company, however, you may want to get your own digital certificate. 1.1.8 Architectural Framework of E Commerce A framework is intended to define and create tools that integrate the information found in today’s closed systems and allows the development of e-commerce applications. It is important to understand that the aim of the architectural frame-work itself is not to build new database management systems, data repository, computer languages, software agent based transaction monitors, or communication protocols. Rather, the architecture should focus on synthesizing the diverse resources already in place in corporations to
14 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

facilitate the integration of data and software for better applications. The electronic commerce application architecture consists of six layers of functionality, or services: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) applications; brokerage services, data or transaction management; interface, and; support layers” secure messaging, security and electronic document interchange; middle ware and structured document interchange; and network infrastructure and basic communications services (see Table. 1.1.8 a).

NOTES

These layers co-operate to provide a seamless transition between today’s computing resources and those of tomorrow by transparently integrating information access and exchange within the context of the chosen application. As seen in Fig., electronic commerce applications are based on several elegant technologies. But only when they are integrated do they provide uniquely powerful solutions. In the ensuing discussion of each of these layers, we will not elaborate on the various aspects of the network infrastructure that transports information. These were discussed extensively earlier and will not be addressed here. We begin our discussion with the application level services. Table 1.1.8a Electronic Commerce: A conceptual framework

15

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

1.1.8.1 Electronic Commerce Application Services The application services layer of e-commerce will be comprised of existing and future applications built on the innate architecture. Three distinct classes of electronic commerce application can be distinguished: customer to business, business-to-business, and intra organization Consumer-to-Business Transactions We call this category marketplace transaction. In a marketplace transaction, customers learn about products differently through electronic publishing, buy them differently using electronic cash and secure payment systems, and have them delivered differently. Also, how customers allocate their loyalty may also be different. In light of this, the organization itself has to adapt to a world where the traditional concepts of brand Differentiation no longer hold-where “quality” has a new meaning, where “content” may not be equated to “product,” Where “distribution” may not automatically mean “physical Transport.” In this new environment, brand equity can rapidly evaporate forcing firms to develop new ways of doing business Business-to Business Transactions We call this category market-link transaction. Here, businesses, governments, and other organizations depend on computer - to-computer communication as a fast, an economical, and a dependable way to conduct business’ transactions. Small companies are also beginning to see the benefits of adopting the same methods. Business-to-business transactions include the use of EDI and electronic mail for purchasing goods and services, buying information and consulting services, submitting requests for proposals, and receiving proposals. Examine this scenario. The current accounts payable process occurs through the exchange of paper documents. Each year the trading partners exchange millions of invoices, checks, purchase orders, financial reports, and other transactions. Most of the documents are in electronic form at their point of origin but are printed and key-entered at the point of receipt. The current manual process of printing, mailing is costly, time consuming, and error-prone.
16 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Given this situation and faced with the need to reduce costs, small businesses are looking toward electronic commerce as a possible savior. Intra-organizational Transactions We call this category market-driven transactions. A company becomes market driven by dispersing throughout the firm information about its customers and competitors; by spreading strategic and tactical decision making so that all units can participate; and by continuously monitoring their customer commitment by making improved customer satisfaction an ongoing objective. To maintain the relationships that are critical to delivering superior customer value, management must pay close attention to service, both before and after sales. In essence, a market-driven business develops a comprehensive understanding of its customers’ business and how customers in the immediate and downstream markets perceive value. Three major components of market-driven transactions are    customer orientation through product and service customization; cross-functional coordination through enterprise integration; and advertising, marketing, and customer service.

NOTES

1.1.8.2 Information Brokerage and Management The information brokerage and management layer provides service integration through the notion of information brokerages, the development of which is necessitated by the increasing information resource fragmentation. We use the notion of information brokerage to represent an intermediary who provides service integration between customers and information providers, given some constraint such as a low price, fast service, or profit maximization for a client. Information brokers, for example, are rapidly becoming necessary in dealing with the voluminous amounts of information on the networks. As on-line databases migrate to consumer information utilities, consumers and information professionals will have to keep up with the knowledge, and owner-ship of all these systems. Most professionals have enough trouble keeping track of files of 1 interest on one or two database services. With all the complexity associated with large numbers of on-line databases and service bureaus, if it is impossible to expect humans to do the searching. It
17 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

will have to be software programs-information brokers or software agents, to use the more popular term-that act on the searcher’s behalf. Information brokerage does more than just searching. It addresses the issue of adding value to the information that is retrieved. For instance, in foreign exchange trading, information is retrieved about the latest currency exchange rates in order to hedge currency holdings to minimize risk and maximize profit. In other words, the act of retrieving the information is the input to other transactions. With multiple transactions being the norm in the real world, service integration becomes critical. Taking the same foreign exchange example further, service integration allows one to link the hedging program (offered on a time-sharing basis by a third party) with the search program (could be another vendor) that finds the currency rates from the cheapest on-line service to automatically send trades to the bank or financial services company. In effect, a personalized automated trading system can be created without having to go to any financial institution. This is just one example of how information brokerages can add value. Another aspect of the brokerage function is the support for data management and traditional transaction services. Brokerages may provide tools to accomplish more sophisticated, time-delayed updates or future compensating transactions. These tools include software agents, distributed query generator, the distributed transaction generator, and the declarative resource constraint base which describes a business’s rules and-environment information. At the heart of this layer lies the work-flow scripting environment built on a software agent model that coordinates work and data flow among support services. As pointed out earlier, software agents are used to implement information brokerages. Software agents are mobile programs that have been called “healthy viruses,” “digital butlers/” and “intelligent agents.” Agents are encapsulations of users’ instruction that perform all kinds of tasks in electronic market places spread across networks. Information brokerages dispatch agents capable of information resource gathering, negotiating deals, and performing transactions. The agents are intelligent because they have contingency plans of action. They examine themselves and their environment and if necessary change from their original course of action to an alternative plan. For example, suppose you send an agent to an on-line store with a request to order a bouquet of roses for Rs. 25 or less. If the shop offers roses starting at Rs. 30, your agent can either choose a different bouquet or find a different store by consulting an online “Yellow Pages” directory, depending on prior instructions. Although the notion of software agents sounds very seductive, it will take a while to solve the problems of interregna
18 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

communication, interoperable agents, and other headaches that come with distributed computing and net-working. To some critics, the prospect of a single-agent language like Telescript as a world standard is disturbing. They worry that agents sound a bit too much like computer viruses, which instead of running errands may run amok. Vendors such as General Magic go to great lengths to explain the precautions it has taken to make this impossible: the limits placed on the power of agents, the “self-destruct” mechanism built into their codes. Yet until electronic commerce services are up and running on a large scale, it is impossible to know how well software agents will work. 1.1.8.3 Interface and Support Services The third layer, interface and support services will provide interfaces for electronic commerce applications such as interactive catalogs and will sup-port directory servicesfunctions necessary for information search and access. These two concepts are very different. Interactive catalogs are the customized interface to consumer applications such as home shopping. An interactive catalog is an extension of the paper-based catalog and incorporates additional features such as sophisticated graphics and video to make the advertising more attractive. Directories, on the other hand, operate behind the scenes and attempt to organize the enormous amount of information and transactions generated to facilitate electronic commerce. Directory services databases make data from any server appear as a local file. A classic example of a directory is the telephone White Pages, which allows us to locate people and telephone numbers. In the case of electronic commerce, directories would play an important role in information management functions. For instance, take the case of buying an airline ticket with several stopovers with the caveat that the time between layovers be minimized. This search would require several queries to various online directories to-find empty seats on various airlines and then the avail-ability of seats would; be coordinated with the amount of time spent in the air-port terminals. The primary difference between the two is that unlike interactive catalogs, which deal with people, directory support services interact directly with soft-ware applications. For this reason, they need not have the multimedia glitter and jazz generally associated with interactive catalogs. From a computing perspective, we can expect that there will be no one common user interface that will glaze the surface of all electronic commerce applications, but graphics and object manipulation will definitely dominate. Tool developers
19

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

and designers might incorporate common tools for interface building, but the shape of catalogs or directories will depend on the users’ desires and functional requirements. 1.1.8.4 Secure Messaging and Structured Document Interchange Services The importance of the fourth layer, secured messaging, is clear. Everyone in business knows that electronic messaging is a critical business issue. Consider a familiar business scenario: You hand over an urgent fax Monday and find out Tuesday that it’s still sitting on your fax operator’s desk. What happened? The line was busy and he thought he’d try again later. Or, the number was wrong, but he forgot to let you know. Or you’re in London and you need to send a spreadsheet that details a marketing plan for a product introduction strategy to a co-worker in New York. This must be done today, not tomorrow when the courier service would deliver. There is a solution to these common and frustrating problems. It’s called Integrated Messaging: a group of computer services that through the use of a network send, receive, and combine messages, faxes, and large data files. Some better-known examples are electronic mail, enhanced fax, and electronic data interchange. Broadly defined, messaging is the software that sits between the network infrastructure and the clients or electronic commerce applications, masking the peculiarities of the environment. Others define messaging as a frame-work for the total implementation of portable applications, divorcing you from the architectural primitives of your system. In general, messaging products are not applications that solve problems; they are more enablers of the applications that solve problems. Messaging services offer solutions for communicating non formatted (unstructured) data-letters, memos, and reports as weft asformatted (structured) data such as purchase orders, shipping notices, and invoices. Unstructured messaging consists of fax, e-mail, and form-based systems like Lotus Notes. Structured documents messaging consist of the automated inter-change of standardized and approved messages between computer applications, via telecommunications lines. Examples of structured document messaging include EDI. Messaging is gaining momentum in electronic commerce and seems to have many advantages. It supports both synchronous (immediate) and asynchronous (delayed) message delivery and processing. With asynchronous messaging, when a message is sent, work continues (software doesn’t wait for a response).This allows the transfer of messages through store-and-forward methods.
20 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Another advantage of messaging is that it is not associated with any particular communication protocol. No pre-processing is necessary, although there is an increasing need for programs to interpret the message. Messaging is well suited for both client server and peer-to-peer computing models. In distributed systems, the messages are treated as “objects” that pass between systems. Messaging is central to work-group computing that is changing the way businesses operate. The ability to access the right information at the right time across diverse work groups is a challenge. Today, with the messaging tools, people can communicate and work together more effectively-no matter where they are located. When an employee sends an electronic mail form, the information travels along with the form. So one person can start the form, mail it to the next person, fill it in/ sign it, mail it to the next, and so on. This is known as message-enabled work-flow solutions. The main disadvantages of messaging are the new types of applications it enableswhich appear to be more complex, especially to traditional programmers and the jungle of standards it involves. Because of the lack of standards, there is often no interoperability between different messaging vendors leading to islands of messaging. Also, security, privacy, and confidentiality through data encryption and authentication techniques are important issues that need to be resolved for ensuring the legality of the message-based transactions themselves. 1.1.8.5 Middleware Services Middleware is a relatively new concept that emerged only recently. Like so many other innovations, it came into being out of necessity. Users in the 1970s, when vendors, delivered homogeneous systems that worked, didn’t have a need for middleware3&heR conditions changed-along with the hardware and the software the organizations couldn’t cope: The tools were inadequate, the backlog was enormous, and the pressure was overwhelming. And, the users were dissatisfied. Something was needed to solve all the interface, translation, transformation, and interpretation problems that were driving application developers crazy. With the growth of networks, client-server technology, and all other forms of communicating between/among unlike platforms, the problems of getting all the pieces to work together grew from formidable to horrendous. As the cry for distributed computing spread, users demanded interaction between dissimilar systems, networks that permitted shared resources and applications that could be accessed by
21

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

multiple software programs. In simple terms, middleware is the ultimate mediator between diverse software pro-grams that enables them talk to one another. Another reason for middleware is the computing shift from application centric to data centric. That is, remote data controls all of the applications in the network instead of applications controlling data. To achieve data-centric computing, middleware services focus on three elements: transparency, transaction security and management, and distributed object management and services. Transparency Transparency implies that users should be unaware that they are accessing multiple systems. Transparency is essential for dealing with higher-level issues than physical media and interconnection that the underlying network infrastructure is in charge of. The ideal picture is one of a “virtual” network: a collection of workgroup, departmental, enterprise, and inter enterprise LANs that appears to the end user or client application to be a seamless and easily accessed whole. Transparency is accomplished using middleware that facilitates a distributed computing environment. This gives users and applications transparent access to data, computation, and other resources across collections of multi-vendor, heterogeneous systems. The strategic architectures of every major system vendor are now based on some form of middleware. The key to realizing the theoretical benefit of such architecture is transparency. Users need not spend their time trying to understand where something is. Nor should application developers have to code into their applications the exact locations of resources over the network. The goal is for the applications to send a request to the middleware layer, which then satisfies the request any way it can, using remote information. Transaction Security and Management Support for transaction processing (TP) is fundamental to success in the electronic commerce market. Security and management are essential to all layers in the electronic commerce model. At the transaction security level, two broad general categories of security services exist: authentication and authorization. Transaction integrity must be a given for businesses that cannot afford any loss or inconsistency in data. Some commercial sites have had gigantic centralized TP systems running for years. For electronic commerce, middleware provides the qualities expected in
22 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

a standard TP sys-tem: the so-called ACID properties (atomicity, consistency, isolation, and durability). Distributed Object Management and Services Object orientation is proving fundamental to the proliferation of network-based applications for the following reasons: It is too hard to write a net-work-based application without either extensive developer retraining or a technology that camouflages the intricacies of the network. Objects are defined as the combination of data and instructions acting on the data. Objects are an evolution of the more traditional programming concept of functions and procedures. A natural instance of an object in electronic commerce is a document. A document carries data and often carries instructions about the actions to be performed on the data. Today, the term object is being used interchangeably with document resulting in a new form of computing called document oriented computing. Here, the trend is to move away from single data-type documents such as text, pictures, or video toward integrated documents known as com-pound document architectures. The best example of this approach is an active document. If you create a new document that is an integration of the spreadsheet, word processor, and presentation package, what you’ll see in the next generation of operating systems is that as you scroll through your document, the tool bar will automatically change from a spreadsheet too bar, to a word processing tool bar, to a presentation package tool bar. These applications will also be able to access and retrieve data from any file in the computing network. Last but not the least is the Network Infrastructure, which will be dealt in this unit later. 1.1.9 Advantages of E-Commerce     Electronic Commerce can increase sales and decrease costs. Advertising done well on the web can get even a small firm’s promotional message out to potential customers in every country in the world. Businesses can use electronic commerce to identify new suppliers and business partners. Electronic Commerce increases the speed and accuracy with which businesses can exchange information, which reduces costs on both sides of transactions.
23

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES





E-Commerce provides buyers with a wider range of choices than traditional commerce because buyers can consider many different products and services from a wider variety of sellers. Electronic payments of tax refunds, public retirement and welfare support cost less to issue and arrive securely and quickly when transmitted over the Internet.

1.1.10 Disadvantages of E-Commerce  Some business processes such as perishable foods and high-cost, unique items such as custom-designed jewelry might be impossible to inspect adequately from a remote location. Costs, which are a function of technology, can change dramatically even during short-lived electronic commerce implementation projects because the technologies are changing so rapidly. Many firms have trouble recruiting and retaining employees with the technological, design and business process skills needed to create an effective electronic commerce presence. Firms facing difficulty of integrating existing databases and transactionprocessing software designed for traditional commerce into the software that enables electronic commerce. Companies that offer software design and consulting services to tie existing systems into new online business systems can be expensive. Consumers are fearful of sending their credit card numbers over the Internet and having online merchants. Consumers are simply resistant to change and are uncomfortable viewing merchandise on a computer screen rather than in person. 1.2 DRIVING FORCES OF E-COMMERCE E-Commerce is becoming popular, it is worthwhile to examine today’s business environment so let us understand the pressures it creates on organizations and the responses used by organizations.







 

24

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1.2.1 Environmental factors that create Business Pressures: Market, economical, societal and technological factors are creating a highly competitive business environment in which consumers are the focal point. These factors change quickly, sometimes in an unpredictable manner and therefore companies need to react frequently not only in the traditional actions such as lowering cost and closing unprofitable facilities but also innovative activities such as customizing products, creating new products or providing superb customer service. Economic Forces One of the most evident benefits of e-commerce is economic efficiency resulting from the reduction in communications costs, low-cost technological infrastructure, speedier and more economic electronic transactions with suppliers, lower global information sharing and advertising costs, and cheaper customer service alternatives. Categories of Economic Forces   Lower marketing costs: marketing on the Internet maybe cheaper and can reach a wider crowd than the normal marketing medium. Lower sales costs: increase in the customer volume do not need an increase in staff as the sales function is housed in the computer and has virtually unlimited accessibility Lower ordering processing cost: online ordering can be automated with checks to ensure that orders are correct before accepting, thus reducing errors and the cost of correcting them. New sales opportunities: the website is accessible all the time and reaches the global audience which is not possible with traditional storefront.

NOTES





Economic integration is either external or internal. External integration refers to the electronic networking of corporations, suppliers, customers/clients, and independent contractors into one community communicating in a virtual environment (with the Internet as medium). Internal integration, on the other hand, is the networking of the various departments within a corporation, and of business operations and processes. This allows critical business information to be stored in a digital form that can be retrieved instantly and transmitted electronically. Internal integration is best exemplified by corporate intranets.
25 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Among the companies with efficient corporate intranets are Procter and Gamble, IBM, Nestle and Intel. EG. SESAMi.NET: Linking Asian Markets through B2B Hubs SESAMi.NET is Asia’s largest B2B e-hub, a virtual exchange integrating and connecting businesses (small, medium or large) to trading partners, e-marketplaces and internal enterprise systems for the purpose of sourcing out supplies, buying and selling goods and services online in real time. The e-hub serves as the centre for management of content and the processing of business transactions with support services such as financial clearance and information services. It is strategically and dynamically linked to the Global Trading Web (GTW), the world’s largest network of trading communities on the Internet. Because of this very important link, SESAMi reaches an extensive network of regional, vertical and industry-specific interoperable B2B e-markets across the globe. Market Forces Corporations are encouraged to use e-commerce in marketing and promotion to capture international markets, both big and small. The Internet is likewise used as a medium for enhanced customer service and support. It is a lot easier for companies to provide their target consumers with more detailed product and service information using the Internet. Strong competition between organizations, extremely low labor cost in some countries, frequent and significant changes in markets and increased power of consumers are the reasons to create market forces. Technology Forces The development of information and communications technology (ICT) is a key factor in the growth of ecommerce. For instance, technological advances in digitizing content, compression and the promotion of open systems technology have paved the way for the convergence of communication services into one single platform. This in turn has made communication more efficient, faster, easier, and more economical as the need to set up separate networks for telephone services, television broadcast, cable television, and Internet access is eliminated. From the standpoint of firms/ businesses and consumers, having only one information provider means lower communications costs.

26

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Moreover, the principle of universal access can be made more achievable with convergence. At present the high costs of installing landlines in sparsely populated rural areas is incentive to telecommunications companies to install telephones in these areas. Installing landlines in rural areas can become more attractive to the private sector if revenues from these landlines are not limited to local and long distance telephone charges, but also include cable TV and Internet charges. This development will ensure affordable access to information even by those in rural areas and will spare the government the trouble and cost of installing expensive landlines Societal and environmental forces To understand the role of E-commerce in today’s organizations, it becomes necessary to review the factors that create societal and environmental forces.       Changing nature of workforce Government deregulations Shrinking government subsidies Increased importance of ethical and legal issues Increased social responsibility of organizations Rapid political changes

NOTES

1.2.2 Critical response activities by Organizations: A response can be a reaction to a pressure already in existence, or it can be an initiative that will defend an organization against future pressures. It can also be an activity that exploits an opportunity created by changing conditions. Organizations’ major responses are divided into five categories: strategic systems for competitive advantage, continuous improvement efforts, business process reengineering (BPR), business alliances and EC. These several responses can be interrelated and Ecommerce can also facilitate the other categories. The four categories are described below. Strategic Systems Strategic systems provide organizations with strategic advantages, thus enabling them to increase their market share, better negotiate with their suppliers, or prevent
27 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

competitors from entering into their territory. There is a variety of EC supported strategic systems. An example is FedEx’s overnight delivery system and the company’s ability to track the status of every individual package anywhere in the system. Most of FedEx’s competitors have already mimicked the system. So FedEx moved the system to the Internet. However, the competitors quickly followed and now FedEx is introducing new activities. Continuous Improvement Efforts In order to improve the company’s productivity and quality, many companies continuously conduct innovative programs. The efforts taken by companies for continuous improvement are       Improved productivity Improved decision making Managing Information Change in management Customer service Innovation and Creativity.

For example, Dell Computer takes its orders electronically and improved moves them via Enterprise Resources Planning software (from SAP Corp.) into the just-in-time assembly operation. Intel is taking its products’ consumption in 11 of its largest customers, using its extranets, almost in real time, and determining production schedules and deliveries accordingly. Business Process Reengineering (BPR) Business Process Reengineering refers to a major innovation in the organization’s structure and the way it conducts business. Information technology and especially EC play a major role in BPR. Electronic Commerce provides flexibility in manufacturing, permits faster delivery to customers and supports rapid and paperless transactions among suppliers, manufacturers and retailers. The major areas in which E-Commerce supports BPR are  Reducing cycle time and time to market: Reducing the business process time (cycle time) is extremely important for increasing productivity and competitiveness. Similarly, reducing the time from the inception of an idea until its implementation—
28 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT







time to market—is important because those who can be first on the market with a product, or who can provide customers with a service faster than competitors, enjoy a distinct competitive advantage. Empowerment of employees and collaborative work: Empowerment is related to the concept of self-directed teams. Management delegates authority to teams who can execute the work faster and with fewer delays. Information Technology allows the decentralization of decision making and authority but simultaneously supports a centralized control. For example, the Internet and the intranets enable empowered employees to access data, information and knowledge they need for making quick decisions. Knowledge management: Employees can access organizational know-how via their company’s intranet. Some knowledge bases are open to the public for a fee over the Internet, generating income. Customer-focused approach: Companies are becoming increasingly customer oriented. This can be done in part by changing manufacturing processes from mass production to mass customization. In mass production, a company produces a large quantity of identical items. In mass customization, items are produced in a large quantity but are customized to fit the desires of each customer. Electronic commerce is an ideal facilitator of mass customization.

NOTES

Business alliances Many companies realize that alliances with other companies, even competitors can be beneficial. There are several types of alliances, such as sharing resources, establishing permanent supplier-company relationships and creating joint research efforts. One of the most interesting types is the temporary joint venture, in which companies form a special organization for a specific, limited-time mission. 1.2.3 E-Commerce Communities What it is that will drive e-commerce in the future? — in a word, it’s community. We certainly have the technology to build great business-to-consumer and business-tobusiness ecommerce applications into our business models. And, yes, attributes such as viable application design, integration with business processes, and overall performance matter.

29

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

A successful community strategy must embrace the idea of moving the one-onone communication that occurs offline into the virtual world of e-commerce. Such a strategy currently requires multiple technical approaches. However, we believe community solutions will soon become more integrated and far-reaching. The tools that form online communities include discussion or forum software, chat functions, instant messaging, two-way mailing lists, online collaboration tools, audio, video, and more. You may choose to invest slowly at first and increase your community commitment over time. Online conversation with business partners will also give net positive results. A private discussion area or secured online meetings can go a long way toward building stronger relationships between companies. This will also serve to potentially drive new business opportunities for both parties. Building community has to be at the heart of any successful ecommerce strategy. 1.2.4 Is e-Commerce the Same as e-Business? While some use e-commerce and e-business interchangeably, they are distinct concepts. In e-commerce, information and communications technology (ICT) is used in inter-business or inter-organizational transactions (transactions between and among firms/ organizations) and in business-to-consumer transactions (transactions between firms/ organizations and individuals). In e-business, on the other hand, ICT is used to enhance one’s business. It includes any process that a business organization (either a for-profit, governmental or non-profit entity) conducts over a computer-mediated network. A more comprehensive definition of e-business is: “The transformation of an organization’s processes to deliver additional customer value through the application of technologies, philosophies and computing paradigm of the new economy.” Three primary processes are enhanced in e-business: 1. Production processes, which include procurement, ordering and replenishment of stocks; processing of payments; electronic links with suppliers; and production control processes, among others;
30 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

2. Customer-focused processes, which include promotional and marketing efforts, selling over the Internet, processing of customers’ purchase orders and payments, and customer support, among others; and 3. Internal management processes, which include employee services, training, internal information-sharing, videoconferencing, and recruiting. Electronic applications enhance information flow between production and sales forces to improve sales force productivity. Workgroup communications and electronic publishing of internal business information are likewise made more efficient. The Internet economy pertains to all economic activities using electronic networks as a medium for commerce or those activities involved in both building the networks linked to the Internet and the purchase of application services such as the provision of enabling hardware and software and network equipment for Web-based/online retail and shopping malls (or “e-malls”). 1.3 BENEFITS AND LIMITATIONS OF E-COMMERCE Few innovations in human history encompass as many potential benefits as EC does. The global nature of the technology, low cost, opportunity to reach hundreds of millions of people (projected within 10 years), interactive nature, variety of possibilities, and resourcefulness and rapid growth of the supporting infrastructures (especially the Web) result in many potential benefits to organizations, individuals, and society. These benefits are just starting to materialize, but they will increase significantly as EC expands. 1.3.1 The Benefits of EC       The new markets could be accessed through the online and extending the service offerings to customers globally. Internet shrinks the globe and broaden current geographical parameters to operate globally Marketing and promotional campaigns can be done globally at the reduced cost. Retaining the customer and the customer services could be improved drastically. Strengthen relationships with customers and suppliers ? Streamline business processes and administrative functions
31

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

 





No added sales staff A catalogue which is quickly and easily updateable. This means that when prices or stocks are changed, you don’t have to have hundreds or thousands of obsolete catalogues lying around. You don’t have to wait for the printer to deliver the catalogue before the new prices can come into effect. The facility to advertise daily, weekly or monthly ‘specials’ and sales, or any special discounts - and they can be changed within minutes, when and if necessary. You can also add a marketing message which highlights your strengths, such as the range and quality of your products or services - or anything else you want to tell your customers.

1.3.1.1. Benefits to Organizations  Electronic commerce expands the marketplace to national and international markets. With minimal capital outlay, a company can easily and quickly locate more customers, the best suppliers, and the most suitable business partners worldwide. Electronic commerce decreases the cost of creating, processing, distributing, storing, and retrieving paper-based information. For example, by introducing an electronic procurement system, companies can cut the purchasing administrative costs by as much as 85 percent. Ability for creating highly specialized businesses. For example, dog toys which can be purchased only in pet shops or department and discount stores in the physical world, are sold now in a specialized www.dogtoys.com Electronic commerce allows reduced inventories and overhead by facilitating “pull”-type supply chain management. In a pull-type system the process starts from customer orders and uses just-in-time manufacturing. Electronic commerce reduces the time between the outlay of capital and the receipt of products and services. Electronic commerce initiates business processes reengineering projects. By changing processes, productivity of salespeople, knowledge workers, and administrators can increase by 100 percent or more. Electronic commerce lowers telecommunications cost-the Internet is much cheaper than VANs.







 



32

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT



Other benefits include improved image, improved customer service, newfound business partners, simplified processes, compressed cycle and delivery time, increased productivity, eliminating paper, expediting access to information, reduced transportation costs, and increased flexibility.

NOTES

1.3.1.2 Benefits to Consumers   Electronic commerce enables customers to shop or do other transactions 24 hours a day, all year round, from almost any location. Electronic commerce provides customers with more choices; they can select. Electronic commerce frequently provides customers with less expensive products and services by allowing them to shop in many places and conduct quick comparisons. In some cases, especially with digitized products, EC allows quick delivery. Customers can receive relevant and detailed information in seconds, rather than days or weeks. Electronic commerce makes it possible to participate in virtual auctions. Electronic commerce allows customers to interact with other customers in electronic communities and exchange ideas as well as compare experiences. Electronic commerce facilitates competition, which results in substantial discounts.

    

1.3.1.3 Benefits to Society  Electronic commerce enables more individuals to work at home and to do less travelling for shopping, resulting in less traffic on the roads and lower air pollution. Electronic commerce allows some merchandise to be sold at lower prices, so less affluent people can buy more and increase their standard of living. Electronic commerce enables people in Third World countries and rural areas to enjoy products and services that otherwise are not available to them. Electronic commerce facilitates delivery of public services, such as health care, education, and distribution of government social services at a reduced cost and/or improved quality. Health-care services, for example, can reach patients in rural areas.

  

33

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

1.3.2 The Limitations of EC The limitations of EC can be grouped into technical and non-technical categories. 1.3.2.1 Technical Limitations of EC       There is a lack of system security, reliability, standards, and some communication protocols. Insufficient telecommunication bandwidth. The software development tools are still evolving and changing rapidly. It is difficult to integrate the Internet and EC software with some existing applications and databases. Vendors may need special Web servers and other infrastructures, in addition to the network servers. Some EC software might not fit some hardware, or may be incompatible with some operating systems or other components.

1.3.2.2 Non-technical Limitations Of the many non-technical limitations that slow the spread of EC, the following are the major ones.  Cost and justification: The cost of developing EC in-house can be very high, and mistakes due to lack of experience may result in delays. There are many opportunities for outsourcing, but where and how to do it is not a simple issue. Furthermore, to justify the system one must deal with some intangible benefits (such as improved customer service and the value of advertisement), which are difficult to quantify. Security and privacy: These issues are especially important in the B2C area, especially security issues which are perceived to be more serious than they really are when appropriate encryption is used. Privacy measures are constantly improved. Yet, the customers perceive these issues as very important, and, the EC industry has a very long and difficult task of convincing customers that online transactions and privacy are, in fact, very secure. Lack of trust and user resistance: Customers do not trust an unknown faceless seller (sometimes they do not trust even known ones), paperless
34 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI





E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

   

  

transactions, and electronic money. So switching from physical to virtual stores may be difficult. Other limiting factor:. Lack of touch and feel online. Some customers like to touch items such as clothes and like to know exactly what they are buying. Many legal issues are as yet unresolved, and government regulations and standards are not refined enough for many circumstances. Electronic commerce, as a discipline, is still evolving and changing rapidly. Many people are looking for a stable area before they enter into it. There are not enough support services. For example, copyright clearance centres for EC transactions do not exist, and high-quality evaluators, or qualified EC tax experts, are rare. In most applications there are not yet enough sellers and buyers for profitable EC operations. Electronic commerce could result in a breakdown of human relationships. Accessibility to the Internet is still expensive and/or inconvenient for many potential customers. (With Web TV, cell telephone access, kiosks, and constant media attention, the critical mass will eventually develop.) Despite these limitations, rapid progress in EC is taking place. For example, the number of people in the United States who buy and sell stocks electronically increased from 300,000 at the beginning of 1996 to about 10 million in fall 1999. As experience accumulates and technology improves, the ratio of EC benefits to costs will increase, resulting in a greater rate of EC adoption. The potential benefits may not be convincing enough reasons to start EC activities

NOTES

1.4 DATA MINING 1.4.1 Introduction to Data Mining Data mining, the extraction of hidden predictive information from large databases, is a powerful new technology with great potential to help companies focus on the most important information in their data warehouses. Data mining tools predict future trends and behaviours, allowing businesses to make proactive, knowledge-driven decisions. The automated, prospective analyses offered by data mining move beyond the analyses of past events provided by retrospective tools typical of decision support systems. Data mining tools can answer business questions that traditionally were too time-consuming to resolve. They scour databases for hidden patterns, finding predictive information that experts may miss because it lies outside their expectations.
35 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Most companies already collect and refine massive quantities of data. Data mining techniques can be implemented rapidly on existing software and hardware platforms to enhance the value of existing information resources, and can be integrated with new products and systems as they are brought on-line. 1.4.1.1. What is Data Mining? Data mining is the semi-automatic discovery of patterns, associations, changes, anomalies, rules, and statistically significant structures and events in data. That is, data mining attempts to extract knowledge from data. Data mining differs from traditional statistics in several ways: formal statistical inference is assumption driven in the sense that a hypothesis is formed and validated against the data. Data mining in contrast is discovery driven in the sense that patterns and hypothesis are automatically extracted from data. Said another way, data mining is data driven, while statistics is human driven. The branch of statistics that data mining resembles most is exploratory data analysis, although this field, like most of the rest of statistics, has been focused on data sets far smaller than most that are the target of data mining researchers. Data mining also differs from traditional statistics in that sometimes the goal is to extract qualitative models which can easily be translated into logical rules or visual representations; in this sense data mining is human centered and is sometimes coupled with human-computer interfaces research. Data mining is a step in the data mining process, which is an interactive, semiautomated process which begins with raw data. Results of the data mining process may be insights, rules, or predictive models. The field of data mining draws upon several roots, including statistics, machine learning, databases, and high performance computing. Here, we are primarily concerned with large data sets, massive data sets, and distributed data sets. By large, we mean data sets which are too large to fit into the memory of a single workstation. By massive, we mean data sets which are too large to fit onto the disks of a single workstation or a small cluster of workstations. Instead, massive clusters or tertiary storage such as tape are required. By distributed, we mean data sets which are geographically distributed.

36

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The focus on large data sets is not a just an engineering challenge; it is an essential feature of induction of expressive representations from raw data. It is only by analyzing large data sets that we can produce accurate logical descriptions that can be translated automatically into powerful predictive mechanisms. Otherwise, statistical and machine learning principles suggest the need for substantial user input (specifying meta-knowledge necessary to acquire highly predictive models from small data sets). 1.4.2 The Scope of Data Mining Data mining derives its name from the similarities between searching for valuable business information in a large database — for example, finding linked products in gigabytes of store scanner data — and mining a mountain for a vein of valuable ore. Both processes require either shifting through an immense amount of material, or intelligently probing it to find exactly where the value resides. Given databases of sufficient size and quality, data mining technology can generate new business opportunities by providing these capabilities:  Automated prediction of trends and behaviours. Data mining automates the process of finding predictive information in large databases. A typical example of a predictive problem is targeted marketing. Data mining uses data on past promotional mailings to identify the targets most likely to maximize return on investment in future mailings. Other predictive problems include forecasting bankruptcy and other forms of default, and identifying segments of a population likely to respond similarly to given events. Automated discovery of previously unknown patterns. Data mining tools sweep through databases and identify previously hidden patterns in one step. An example of pattern discovery is the analysis of retail sales data to identify seemingly unrelated products that are often purchased together. Other pattern discovery problems include detecting fraudulent credit card transactions and identifying anomalous data that could represent data entry keying errors. Data mining techniques can yield the benefits of automation on existing software and hardware platforms, and can be implemented on new systems as existing platforms are upgraded and new products developed. When data mining tools are implemented on high performance parallel processing systems, they can analyze massive databases in minutes. Faster processing means that users can automatically experiment with more models to understand complex data. High speed makes it practical for users to analyze huge quantities of data. Larger databases, in turn, yield improved predictions.
37

NOTES





ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

1.4.3 Techniques used in Data Mining The most commonly used techniques in data mining are:   Artificial neural networks: Non-linear predictive models that learn through training and resemble biological neural networks in structure. Decision trees: Tree-shaped structures that represent sets of decisions. These decisions generate rules for the classification of a dataset. Specific decision tree methods include Classification and Regression Trees (CART) and Chi Square Automatic Interaction Detection (CHAID) . Genetic algorithms: Optimization techniques that use processes such as genetic combination, mutation, and natural selection in a design based on the concepts of evolution. Nearest neighbour method: A technique that classifies each record in a dataset based on a combination of the classes of the k record(s) most similar to it in a historical dataset (where k ³ 1). Sometimes called the k-nearest neighbour technique. Rule induction: The extraction of useful if-then rules from data based on statistical significance.







Many of these technologies have been in use for more than a decade in specialized analysis tools that work with relatively small volumes of data. These capabilities are now evolving to integrate directly with industry-standard data warehouse and OLAP platforms. 1.4.4 How Data Mining Works The technique that is used to perform these feats in data mining is called modeling. Modeling is simply the act of building a model in one situation where you know the answer and then applying it to another situation that you don’t. For instance, if you were looking for a sunken Spanish galleon on the high seas the first thing you might do is to research the times when Spanish treasure had been found by others in the past. You might note that these ships often tend to be found off the coast of Bermuda and that there are certain characteristics to the ocean currents, and certain routes that have likely been taken by the ship’s captains in that era. You note these similarities and build a model that includes the characteristics that are common to the locations of these sunken treasures. With these models in hand you sail off looking for treasure where your model indicates it most likely
38 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

might be given a similar situation in the past. Hopefully, if you’ve got a good model, you find your treasure. This act of model building is thus something that people have been doing for a long time, certainly before the advent of computers or data mining technology. What happens on computers, however, is not much different than the way people build models. Computers are loaded up with lots of information about a variety of situations where an answer is known and then the data mining software on the computer must run through that data and distil the characteristics of the data that should go into the model. Once the model is built it can then be used in similar situations where you don’t know the answer. For example, say that you are the director of marketing for a telecommunications company and you’d like to acquire some new long distance phone customers. You could just randomly go out and mail coupons to the general population - just as you could randomly sail the seas looking for sunken treasure. In neither case would you achieve the results you desired and of course you have the opportunity to do much better than random - you could use your business experience stored in your database to build a model. As the marketing director you have access to a lot of information about all of your customers: their age, sex, credit history and long distance calling usage. The good news is that you also have a lot of information about your prospective customers: their age, sex, credit history etc. Your problem is that you don’t know the long distance calling usage of these prospects (since they are most likely now customers of your competition). You’d like to concentrate on those prospects who have large amounts of long distance usage. You can accomplish this by building a model. Table 1.4.4.(a) illustrates the data used for building a model for new customer prospecting in a data warehouse.   Table 1.4.4.(a) - Data Mining for Prospecting

NOTES

39

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

The goal in prospecting is to make some calculated guesses about the information in the lower right hand quadrant based on the model that we build going from Customer General Information to Customer Proprietary Information. Test marketing is an excellent source of data for this kind of modeling. Mining the results of a test market representing a broad but relatively small sample of prospects can provide a foundation for identifying good prospects in the overall market. Table 1.4.4.(b) shows another common scenario for building models: predict what is going to happen in the future. Table 1.4.4.(b) - Data Mining for Predictions

If someone told you that he had a model that could predict customer usage how would you know if he really had a good model? The first thing you might try would be to ask him to apply his model to your customer base - where you already knew the answer. With data mining, the best way to accomplish this is by setting aside some of your data in a vault to isolate it from the mining process. Once the mining is complete, the results can be tested against the data held in the vault to confirm the model’s validity. If the model works, its observations should hold for the vaulted data.

40

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1.4.5 Profitable Applications A wide range of companies have deployed successful applications of data mining. While early adopters of this technology have tended to be in information-intensive industries such as financial services and direct mail marketing, the technology is applicable to any company looking to leverage a large data warehouse to better manage their customer relationships. Two critical factors for success with data mining are: a large, well-integrated data warehouse and a well-defined understanding of the business process within which data mining is to be applied (such as customer prospecting, retention, campaign management, and so on). Some successful application areas include:  A pharmaceutical company can analyze its recent sales force activity and their results to improve targeting of high-value physicians and determine which marketing activities will have the greatest impact in the next few months. The data needs to include competitor market activity as well as information about the local health care systems. The results can be distributed to the sales force via a wide-area network that enables the representatives to review the recommendations from the perspective of the key attributes in the decision process. The ongoing, dynamic analysis of the data warehouse allows best practices from throughout the organization to be applied in specific sales situations. A credit card company can leverage its vast warehouse of customer transaction data to identify customers most likely to be interested in a new credit product. Using a small test mailing, the attributes of customers with an affinity for the product can be identified. Recent projects have indicated more than a 20fold decrease in costs for targeted mailing campaigns over conventional approaches. A diversified transportation company with a large direct sales force can apply data mining to identify the best prospects for its services. Using data mining to analyze its own customer experience, this company can build a unique segmentation identifying the attributes of high-value prospects. Applying this segmentation to a general business database such as those provided by Dun & Bradstreet can yield a prioritized list of prospects by region. A large consumer package goods company can apply data mining to improve its sales process to retailers. Data from consumer panels, shipments, and
41

NOTES







ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES


competitor activity can be applied to understand the reasons for brand and store switching. Through this analysis, the manufacturer can select promotional strategies that best reach their target customer segments. Each of these examples has a clear common ground. They leverage the knowledge about customers implicit in a data warehouse to reduce costs and improve the value of customer relationships. These organizations can now focus their efforts on the most important (profitable) customers and prospects, and design targeted marketing strategies to best reach them.

1.4.6 Trends that Effect Data Mining In this section, we describe five external trends which promise to have a fundamental impact on data mining. Data Trends. Perhaps the most fundamental external trend is the explosion of digital data during the past two decades. During this period, the amount of data probably has grown between six to ten orders of magnitude. Much of this data is accessible via networks. On the other hand, during this same period the number of scientists, engineers, and other analysts available to analyze this data has remained relatively constant. For example, the number of new Ph.D.’s in statistics graduating each year has remained relatively constant during this period. Only one conclusion is possible: either most of the data is destined to be write-only, or techniques, such as data mining, must be developed, which can automate, in part, the analysis of this data, filter irrelevant information, and extract meaningful knowledge. Hardware Trends. Data mining requires numerically and statistically intensive computations on large data sets. The increasing memory and processing speed of workstations enables the mining of data sets using current algorithms and techniques that were too large to be mined just a few years ago. In addition, the commoditization of high performance computing through SMP workstations and high performance workstation clusters enables attacking data mining problems that were accessible using only the largest supercomputers of a few years ago.

42

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Network Trends. The next generation internet (NGI) will connect sites at OC-3 (155 MBits/sec) speeds and higher. This is over 100 times faster than the connectivity provided by current networks. With this type of connectivity, it becomes possible to correlate distributed data sets using current algorithms and techniques. In addition, new protocols, algorithms, and languages are being developed to facilitate distributed data mining using current and next generation networks. Scientific Computing Trends. As mentioned above, scientists and engineers today view simulation as a third mode of science. Data mining and knowledge discovery serves an important role linking the three modes of science: theory, experiment and simulation, especially for those cases in which the experiment or simulation results in large data sets. Business Trends. Today businesses must be more profitable, react quicker, and offer higher quality services than ever before, and do it all using fewer people and at lower cost. With these types of expectations and constraints, data mining becomes a fundamental technology, enabling businesses to more accurately predict opportunities and risks generated by their customers and their customers’ transactions. 1.5 DATE WAREHOUSING 1.5.1 What Is Data Warehousing? The primary concept of data warehousing is that the data stored for business analysis can most effectively be accessed by separating it from the data in the operational systems. A data warehouse is a collection of computer-based information that is critical to successful execution of enterprise initiatives. A data warehouse is more than an archive for corporate data and more than a new way of accessing corporate data. A data warehouse is a subject-oriented repository designed with enterprise-wide access in mind. It provides tools to satisfy the information needs of the employees organizational levels-not just for complex data queries, but as general facility for getting quick, accurate and often insightful
43

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

information. A data warehouse is designed so that its users can recognize the information they want and access that information using simple tools. One of the principal reasons for developing a data warehouse is to integrate operational data from various sources into a single and consistent architecture that supports analysis and decision-making within the enterprise. Operational systems create, update and delete production data that feed the data warehouse. A data warehouse is analogous to a physical warehouse. Operational systems create data ‘parts’ that are loaded into the warehouse. Some of those parts are summarised into information ‘components’ and are stored in the warehouse. Data warehouse users make requests and are delivered information ‘products’ that are created from the components and parts stored in the warehouse. A data warehouse is typically a blending of technologies, including relational and multidimensional databases, client/ server architecture, extraction / transformation programs, graphical user interfaces, and more. 1.5.2 Definitions Data Warehouse: The term Data Warehouse was coined by Bill Inmon in 1990, which he defined in the following way: “A warehouse is a subject-oriented, integrated, time-variant and nonvolatile collection of data in support of management’s decision making process”. He defined the terms in the sentence as follows: Subject Oriented: Data that gives information about a particular subject instead of about a company’s ongoing operations. Integrated: Data that is gathered into the data warehouse from a variety of sources and merged into a coherent whole. Time-variant: All data in the data warehouse is identified with a particular time period.
44 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Non-volatile Data is stable in a data warehouse. More data is added but data is never removed. This enables management to gain a consistent picture of the business. This definition remains reasonably accurate almost ten years later. However, a single-subject data warehouse is typically referred to as a data mart, while data warehouses are generally enterprise in scope. Also, data warehouses can be volatile. Due to the large amount of storage required for a data warehouse, (multi-terabyte data warehouses are not uncommon), only a certain number of periods of history are kept in the warehouse. For instance, if three years of data are decided on and loaded into the warehouse, every month the oldest month will be “rolled off” the database, and the newest month added. Ralph Kimball provided a much simpler definition of a data warehouse. A data warehouse is “a copy o f transaction data specifically structured for query and analysis”. This definition provides less insight and depth than Mr. Inmon’s, but is no less accurate. Data warehousing is essentially what you need to do in order to create a data warehouse, and what you do with it. It is the process of creating, populating, and then querying a data warehouse and can involve a number of discrete technologies such as: 1.5.3 ADVANTAGES OF DATA WAREHOUSE Implementing a Data warehouse provides significant benefits many tangible, some intangible.  More cost effective decision making - A Data Warehouse allows reduction of staff and computer resources required to support queries and reports against operational and production databases. This typically offers significant savings. Having a Data Warehouse also eliminates the resource drain on production systems when executing long - running, complex queries and reports. Better enterprise intelligence - Increased quality and flexibility of enterprise analysis arises from the multi - tired data structures of a Data Warehouse that supports data ranging from detailed transactional level to high - level summary information. Guaranteed data accuracy and reliability result from ensuring that a Data Warehouse contains only ‘trusted’ data.

NOTES



45

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES







Enhanced customer service - An enterprise can maintain better customer relationships by correlating all customer data via a single Data Warehouse architecture. Business reengineering - Allowing unlimited analysis of enterprise information often provides insights into enterprise processes that may yield breakthrough ideas for reengineering those processes. Just defining the requirements for Data Warehouse, results in better enterprise goals and measure. Knowing what information is important to an enterprise will provide direction and priority for reengineering efforts. Information systems reengineering - A Data Warehouse that is based upon enterprise- wide data requirements provides a cost - effective means of establishing both data standardization and operational system interoperability. Data Warehouse development can be an effective first step in reengineering the enterprise’s legacy systems.

1.5.4 Types of Data warehouses: The term data warehouse is currently being used to describe a number of different facilities each with diverse characteristics. Physical data warehouse: This is an actual, physical database into which all the corporate data for the data warehouse are gathered, along with schemas (information about data) and the processing logic used to organize, package and pre-process the data for end user access. Logical data warehouse: This contains all the metadata, business rules and processing logic required scrub, organize, package, and pre-process the data. In addition, it contains the information required to find and access the actual data, wherever it actually resides. Data library: This is a subset of the enterprise wide data warehouse. Typically, it performs the role of departmental, regional, or functional data warehouse. As part of the data warehouse process, the organization builds a series of data libraries over time and eventually links them via an enterprise wide logical data warehouse. Decision support systems (DSSs): These systems are not data warehouses but applications that make use of the data warehouse. They are also called executive information systems (EIS)
46 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1.5.5 Aspects of Data Warehouse Architecture This list of aspects of architecture that the data warehouse decision maker will have to deal with themselves. There are many other architecture issues that affect the data warehouse, e.g., network topology, but these have to be made with all of an organization’s systems in mind (and with people other than the data warehouse team being the main decision makers.) Data consistency architecture This is the choice of what data sources, dimensions, business rules, semantics, and metrics an organization chooses to put into common usage. It is also the equally important choice of what data sources, dimensions, business rules, semantics, and metrics an organization chooses not to put into common usage. This is by far the hardest aspect of architecture to implement and maintain because it involves organizational politics. However, determining this architecture has more to do with determining the place of the data warehouse in your business than any other architectural decision. In my opinion, the decisions involved in determining this architecture should drive all other architectural decisions. Reporting data store and staging data store architecture The main reasons we store data in a data warehousing systems are so they can be: 1) reported against, 2) cleaned up, and (sometimes) 3) transported

NOTES

47

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Data modeling architecture This is the choice of whether you wish to use demoralized, normalized, objectoriented, proprietary multidimensional, etc. data models. As you may guess, it makes perfect sense for an organization to use a variety of models. Tool architecture This is your choice of the tools you are going to use for reporting and for what I call infrastructure. Processing tiers architecture This is your choice of what physical platforms will do what pieces of the concurrent processing that takes place when using a data warehouse. This can range from an architecture as simple as host-based reporting to one as complicated. Security architecture If you need to restrict access down to the row or field level, you will probably have to use some other means to accomplish this other than the usual security mechanisms at your organization. Note that while security may not be technically difficult to implement, it can cause political consternation. In the long run, decisions on data consistency architecture will probably have much more influence on the return of investment in the data warehouse than any other architectural decisions. To get the most return from a data warehouse (or any other system), business practices have to change in conjunction with or as a result of the system implementation. Conscious determination of data consistency architecture is almost always a prerequisite to using a data warehouse to effect business practice change.

48

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1.6 NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIREMENTS The network infrastructure is the underlying foundation of the system. It forms the services that create the operating makeup of your network. In a Communications Services deployment, determining your network infrastructure from the project goals ensures that you will have an architecture that can scale and grow. 1.6.1 The Existing Network We need to understand our existing network infrastructure to determine how well it can meet the needs of our deployment goals. By examining our existing infrastructure, we identify if we need to upgrade existing network components or purchase new network components. We should build up a complete map of the existing network by covering these areas: 1. Physical communication links, such as cable length, grade, and so forth 2. Communication links, such as analog, ISDN, VPN, T3, and so forth, and available bandwidth and latency between sites 3. Server information, including:  Host names  IP addresses  Domain Name System (DNS) server for domain membership 4. Locations of devices on your network, including:  Hubs  Switches  Modems  Routers and bridges  Proxy servers 5. Number of users at each site, including mobile users

NOTES

49

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

After completing this inventory, you need to review that information in conjunction with your project goals to determine what changes are required so that you can successfully deliver the deployment. 1.6.2 Network Infrastructure Components The following common network infrastructure components have a direct impact upon the success of your deployment:      Routers and switches Firewalls Load balancers Storage Area Network (SAN) DNS

Routers and Switches Routers connect networks of your infrastructure, enabling systems to communicate. You need to ensure that the routers have spare capacity after the deployment to cope with projected growth and usage. In a similar vein, switches connect systems within a network. Routers or switches running at capacity tend to induce escalating bottlenecks, which result in significantly longer times for clients to submit messages to servers on different networks. In such cases, the lack of foresight or expenditure to upgrade the router or switch could have a personnel productivity impact far greater than the cost. Firewalls Firewalls sit between a router and application servers to provide access control. Firewalls were originally used to protect a trusted network (yours) from the untrusted network (the Internet). These days, it is becoming more common to protect application servers on their own (trusted, isolated) network from the untrusted networks (your network and the Internet). Router configurations add to the collective firewall capability by screening the data presented to the firewall. Router configurations can potentially block undesired services
50 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

(such as NFS, NIS, and so forth) and use packet-level filtering to block traffic from untrusted hosts or networks. In addition, when installing a Sun server in an environment that is exposed to the Internet, or any untrusted network, reduce the Solaris software installation to the minimum number of packages necessary to support the applications to be hosted. Achieving minimization in services, libraries, and applications helps increase security by reducing the number of subsystems that must be maintained. The Solaris™ Security Toolkit provides a flexible and extensible mechanism to minimize, harden, and secure Solaris systems. Load Balancers Use load balancers to distribute overall load on your Web or application servers, or to distribute demand according to the kind of task to be performed. If, for example, you have a variety of dedicated applications and hence different application servers, you might use load balancers according to the kind of application the user requests. If you have multiple data centers, you should consider geographic load balancing. Geographic load balancing distributes load according to demand, site capacity, and closest location to the user. If one center should go down, the geographic load balancer provides failover ability. For load balancers on Web farms, place the hardware load balancers in front of the servers and behind routers because they direct routed traffic to appropriate servers. Software load balancing solutions reside on the Web servers themselves. With software solutions, one of the servers typically acts a traffic scheduler. A load balancing solution is able to read headers and contents of incoming packets. This enables you to balance load by the kind of information within the packet, including the user and the type of request. A load balancing solution that reads packet headers enables you to identify privileged users and to direct requests to servers handling specific tasks. Storage Area Networks (SANs) Understanding the data requirements of the storage system is necessary for a successful deployment. Increasingly, SANs are being deployed so that the storage is
51

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

independent of the servers used in conjunction with it. Deploying SANs can represent a decrease in the time to recover from a non-functional server as the machine can be replaced without having to relocate the storage drives. Use these questions to evaluate if your deployment storage requirements would be best served through a SAN:     Are reads or writes more prevalent? Do you need high I/O rate storage? Is striping the best option? Do you need high uptime? Is mirroring the best option? How is the data to be backed up? When is it going to be backed up?

Domain Name System (DNS) Servers which make heavy usage of DNS queries should be equipped with a local caching DNS server to reduce lookup latency as well as network traffic. When determining your requirements, consider allocating host names for functions such as mailstore, mail-relay-in, mail-relay-out, and so forth. You should consider this policy even if the host names all are currently hosted on one machine. With services configured in such a way, relocation of the services to alternate hardware significantly reduces the impacts of the change. 1.6.3 Planning Your Network Infrastructure Layout In deriving your infrastructure topology, you need to consider the following topics:       DMZ Intranet Internal network Proxies Firewall Configuration Mobile users

Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) These days, most company networks are configured for a DMZ. The DMZ separates the corporate network from the Internet. The DMZ is a tightly secured area into
52 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

which you place servers providing Internet services and facilities (for example, web servers). These machines are hardened to withstand the attacks they might face. To limit exposure in case of a security breach from such attacks, these servers typically contain no information about the internal network. For example, the name server facilities only include the server and the routers to the Internet. Progressively, DMZ implementations have moved the segment behind the firewall as firewall security and facilities have increased in robustness. However, the DMZ still remains segmented from the internal networks. You should continue to locate all machines hosting Web servers, FTP servers, mail servers, and external DNS on a DMZ segment. A simpler network design might only define separate DMZ segments for Internet services, VPN access, and remote access. However, security issues exist with VPN and remote access traffic. You need to separate appropriate connections of these types from the rest of the network. The firewall providing the DMZ segmentation should allow only inbound packets destined to the corresponding service ports and hosts offering the services within the DMZ. Also, limit outbound initiated traffic to the Internet to those machines requiring access to the Internet to carry out the service they are providing (for example, DNS and mail). You might want to segment an inbound-only DMZ and an outbound-only DMZ, with respect to the type of connection requests. However, given the potential of a denial-of-service attack interrupting DNS or email, consider creating separate inbound and outbound servers to provide these services. Should an email-based Trojan horse or worm get out of control and overrun your outbound mail server, inbound email can still be received. Apply the same approach to DNS servers. Intranet The DMZ provides a network segment for hosts that offer services to the Internet. This design protects your internal hosts, as they do not reside on the same segment as hosts that could be compromised by an external attack. Internally, you also have similar services to offer (Web, mail, file serving, internal DNS, and so on) that are meant solely for internal users. Just as the Internet services are segmented, so too, are the internal services. Separation of services in this manner also permits tighter controls to be placed on the router filtering.
53

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Just as you separate the Internet-facing services into the DMZ for security, your private internal services should reside in their own internal DMZ. In addition, just as multiple DMZs can be beneficial—depending on your services and your network’s size—multiple intranets might also be helpful. The firewall rules providing the segmentation should be configured similarly to the rules used for the DMZ’s firewall. Inbound traffic should come solely from machines relaying information from the DMZ (such as inbound email being passed to internal mail servers) and machines residing on the internal network. Internal Network The segments that remain make up your internal network segments. These segments house users’ machines or departmental workstations. These machines request information from hosts residing on the intranet. Development, lab, and test network segments are also included in this list. Use a firewall between each internal network segment to filter traffic to provide additional security between departments. Identify the type of internal network traffic and services used on each of these segments to determine if an internal firewall would be beneficial. Machines on internal networks should not communicate directly with machines on the Internet. Preferably, these machines avoid direct communication with machines in the DMZ. Ultimately, the services they require should reside on hosts in the intranet. A host on the intranet can in turn communicate with a host in the DMZ to complete a service (such as outbound email or DNS). This indirect communication is acceptable. Proxies Only the machines directly communicating with machines on the Internet should reside in the DMZ. If users require Internet access, though, this creates a problem based on your previous topology decisions. In this situation, proxies become helpful. Place a proxy on an internal network segment, or, better yet, an intranet segment. A machine requiring access to the Internet can pass its request onto the proxy, which in turn makes the request on the machine’s behalf. This relay out to the Internet helps shield the machine from any potential danger it might encounter.

54

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Because the proxy communicates directly with machines on the Internet, it should reside in the DMZ. However, this conflicts with the desire to prevent internal machines from directly communicating with DMZ machines. To keep this communication indirect, use a double proxy system. A second proxy residing in the intranet passes connection requests of the internal machines to the proxy in the DMZ, which in turn makes the actual connection out on the Internet. Firewall Configuration In addition to the typical packet-filtering features, most firewalls provide features to prevent IP spoofing. Use IP-spoofing protection whenever possible. For instance, if there is only one entry point into your network from the Internet and a packet is received from the Internet with a source address of one of your internal machines, it was likely spoofed. Based on your network’s topology, the only packets containing a source IP address from your internal machines should come from within the network itself, not from the Internet. By preventing IP spoofing, this possibility is eliminated, and the potential for bypassing IP address-based authorization and the other firewallfiltering rules is reduced. Use the same IP-spoofing protection on any internal firewall as well. Mobile Users When you have remote or mobile users, pay attention to how you will provide them access to the facilities. Will there be any facilities they cannot access? What kind of security policies do you need to address? Will you require SSL for authentication? Also, examine whether your mobile user population is stable or is expected to increase over time. 1.7 TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL/INTERNET PROTOCOL TCP / IP 1.7.1 Introduction to TCP/IP: The realization that stand - alone computers made no sense made the network possible. When there were too many of them, people realized that stand - alone networks
55

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

made little sense either, and that they also needed to talk to one another. This was the problem confronting the US Government and the academic community in the late 60s. Everything they had was heterogeneous-computers, networks, operating systems and networking software. Connecting these networks was either impossible or done using expensive proprietary network devices. Something had to be done. Rather than surrender to the monopoly of vendors, the US Department of Defence (DOD) initiated work on a project with a simple objective: develop a set of standard rules (Protocols) which could be used by all machines and networks to communicate. The solution had to be vendor - neutral, independent of the hardware or the operating system, and even the geographical location. The solution they found was TCP/IP/. It became so successful that both the Internet and the World Wide Web adopted it is their protocol. TCP and IP were developed to connect a number different networks designed by different vendors into a network of networks (the “Internet”). It was initially successful because it delivered a few basic services that everyone needs (file transfer, electronic mail, remote logon) across a very large number of client and server systems. Several computers in a small department can use TCP/IP (along with other protocols) on a single LAN. The IP component provides routing from the department to the enterprise network, then to regional networks, and finally to the global Internet. On the battlefield a communications network will sustain damage, so the DOD designed TCP/IP to be robust and automatically recover from any node or phone line failure. This design allows the construction of very large networks with less central management. However, because of the automatic recovery, network problems can go undiagnosed and uncorrected for long periods of time. 1.7.2 Internet Protocols: A protocol is a set of rules that determines how two computers communicate with one another over a network. The protocols around which the Internet was designed embody a series of design principles.  Interoperable-the system supports computers and software from different vendors. For EC, this means that the customers or businesses are not required to buy specific systems in order to conduct business. Layered-the collection of Internet protocols works in layers with each layer building on the layers at lower levels. This layered architecture is shown in



56

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT





Simple-each of the layers in the architecture provides only a few functions or operations. This means that application programmers are hidden from the complexities of the underlying hardware. End-to end- the Internet is based on end-to-end protocols. This means that the interpretation of the data happens at the application layer(i.e the sending and the receiving side) and not at the network layers. It is much like the post office. The job of the post office is to deliver the mail, only the sender and the receiver are concerned about its contents.

NOTES

1.7.3 What is TCP/IP? TCP/IP is a set of protocols developed to allow cooperating computers to share resources across a network. It was developed by a community of researchers centered around the ARPAnet. Certainly the ARPAnet is the best- known TCP/IP network. The most accurate name for the set of protocols are describing is the “Internet protocol suite”. TCP and IP are two of the protocols in this suite. Because TCP and IP are the best known of the protocols, it has become common to use the term TCP/IP or IP/ TCP to refer to the whole family.
57 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

TCP/IP is a family of protocols. A few provide “low- level” functions needed for many applications. These include IP, TCP, and UDP.  IP - is responsible for moving packet of data from node to node. IP forwards each packet based on a four byte destination address (the IP number). The Internet authorities assign ranges of numbers to different organizations. The organizations assign groups of their numbers to departments. IP operates on gateway machines that move data from department to organization to region and then around the world. TCP - is responsible for verifying the correct delivery of data from client to server. Data can be lost in the intermediate network. TCP adds support to detect errors or lost data and to trigger retransmission until the data is correctly and completely received. UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a simple transport-layer protocol. It does not provide the same features as TCP, and is thus considered “unreliable.” Again, although this is unsuitable for some applications, it does have much more applicability in other applications than the more reliable and robust TCP. One of the things that makes UDP nice is its simplicity. Because it doesn’t need to keep track of the sequence of packets, whether they ever made it to their destination, etc., it has lower overhead than TCP. This is another reason why it’s more suited to streaming-data applications: there’s less screwing around that needs to be done with making sure all the packets are there, in the right order, and that sort of thing.





Others are protocols for doing specific tasks, e.g. transferring files between computers, sending mail, or finding out who is logged in on another computer. 1.7.4 TCP/IP Services Initially TCP/IP was used mostly between minicomputers or mainframes. These machines had their own disks, and generally were self- contained. Thus the most important “traditional” TCP/IP services are: File transfer. The file transfer protocol (FTP) allows a user on any computer to get files from another computer, or to send files to another computer. Security is handled by requiring the user to specify a user name and password for the other computer.
58 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

 Remote login The network terminal protocol (TELNET) allows a user to log in on any other computer on the network. You start a remote session by specifying a computer to connect to. From that time until you finish the session, anything you type is sent to the other computer. Note that you are really still talking to your own computer. But the telnet program effectively makes your computer invisible while it is running. Every character you type is sent directly to the other system. Generally, the connection to the remote computer behaves much like a dialup connection. That is, the remote system will ask you to log in and give a password, in whatever manner it would normally ask a user who had just dialed it up.  Computer mail. This allows you to send messages to users on other computers. Originally, people tended to use only one or two specific computers. They would maintain “mail files” on those machines. The computer mail system is simply a way for you to add a message to another user’s mail file. There are some problems with this in an environment where microcomputers are used. The most serious is that a micro is not well suited to receive computer mail. When you send mail, the mail software expects to be able to open a connection to the addressee’s computer, in order to send the mail. If this is a microcomputer, it may be turned off, or it may be running an application other than the mail system. For this reason, mail is normally handled by a larger system, where it is practical to have a mail server running all the time. Microcomputer mail software then becomes a user interface that retrieves mail from the mail server. 1.7.5 Features Of Tcp/Ip A protocol is a set of rules that have to use by two or more machines to talk to one another. These rules are independent of the applications that have no idea of what is going on at the two ends of the communication channel. The goals of TCP/IP were set by the US Department of Defence, and today, they are its inherent features:  Independence of vendor, type of machine and network - This was necessary to finally break the monopoly of vendors who claimed that their product alone will save the world.
59

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES



  

Failure recovery - Being originally meant for the defence network, it should be able to divert data immediately through other routes if one or more parts of the network went down. Facility to connect new sub networks without significant disruption of services High error rate handling - The transmission, irrespective of the distance travelled, must be 100% reliable, with facilities for full error control. Enable reliable transmission of files, remote login and remote execution of commands.

TCP/IP originally began by the development of a collection of programs (the DARPA set) that enabled computers to talk among themselves. Later, Berkeley developed an entire suite of tools that are today known as the r – utilities because all their command names are prefixed with an “r. Some of the most important application available in the TCP / IP family are:         ftp and rep for file transfer telnet and rlogin for logging in to remote machines rsh (rcmd in SCO UNIX) for executing a command in a remote machine without logging in The Network File System (NFS) which lets one machine treat the file system of a remote machine as its own The electronic mail service using the Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP), Post Office Protocol (POP) and the mail, pine and elm mailers Remote printing which allows people to access printers on remote computers as if they were connected locally The Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP) of the World Wide Web which browsers like Netscape use to fetch HTML documents The point – to – Point Protocol (PPP) which makes all these facilities available through a telephone line

1.7.6 TCP/IP Terminology The Internet standards use a specific set of terms when referring to network elements and concepts related to TCP/IP networking. These terms provide a foundation for subsequent chapters illustrates the components of an IP network. \
60 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

NOTES

Elements of an IP network Common terms and concepts in TCP/IP are defined as follows:   Node Any device, including routers and hosts, which runs an implementation of IP. Router  A node that can forward IP packets not explicitly addressed to itself. On an IPv6 network, a router also typically advertises its presence and host configuration information. Host  A node that cannot forward IP packets not explicitly addressed to itself (a non-router). A host is typically the source and the destination of IP traffic. A host silently discards traffic that it receives but that is not explicitly addressed to itself. Upper-layer protocol A protocol above IP that uses IP as its transport. Examples include Internet layer protocols such as the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) and Transport layer protocols such as the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP). LAN segment  A portion of a subnet consisting of a single medium that is bounded by bridges. Subnet  One or more LAN segments that are bounded by routers and use the same IP address prefix. Other terms for subnet are network segment and link. Network  Two or more subnets connected by routers. Another term for network is internet work.
61 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI





 



DBA 1727

NOTES

  



Air  A node connected to the same subnet as another node. Interface  The representation of a physical or logical attachment of a node to a subnet. An example of a physical interface is a network adapter. Address  An identifier that can be used as the source or destination of IP packets and that is assigned at the Internet layer to an interface or set of interfaces. Packet  The protocol data unit (PDU) that exists at the Internet layer and comprises an IP header and payload.

In a network, a computer is known as a host, sometimes a node, and every such host has a hostname. This name is unique throughout the network. Each machine is fitted with a network interface card that is connected by wire to the corresponding cards in other machines. All communication between hosts normally takes place through these network interfaces only. Every TCP/IP network has an address that is used by external networks to direct their messages. Every host in the network has an address as well, and the combination of these two addresses forms the complete network address of the host. For instance, 192.168 (or strictly speaking, 192.168.0.0) could be the address of a network, and a host within the network could have the host address of 45.67. In that case, 192.168.45.67 represents the complete network address of the host. This address has to be unique not only within the network, but also to all connected networks. And, if the network is hooked up to the Internet, it has to be unique throughout the world. When two or more networks are connected together, and uses the TCP/IP protocol for communication, we have an internet, popularly known as an intranet, which is the super – network of all networks. A local internet or intranet may easily be connected to the Internet which also uses the same protocol. Now many installations have several kinds of computers, including microcomputers, workstations, minicomputers, and mainframes. These computers are likely to be configured to perform specialized tasks. Although people are still likely to work with one specific computer, that computer will call on other systems on the net for specialized services. This has led to the “server/client” model of network services. A server is a system that provides a specific service for the rest of the network. A client is another system that uses that service. (Note that the server and client need not be on different computers. They could be different programs running on the same computer.) Here are the kinds of servers typically present in a modern computer setup. Note that these computer services can all be provided within the framework of TCP/IP.
62 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT









network file systems. A network file system provides the illusion that disks or other devices from one system are directly connected to other systems. There is no need to use a special network utility to access a file on another system. Your computer simply thinks it has some extra disk drives. These extra “virtual” drives refer to the other system’s disks. This capability is useful for several different purposes. It lets you put large disks on a few computers, but still give others access to the disk space. Aside from the obvious economic benefits, this allows people working on several computers to share common files. It makes system maintenance and backup easier, because you don’t have to worry about updating and backing up copies on lots of different machines. A number of vendors now offer high-performance diskless computers. These computers have no disk drives at all. They are entirely dependent upon disks attached to common “file servers”. remote printing. This allows you to access printers on other computers as if they were directly attached to yours. (The most commonly used protocol is the remote lineprinter protocol from Berkeley Unix) remote execution. This is useful when you can do most of your work on a small computer, but a few tasks require the resources of a larger system. There are a number of different kinds of remote execution. Some operate on a command by command basis. That is, you request that a specific command or set of commands should run on some specific computer. However there are also “remote procedure call” systems that allow a program to call a subroutine that will run on another computer. name servers. In large installations, there are a number of different collections of names that have to be managed. This includes users and their passwords, names and network addresses for computers, and accounts. It becomes very tedious to keep this data up to date on all of the computers. Thus the databases are kept on a small number of systems. Other systems access the data over the network. terminal servers. Many installations no longer connect terminals directly to computers. Instead they connect them to terminal servers. A terminal server is simply a small computer that only knows how to run telnet (or some other protocol to do remote login). If your terminal is connected to one of these, you simply type the name of a computer, and you are connected to it. Generally it is possible to have active connections to more than one computer at the same time. The terminal server will have provisions to switch between
63

NOTES



ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES


connections rapidly, and to notify you when output is waiting for another connection. network-oriented window systems. Until recently, high-performance graphics programs had to execute on a computer that had a bit-mapped graphics screen directly attached to it. Network window systems allow a program to use a display on a different computer. Full-scale network window systems provide an interface that lets you distribute jobs to the systems that are best suited to handle them, but still give you a single graphically-based user interface.

1.7.7 TCP/IP – Connectionless technology: TCP/IP is built on “connectionless” technology. Information is transferred as a sequence of “datagrams”. A datagram is a collection of data that is sent as a single message. Each of these datagrams is sent through the network individually. There are provisions to open connections (i.e. to start a conversation that will continue for some time). However at some level, information from those connections is broken up into datagrams, and those datagrams are treated by the network as completely separate. For example, suppose you want to transfer a 15000 octet file. Most networks can’t handle a 15000 octet datagram. So the protocols will break this up into something like 30 500-octet datagrams. Each of these datagrams will be sent to the other end. At that point, they will be put back together into the 15000-octet file. However while those datagrams are in transit, the network doesn’t know that there is any connection between them. It is perfectly possible that datagram 14 will actually arrive before datagram 13. It is also possible that somewhere in the network, an error will occur, and some datagram won’t get through at all. In that case, that datagram has to be sent again. 1.8 HYPERTEXT MARKUP LANGUAGE (HTML) 1.8.1 Web Based Client / Server Over the past three or four years, the World Wide Web (WWW) has come to dominate the traffic on the Internet. The vast majority of EC applications are Web based. In such applications, the clients are called Web browsers and the servers are simply called Web servers. Like other client/server applications, Web browsers and servers need as way
64 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1) to locate each other so they can send requests and responses back and forth and 2) to communicate with one another. To fulfil these needs, a new addressing scheme – the URL - and a new protocol – the Hypertext Transport Protocol (HTTP) were introduced. 1.8.1.1 Universal Resource Locator (URL) Universal Resource Locators (URLs) are ubiquitous, appearing on the Web, in print, on billboards, on television, and anywhere else a company can advertise. We are all familiar with “www .anywhere.com”. This is the default syntax for a URL. The complete syntax for an “absolute” URL is access – method: // server –name [: port]/directory/file, where the access – method can be http, ftp, gopher, or telnet. In the case of a URL like www.ge.com, for example, the access – method (http), port (80), directory, and file (e.g., home page.htm) take default values, as opposed to the following example where all the values are explicitly specified: http://info.cern.ch:80/hypertext/Data Sources/ Geographical.html. What this URL represents is the Web page “Geographical.html” on the server “info.cern.ch” stored in the directory “Data Sources”. 1.8.1.2 Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the set of rules, or protocol that governs the transfer of hypertext between two or more computers. The World Wide Web encompasses the universe of information that is available via HTTP. Hypertext is text that is specially coded using a standard system called Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). The HTML codes are used to create links. These links can be textual or graphic and when clicked on, can “link” the user to another resource such as other HTML documents, text files, graphics, animation and sound. HTTP is based on client/server principle. HTTP allows the client to establish a connection with the server and make a request. The server request identifies the resource that the client is interested in and tells the server what “action” to take on the resource. When a user selects a hypertext link, the client program on their computer uses HTTP to contact the server, identify a resource, and ask the server to respond with an
65

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

action. The server accepts the request, and then uses HTTP to respond to or perform the action. HTTP also provides access to other Internet protocols like File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP), WAIS, Gopher, Telnet, etc. 1.8.2 Mark Uplanguages and The Web Web pages can include many elements, such as graphics, photographs, sound clips, and even small programs that run in the web browser. Each of these elements is stored on the Web server as a separate file. The most important parts of a Web page, however, are the structure of the page and the text that makes up the main part of the page. The page structure and text are stored in a text file that is formatted, of marked up, using a text mark up language. A text mark up language specifies a set of tags that are inserted into the text. These mark up tags, also called tags, provide formatting instructions that Web client software can understand. The Web client software uses those instructions as it renders the text and page elements contained in the other files into the Web page that appears on the screen of the client computer. The markup language most commonly used on the web is HTML, which is a subset of a much older and far more complex text markup language called Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). HTML, XML and XHTML have descended from the original SGML specification. SGML was used for many years by the publishing industry to create documents that needed to be printed in various formats and they were revised frequently. In addition to its role as a markup language, SGML is a meta language, which is a language that can be used to define other languages. Another markup language that was derived from SGML for use on the Web is Extensible Markup Language (XML), which is increasingly used to mark up information that companies share with each other over the Internet 1.8.3 Hypertext Markup Language (Html) A web page is created using HTML. HTML stands for Hypertext Markup Language. HTML is a special kind of text document that is used by Web browsers to present text and graphics.HTML consists of standardized codes or ‘tags’ that are used to define the structure of information on a web page.
66 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The text includes markup tags such as <p> to indicate the start of a paragraph, and </p> to indicate the end of a paragraph. HTML documents are often referred to as “Web pages”. The browser retrieves Web pages from Web servers that thanks to the Internet can be pretty much anywhere in World. HTML is standardized and portable. A document that has been prepared using HTML markup “tags” can be viewed using variety of web browsers such as Netscape, Lynx etc... A browser interprets the tags in an HTML file and presents the file as a formatted readable web page. 1.8.3.1 HTML Tags: HTML tags are used to define areas of document as having certain characteristics. The tags used in HTML usually consist of a code in between two “wickets”. These codes are called container tags because the formatting described by the tag affects only the text contained between the tags.       start with a title add headings and paragraphs add emphasis to your text add images add links to other pages use various kinds of lists

NOTES

Start with a title Every HTML document needs a title. Here is what you need to type: <title>My first HTML document</title> Change the text from “My first HTML document” to suit your own needs. The title text is preceded by the start tag <title> and ends with the matching end tag </title>. The title should be placed at the beginning of your document. To try this out, type the above into a text editor and save the file as “test.html”, then view the file in a web browser. If the file extension is “.html” or “.htm” then the browser will recognize it as HTML. Most browsers show the title in the window caption bar. With just
67 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

a title, the browser will show a blank page. Don’t worry. The next section will show how to add displayable content. Add headings and paragraphs If you have used Microsoft Word, you will be familiar with the built in styles for headings of differing importance. In HTML there are six levels of headings. H1 is the most important; H2 is slightly less important, and so on down to H6, the least important. Here is how to add an important heading: <h1>An important heading</h1> and here is a slightly less important heading: <h2>A slightly less important heading</h2> Each paragraph you write should start with a <p> tag. The </p> is optional, unlike the end tags for elements like headings. For example: <p>This is the first paragraph.</p> <p>This is the second paragraph.</p> Adding a bit of emphasis You can emphasize one or more words with the <em> tag, for instance: This is a really <em>interesting</em> topic! Adding interest to your pages with images Images can be used to make your Web pages distinctive and greatly help to get your message across. The simple way to add an image is using the <img> tag. Let’s assume you have an image file called “peter.jpg” in the same folder/directory as your HTML file. It is 200 pixels wide by 150 pixels high. <img src=”peter.jpg” width=”200" height=”150"> The src attribute names the image file. The width and height aren’t strictly necessary but help to speed the display of your Web page. Something is still missing! People who
68 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

can’t see the image need a description they can read in its absence. You can add a short description as follows: <img src=”peter.jpg” width=”200" height=”150" alt=”My friend Peter”> The alt attribute is used to give the short description, in this case “My friend Peter”. For complex images, you may need to also give a longer description. Assuming this has been written in the file “peter.html”, you can add one as follows using the longdesc attribute: <img src=”peter.jpg” width=”200" height=”150" alt=”My friend Peter” longdesc=”peter.html”> You can create images in a number of ways, for instance with a digital camera, by scanning an image in, or creating one with a painting or drawing program. Most browsers understand GIF and JPEG image formats, newer browsers also understand the PNG image format. To avoid long delays while the image is downloaded over the network, you should avoid using large image files. Generally speaking, JPEG is best for photographs and other smoothly varying images, while GIF and PNG are good for graphics art involving flat areas of color, lines and text. All three formats support options for progressive rendering where a crude version of the image is sent first and progressively refined. Adding links to other pages What makes the Web so effective is the ability to define links from one page to another, and to follow links at the click of a button. A single click can take you right across the world! Links are defined with the <a> tag. Lets define a link to the page defined in the file “peter.html” in the same folder/directory as the HTML file you are editing: This a link to <a href=”peter.html”>Peter’s page</a>. The text between the <a> and the </a> is used as the caption for the link. It is common for the caption to be in blue underlined text.
69

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

If the file you are linking to is in a parent folder/directory, you need to put “../” in front of it, for instance: <a href=”../mary.html”>Mary’s page</a> If the file you are linking to is in a subdirectory, you need to put the name of the subdirectory followed by a “/” in front of it, for instance: <a href=”friends/sue.html”>Sue’s page</a> The use of relative paths allows you to link to a file by walking up and down the tree of directories as needed, for instance: <a href=”../college/friends/john.html”>John’s page</a> Which first looks in the parent directory for another directory called “college”, and then at a subdirectory of that named “friends” for a file called “john.html”. To link to a page on another Web site you need to give the full Web address (commonly called a URL), for instance to link to www.w3.org you need to write: This is a link to <a href=”http://www.w3.org/”>W3C</a>. You can turn an image into a hypertext link, for example, the following allows you to click on the company logo to get to the home page: <a href=”/”><img src=”logo.gif” alt=”home page”></a> This uses “/” to refer to the root of the directory tree, i.e. the home page. Three kinds of lists HTML supports three kinds of lists. The first kind is a bulletted list, often called an unordered list. It uses the <ul> and <li> tags, for instance: <ul> <li>the first list item</li> <li>the second list item</li> <li>the third list item</li> </ul>
70 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Note that you always need to end the list with the </ul> end tag, but that the </li> is optional and can be left off. The second kind of list is a numbered list, often called an ordered list. It uses the <ol> and <li> tags. For instance: <ol> <li>the first list item</li> <li>the second list item</li> <li>the third list item</li> </ol> Like bulletted lists, you always need to end the list with the </ol> end tag, but the </li> end tag is optional and can be left off. The third and final kind of list is the definition list. This allows you to list terms and their definitions. This kind of list starts with a <dl> tag and ends with </dl> Each term starts with a <dt> tag and each definition starts with a <dd>. For instance: <dl> <dt>the first term</dt> <dd>its definition</dd> <dt>the second term</dt> <dd>its definition</dd> <dt>the third term</dt> <dd>its definition</dd> </dl> The end tags </dt> and </dd> are optional and can be left off. Note that lists can be nested, one within another. For instance: <ol> <li>the first list item</li> <li> the second list item <ul> <li>first nested item</li> <li>second nested item</li> </ul>
71

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

</li> <li>the third list item</li> </ol> You can also make use of paragraphs and headings etc. for longer list items. HTML has a head and a body If you use your web browser’s view source feature (see the View or File menus) you can see the structure of HTML pages. The document generally starts with a declaration of which version of HTML has been used, and is then followed by an <html> tag followed by <head> and at the very end by </html>. The <html> ... </html> acts like a container for the document. The <head> ... </head> contains the title, and information on style sheets and scripts, while the <body> ... </body> contains the markup with the visible content. Here is a template you can copy and paste into your text editor for creating your own pages: <!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC “-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN” “http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd”> <html> <head> <title> replace with your document’s title </title> </head> <body> replace with your document’s content </body> </html> Tidying up your markup A convenient way to automatically fix markup errors is to use HTML Tidy which also tidies the markup making it easier to read and easier to edit. I recommend you regularly run Tidy over any markup you are editing. Tidy is very effective at cleaning up markup created by authoring tools with sloppy habits. Tidy is available for a wide range of operating systems from the TidyLib Sourceforge site, and has also been integrated into a variety of HTML editing tools.
72 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1.9 OLAP: ON-LINE ANALYTICAL PROCESSING 1.9.1 Introduction: The term OLAP (On-Line Analytical Processing) was coined by E.F. Codd in 1993 to refer a type of application that allows a user to interactively analyze data. An OLAP system is often contrasted to an OLTP (On-Line Transaction Processing) system that focuses on processing transactions such as orders, invoices or general ledger transactions. OLAP is now acknowledged as a key technology for successful management in the 90’s. It describes a class of applications that require multidimensional analysis of business data. OLAP systems enable managers and analysts to rapidly and easily examine key performance data and perform powerful comparison and trend analyses, even on very large data volumes. They can be used in a wide variety of business areas, including sales and marketing analysis, financial reporting, quality tracking, profitability analysis, manpower and pricing applications and many others. OLAP technology is being used in an increasingly wide range of applications. The most common are sales and marketing analysis; financial reporting and consolidation; and budgeting and planning. OLAP is being used for applications such as product profitability and pricing analysis, activity based costing, manpower planning; quality analysis, in fact for any management system that requires a flexible top down view of an organization. 1.9.2 What is OLAP? On-Line Analytical Processing (OLAP) is a category of software technology that enables analysts, managers and executives to gain insight into data through fast, consistent, interactive access to a wide variety of possible views of information that has been transformed from raw data to reflect the real dimensionality of the enterprise as understood by the user. OLAP functionality is characterized by dynamic multi-dimensional analysis of consolidated enterprise data supporting end user analytical and navigational activities including:   calculations and modeling applied across dimensions, through hierarchies and/ or across members trend analysis over sequential time periods
73

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

   

slicing subsets for on-screen viewing drill-down to deeper levels of consolidation reach-through to underlying detail data rotation to new dimensional comparisons in the viewing area

OLAP is implemented in a multi-user client/server mode and offers consistently rapid response to queries, regardless of database size and complexity. OLAP helps the user synthesize enterprise information through comparative, personalized viewing, as well as through analysis of historical and projected data in various “what-if” data model scenarios. This is achieved through use of an OLAP Server. OLAP allows business users to slice and dice data at will. Normally data in an organization is distributed in multiple data sources and are incompatible with each other. A retail example: Point-of-sales data and sales made via call-center or the Web are stored in different location and formats. It would a time consuming process for an executive to obtain OLAP reports such as - What are the most popular products purchased by customers between the ages 15 to 30? Part of the OLAP implementation process involves extracting data from the various data repositories and making them compatible. Making data compatible involves ensuring that the meaning of the data in one repository matches all other repositories. An example of incompatible data: Customer ages can be stored as birth date for purchases made over the web and stored as age categories (i.e. between 15 and 30) for in store sales. It is not always necessary to create a data warehouse for OLAP analysis. Data stored by operational systems, such as point-of-sales, are in types of databases called OLTPs. OLTP, Online Transaction Process, databases do not have any difference from a structural perspective from any other databases. The main difference, and only, difference is the way in which data is stored. Examples of OLTPs can include ERP, CRM, SCM, Point-of-Sale applications, Call Center. OLTPs are designed for optimal transaction speed. When a consumer makes a purchase online, they expect the transactions to occur instantaneously. With a database design, call data modeling, optimized for transactions the record ‘Consumer name, Address, Telephone, Order Number, Order Name, Price, Payment Method’ is created quickly on the database and the results can be recalled by managers equally quickly if needed.
74 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

NOTES

Data Model for OLTP
75 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Data are not typically stored for an extended period on OLTPs for storage cost and transaction speed reasons. OLAPs have a different mandate from OLTPs. OLAPs are designed to give an overview analysis of what happened. Hence the data storage (i.e. data modeling) has to be set up differently. The most common method is called the star design.

Star Data Model for OLAP The central table in an OLAP start data model is called the fact table. The surrounding tables are called the dimensions. Using the above data model, it is possible to build reports that answer questions such as:    The supervisor that gave the most discounts. The quantity shipped on a particular date, month, year or quarter. In which zip code did product A sell the most.

To obtain answers, such as the ones above, from a data model OLAP cubes are created. OLAP cubes are not strictly cuboids - it is the name given to the process of linking
76 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

data from the different dimensions. The cubes can be developed along business units such as sales or marketing. Or a giant cube can be formed with all the dimensions.

NOTES

OLAP Cube with Time, Customer and Product Dimensions OLAP can be a valuable and rewarding business tool. Aside from producing reports, OLAP analysis can aid an organization evaluate balanced scorecard targets.

Steps in the OLAP Creation Process 1.9.3 OLAP Server An OLAP server is a high-capacity, multi-user data manipulation engine specifically designed to support and operate on multi-dimensional data structures. A multi-dimensional structure is arranged so that every data item is located and accessed based on the intersection of the dimension members which define that item. The design of the server and the structure of the data are optimized for rapid ad-hoc information retrieval in any orientation, as well as for fast, flexible calculation and transformation of raw data based on formulaic relationships. The OLAP Server may either physically stage the processed multi-dimensional information to deliver consistent and rapid response times to end users, or it may populate its data structures in real-time from relational or other databases, or offer a choice of both. Given the current state of technology and the end user requirement for consistent and rapid response times, staging the multi-dimensional data in the OLAP Server is often the preferred method.

77

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

1.9.4 Uses Of Olap OLAP applications span a variety of organizational functions. Finance departments use OLAP for applications such as budgeting, activity – based costing (allocations), financial performance analysis, and financial modelling. Sales analysis and forecasting are two of the OLAP applications found in sales departments. Among other applications, marketing departments use OLAP for market research analysis, sales forecasting, promotions analysis, customer analysis, and market / customer segmentation. Typical manufacturing OLAP applications include production planning and defect analysis. For all the above applications is the ability to provide managers with the information they need to make effective decisions about an organization’s strategic directions. The key indicator of a successful OLAP application is its ability to provide information, as needed, i.e., its ability to provide “just – in - time” information for effective decision- making. This requires more than a base level of detailed date. Analyzing and modelling complex relationships are practical only if response times are consistently short. In addition, because the nature of data relationships may not be known in advance, the data model must be flexible. A truly flexible data model ensures that OLAP systems can respond to changing business requirements as needed for effective decision making. 1.9.5 OLAP Benefits: OLAP applications increase the productivity of business managers, developers, and whole organizations. The inherent flexibility of OLAP systems means business users of OLAP applications can become more self sufficient. Managers are no longer dependent on IT to make schema changes, to create joins or worse. Perhaps more importantly, OLAP enables managers to model problems that would be impossible using less flexible systems with lengthy and inconsistent response times. More control and timely access to strategic information equal more effective decision-making. IT developers also benefit from using the right OLAP software. Although it is possible to build an OLAP system using software designed for transaction processing or data collection, it is certainly not a very efficient use of developer time. By using software specifically designed for OLAP, developers can deliver applications to business users faster,
78 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

providing better service. Faster delivery of applications also reduces the applications backlog OLAP reduces the applications backlog still further by making business users selfsufficient enough to build their own models. However, unlike standalone departmental applications running on PC networks, OLAP applications are dependent on data warehouses and transaction processing systems to refresh their source level data. As a result, IT gains more self-sufficient users without relinquishing control over the integrity of the data. IT also realizes more efficient operations through OLAP. By using software designed for OLAP, IT reduces the query drag and network traffic on transaction systems or the data warehouse. 1.10 CRYPTOGRAPHY 1.10.1 Introduction to Cryptography The origin of the word cryptology lies in ancient Greek. The word cryptology is made up of two components: “kryptos”, which means hidden and “logos” which means word. Cryptology is as old as writing itself, and has been used for thousands of years to safeguard military and diplomatic communications. For example, the famous Roman emperor Julius Caesar used a cipher to protect the messages to his troops. Within the field of cryptology one can see two separate divisions: cryptography and cryptanalysis. The cryptographer seeks methods to ensure the safety and security of conversations while the cryptanalyst tries to undo the former’s work by breaking his systems. 1.10.2 Cryptographic services The main goals of modern cryptography can be seen as: user authentication, data authentication (data integrity and data origin authentication), non-repudiation of origin, and data confidentiality. User Authentication If you log to a computer system there must (or at least should) be some way that you can convince it of your identity. Once it knows your identity, it can verify whether you are entitled to enter the system. The same principal applies when one person tries to
79

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

communicate with another: as a first step you want to verify that you are communicating with the right person. Therefore there must be some way in which you can prove your identity. This process is called user authentication. There are several ways to obtain user authentication. You can give him something only you can know: a password, a (predesigned) user-id, a pincode, and so on. Or you could have some specific items with which you can identify yourself: a magnetic strip card, a smart card (a hand-held computer the size of a credit-card), a token. One might make use of biometric properties; it is a well-known fact that fingerprints, the shape of the hand and retinal pattern of a person are good decision criteria. These however require specialized equipment and thus a big investment. However, these biometric systems are not perfect: some legitimate users will inevitably fail the identification and some intruders will be accepted as genuine. Other techniques include measurements of how a person types his name or writes his signature, or can take into account the location of the user. For the time being the first two methods are the ones generally applied, and many practical systems use a combination of both. Since the user’s memory is limited, this information should not vary too much over time. Whether it is a password, a pincode or a user-id, all these items are being defined at a certain time and often don’t change from there on. One might argue that you could change your password, but this is not done each time you access the computer. This indicates that someone who can eavesdrop this information will later be able to impersonate the user. A similar observation holds true for a magnetic strip card or memory chip. All these systems provide static authentication only. If the user possesses a device which can perform simple computations, the security can be increased significantly by introducing the well-known challenge-response idea. If a person tries to identify himself to the system, the system generates a random challenge and sends it to the person or to his device. In case of a token (a mini-calculator), the user will have to enter the challenge on the keyboard. The device will then compute the corresponding response, using secret information which has been assigned to him. This response is then sent back to the system, which verifies it. If more sophisticated protocols are used, the verifier does not need secret information (this requires public-key protocols), or will even not learn the secret of the users (this requires zero-knowledge protocols). Note that in this case the procedure does not authenticate the user but rather his device. In order to increase the security, the user should authenticate himself with respect to the device, using something
80 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

he alone knows. This makes the device useless if it is stolen. In general, one also requires that the computer authenticates itself to the person logging on. If both parties are authenticated to each other, we use the term mutual authentication . Data authentication Data authentication consists of two components: the fact that data has not been modified (data integrity) and the fact that you know who the sender is (data origin authentication). Data integrity A data integrity service guarantees that the content of the message, that was sent, has not been tampered with. Data integrity by itself is not meaningful: it does not help you to know that the data you have received has not been modified, unless you know it has been sent directly to you by the right person. Therefore it should always be combined with data origin authentication. You should always be alert for possible intruders in your network or in your communication system. A well-known example is the Internet that connects universities and companies world-wide. Electronic mail over the Internet does not offer any security. As a consequence, an educated computer user can tap into the messages that are being transmitted over the line. It is very easy to read and modify someone’s electronic mail, which is commonly seen as being private. We have A(lice) who sends a message to B(ob). There is also an enemy who taps the line between them. If you don’t support data integrity, this enemy can just change the message and then relay it to B. B will not see that the message has been tampered with and will assume A really intended it the way he got it. One could argue that active wire-tapping is difficult. In general wire-tapping is only a matter of cost: tapping a telephone line is obviously easier than tapping a coaxial cable or a micro-wave. Active wire-taps (modifying and then relaying the messages) are also more difficult than passive wire-taps (listening in on the messages).

NOTES

81

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Data origin authentication Here one wants to make sure that the person who is claiming to be the sender of the message really is the one from whom it originates. If A sends a message to B, but the enemy intercepts it and sends it to B, claiming A has sent it, how can B be sure of the real origin of this data? A variation on this theme is: the enemy could send a message to B claiming it A is the originator. Thanks to cryptography, there are techniques to ensure against this type of fraud. Non-repudiation of origin Non-repudiation protects against denial by one of the entities involved in a communication of having participated in all or part of the communication. Non-repudiation with proof of origin protects against any attempts by the sender to repudiate having sent a message, while non-repudiation with proof of delivery protects against any attempt by the recipient to deny, falsely, having received a message. An example will illustrate the importance of non-repudiation of origin. Suppose B is the owner of a mail-order company and he decides to let his customers order through electronic mail. For him it is really important that he can show to an arbitrary third party that A really ordered the things he is claiming otherwise it would be easy for a customer to deny the purchase of the goods. In a paper and pencil world, non-repudiation is provided by a manual signature. Data confidentiality This aspect of data security certainly is the oldest and best known. The example of Caesars cipher given in the introduction clearly demonstrates this. The fact that confidentiality was considered to be much more important than authentication of both sender and data, together with non-repudiation of origin can be explained as follows: the latter services have been provided implicitly by the physical properties of the channel: a letter was written in a recognizable handwriting, with a seal and a signature. With data confidentiality we try to protect ourselves against unauthorized disclosure of the message. If A sends a message to B, but the enemy intercepts it, one wants to make sure that this enemy never understands his contents. Confidentiality protection is very
82 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

important in the medical world and also in the banking sector. World-wide there are several million transactions each day and all of these have to be passed from one financial institution to another. If there were no way to protect confidentiality, everybody would be able to see who had purchased what, who has made what kind of withdrawal, and so on. Clearly this would violate individuals and companies rights to privacy. In order to provide confidentiality, it is necessary to transform the message with a cipher. 1.10.3 Cryptographic primitives The above cryptographic services can be realized by several cryptographic primitives: we distinguish between primitives for encryption, primitives for authentication, and cryptographic protocols. Encryption primitives can be used to provide confidentiality, authentication primitives can be used to provide data authentication. We will also discuss protocols for user authentication and for key management. Encryption primitives In cryptography one often makes use of encryption. With encryption we transform the clear-text (or plaintext) into cipher-text. To get back to the original text, we apply the inverse transformation, called decryption. These transformations themselves are public: this makes it possible to analyze these algorithms and to develop efficient implementations. However they use a secret parameter: the keys which are known only by the sender and/ or the receiver. This key is the only thing one needs to know in order to encipher or decipher. Thus it is really important to manage one’s keys and keep them secret where necessary. . We discuss two types of encryption primitives, symmetric or conventional ciphers and asymmetric or public-key ciphers. Symmetric ciphers Basically there are two kinds of encryption-schemes. The oldest ones and most used until now are the symmetric ciphers. In these schemes, the key used to decipher the cipher-text is equal to the one used to encipher the plaintext.
83

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

The best known cipher in this category is the Data Encryption Standard (DES) that was adopted in 1977 by the American NBS (National Bureau of Standards) as FIPS 46. Since then it has been used all over the world and until now no major flaws have been discovered. Asymmetric ciphers The asymmetric or public-key ciphers are the most recent cryptographic tools. In contrary to the symmetric systems the key used to encipher and the one used to decipher are different. Each partner thus has two keys. He keeps one key secret and makes the other one public. If A wants to send a message to B, he just enciphers it with B’s public key. Since B is the only one who has access to the secret key, B is the only one who can decipher the message and read the contents. The most popular public-key cipher is the RSA system (RSA stands for Rivest, Shamir and Adleman, the names of the three inventors). The security of this scheme is related to the mathematical problem of factorization: it is easy to generate two large primes and to multiply them, but given a large number that is the product of two primes, it requires a huge amount of computation to find the two prime factors. Symmetric versus asymmetric ciphers The biggest drawback of the asymmetric systems up until now has been the relative low performance compared to the symmetric ones. Public-key systems provide significant benefits in terms of key management: if every user generates his own key, only an authentic channel is required, eliminating (expensive) secret channels like couriers. In systems without a central trusted server, the number of keys can be reduced. Indeed, suppose we have a network of n users each of whom wanting to communicate with the others. Since each communication requires a secret key, the total number of keys required equals n*(n-1)/2.

84

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1.10.4 Authentication primitives One-way functions and hash codes A one-way function is defined as a function f such that for every x in the domain of f, f(x) is easy to compute; but for virtually all y in the range of f, it is computationally infeasible to find an x such that y=f(x). In addition one requires that it is hard to find a second pre-image: given an x and the corresponding value of f(x), it should be hard to find an x’ different from x which has the same image under f. One-way functions are used to protect passwords: one will store a one-way image of the password in the computer rather than the password itself. One applies then the oneway function to the input of the user and verifies whether the outcome agrees with the value stored in the table. A hash function is a function which maps an input of arbitrary length into a fixed number of output bits. In order to be useful for cryptographic applications, a hash function has to satisfy some additional requirements. One can distinguish two types of hash functions. A MAC (Message Authentication Code) that uses a secret key, and an MDC (Manipulation Detection Code) that works without a key. For a MAC one requires that it should be impossible to compute the MAC without knowledge of the secret key. For an MDC one requires that it is a one-way function, and - in most cases - that it is collision resistant, which means that it should be hard to find two arguments hashing to the same result. Hash functions can be used to protect the authenticity of large quantities of data with a short secret key (MAC), or to protect the authenticity of a short string (MDC). Sometimes an MDC is used in combination with encryption, which can yield protection of both confidentiality and authenticity. There are several schemes which have been proposed for use as hash functions. The widely used construction for a MAC is the CBC mode of the DES (with an additional output transformation), as specified in ISO-9797. Several MDC’s have been constructed based on the DES. Other dedicated designs are SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm or FIPS 180), and RIPE-MD 160. These hash functions achieve a very high throughput (Mbit/s), even in software implementations.

NOTES

85

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Digital signature Public-key techniques can also be used for other purposes than for enciphering information. If Alice adds some redundancy to her message and transforms the result using her secret key, anyone who knows Alice’s public key can verify that this message was sent by Alice (by verifying the redundancy). In this way one can create a digital signature, which is the equivalent of the hand-written signature on a document. Since it is not physically connected to the signed data or the originator, it will depend on this data and on the secret key of the originator. Several signature schemes have been proposed. The RSA public-key cryptosystem is the only one which can be used for both enciphering and digital signatures. Schemes which can only be used for digital signature purposes are the DSA and the Fiat-Shamir scheme. Note that it is possible to produce a digital signature based on conventional ciphers like the DES. However, these schemes are less efficient in terms of memory and computations. Other constructions use a conventional cipher in combination with tamper resistant hardware: this offers only a limited protection. Assume Bob has received from Alice a digitally signed message. If Alice subsequently denies having sent the message, Bob can go to a third party (e.g., a judge), who will be able to obtain Alice’s public key. Subsequently he can verify the validity of the signature. In this way a digital signature can provide non-repudiation of origin. It is easy to see that it provides in addition data authentication, i.e., data integrity and data origin authentication. Hash functions versus digital signatures Hash functions can only be used in a situation where the parties mutually trust each other: they cannot be used to resolve a dispute (unless one uses, in addition tamper resistant hardware). As in the case of encryption, hash functions tend to be three orders of magnitude faster than digital signatures. This explains why in general one will first compute the hashcode of the message with a fast hash function and subsequently apply the digital signature to this short hashcode. This provides digital signatures which are not only faster and shorter, but also more secure.

86

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1.10.5 Cryptographic protocols A cryptographic protocol is an interaction between one or more entities to achieve a certain goal. In fact, encryption and digital signatures can be seen as a special case of cryptographic protocols. While a huge number of protocols have been developed, we will restrict this section to two types of protocols: protocols for user authentication and protocols for key management. User authentication protocols The design of cryptographic protocols for user authentication is very complex. A large number of protocols have been presented in the available literature, many of which exhibit some weaknesses. The simplest protocol providing unilateral authentication consist of sending a password. More complex challenge-response protocols can be designed in which the user does not transmit his secret information. They are based on an encryption algorithm, a MAC or a digital signature and the use, in addition, of so called nonces (never used more than once): random numbers, sequence numbers or time stamps. More complex protocols are required to achieve mutual authentication. Key Management Protocols One of the main links in the cryptographic keychain is the key management protocol: every cryptographic service will make use of cryptographic keying material, whose confidentiality and/or integrity has to be protected. For the distribution of this keying material, one can use a new cryptographic primitive, and ultimately, a physical channel. In this way one builds a key hierarchy: secret keys for bulk encryption with a symmetric cipher system will be encrypted using an asymmetric cipher system and signed with a digital signature scheme. The public keys of the asymmetric cipher can be distributed via an authentic channel which can be provided for example by combining conventional mail with voice authentication. An alternative is to sign these public keys with a single master key: now one only has to distribute a single master key via an authentic channel.
87

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

These signed public keys are called certificates. The central authority certifies that a certain public key belongs to a particular user. The commonly used scheme nowadays in based on the ITU-T X.509 recommendation. Note that there also exist public-key protocols which result in the agreement of a secret key between two parties, by exchanging public keys or parameters. A well known example in this class is the Diffie-Hellman key agreement scheme. This protocol is different from a key transport protocol, in which one party generates the secret key and enciphers it with the public key of the other party. The key agreement protocols have the advantage that they result in an increased security level. In the context of public-key cryptography, revocation of public keys is very important: once the user’s secret key is compromised, anybody can read his messages or forge his signatures. Although public-key systems require no on-line central management system, the system has to provide a means to protect the user in the case by warning the other users that his public key is no longer valid. SUMMARY 1. Define EC and describe its types: Electronic commerce is an emerging model of new selling and merchandising tools in which buyers are able to participate in all phases of a purchase decision, while stepping through those processes electronically rather than in a physical store or by phone (with a physical catalogue). There are a number of different types of E-Commerce      2. B2B - Business to Business B2C - Business to Consumer C2B - Consumer to Business B2E - Business to Employee C2C - Consumer to Consumer

Architectural framework of e commerce: The electronic commerce application architecture consists of six layers of functionality, or services: 1) 2) Applications brokerage services, data or transaction management;
88 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

3) 4) 5) 6) 2

interface, and support layers” secure messaging, security and electronic document interchange; middle ware and structured document interchange; and network infrastructure and basic communications services

NOTES

Environmental factors and major responses: Market, economical, societal and technological factors are creating a highly competitive business environment in which consumers are the focal point. Organizations’ major responses are divided into five categories: strategic systems for competitive advantage, continuous improvement efforts, business process reengineering (BPR), business alliances and EC. Benefits of EC: The global nature of the technology, low cost, opportunity to reach hundreds of millions of people, interactive nature, variety of possibilities, and resourcefulness and rapid growth of the supporting infrastructures (especially the Web) result in many potential benefits to organizations, individuals, and society. The Limitations of EC: The limitations of EC can be grouped into technical and non-technical categories. Data mining and techniques used in Data mining: Data mining, the extraction of hidden predictive information from large databases, is a powerful new technology with great potential to help companies focus on the most important information in their data warehouses. The most commonly used techniques in data mining are: Artificial neural networks, Decision trees, Genetic algorithms, nearest neighbour method, and Rule induction: Trends that Effect Data Mining: Five external trends which promise to have a fundamental impact on data mining are Data Trends, Hardware Trends, Network Trends, Scientific Computing Trends and Business Trends. Data warehouses and types of data warehouses: A data warehouse is a collection of computer-based information that is critical to successful execution of enterprise initiatives. The term data warehouse is currently being used to describe a number of different facilities each with diverse characteristics-Physical data warehouse, Logical data warehouse, Data library, Decision support systems (DSSs)

3

4

5

6

7

89

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

8      9

Network Infrastructure Components Routers and switches Firewalls Load balancers Storage Area Network (SAN) DNS What is TCP/IP? TCP/IP is a set of protocols developed to allow cooperating computers to share resources across a network. It was developed by a community of researchers centred around the ARPAnet. Certainly the ARPAnet is the bestknown TCP/IP network. HTML: HTML stands for Hypertext Markup Language. HTML is a special kind of text document that is used by Web browsers to present text and graphics.HTML consists of standardized codes or ‘tags’ that are used to define the structure of information on a web page. OLAP: On-Line Analytical Processing (OLAP) is a category of software technology that enables analysts, managers and executives to gain insight into data through fast, consistent, interactive access to a wide variety of possible views of information that has been transformed from raw data to reflect the real dimensionality of the enterprise as understood by the user. Cryptography: The word cryptology is made up of two components: “kryptos”, which means hidden and “logos” which means word. Cryptology is as old as writing itself, and has been used for thousands of years to safeguard military and diplomatic communications.

10

11

12

Questions for review 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. What is eCommerce? What so you understand by EDI? Explain different types of EC? Explain Electronic Commerce Application Services List the advantages and disadvantages of EC:
90 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

List the organizational, consumer and societal benefits of EC Carefully examine the non-technological limitations of EC. Which of them are company-dependent and which are generic. List the major activities taken by organizations to deal with the business pressures. List the major activities of BPR What is data mining? List the techniques used in data mining Describe five external trends which promise to have a fundamental impact on data mining. What is data warehouse? List the advantages of data warehouse. Discuss the Network infrastructure components What is TCP/IP? Discuss the traditional TCP/IP services? What is HTML? What are HTML tags and where are they used? What is OLAP and discuss the data model of OLAP? What are the benefits of OLAP? What is Cryptography? Discuss the major goals of modern cryptography? Discuss about encryption primitives. What are cryptography protocols?

NOTES

91

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

92

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

NOTES

UNIT II
BUSINESS APPLICATIONS IN E-COMMERCE
2.1 RETAILING IN E-COMMERCE 2.1.1 Electronic Commerce and Retailing Retailing is expected to change with the rapid development of new online sales and distribution channels that literally can be used from anywhere, anytime-from work, school, a hotel, car, or airplane. These developments should impact retailing as much as the advent of strip malls, catalogue retailing, and TV-based home shopping. Almost every retailer is re-evaluating every aspect of its operation from customer service to advertising, merchandising to store design, and logistics to order fulfilment. Furthermore, reacting to the pressure of retailers, suppliers are assessing technology based solutions to drive down costs (labour, delivery, and production) and become more efficient producers of goods. Online channels such as online services and the Web are also impacting traditional retail business models. In the traditional model, the customer went to the store and located the product. In the online model, the retailer seeks out the customer. The success of catalog retailers demonstrates that a significant portion of consumers have embraced the reverse model: the retailer going to the consumer. However, retailers need to consider the following issues in developing a business model:   Product/Content Issues: What kind of products are suited for online retailing? Software Interface Issues: What kind of features will constitute an effective interface? What features make it easy to find and select items for on-line purchase?

93

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES



Process Issues: What are the specific steps in the shopping process from a consumer’s perspective? What kind of processes should companies de-velop to fulfill orders efficiently?

Before examining the implications of changing consumer behavior and online retailing in the existing retail business, let us step back for a moment and ask the question: Why should retailers consider the online environment as a way of doing business? The answer lies in understanding the market changes that affect retailing and that will continue to affect it in the future. 2.1.2 E-Retailing E-retailing essentially consists of the sale of goods and services. Sometimes we refer to this as the sale of tangible and intangible goods, as shown in Figure 2.1.2(a) We can divide tangible goods into two categories: physical goods and digital goods.    Examples of physical goods would be a book, a television set, a video recorder, a washing machine, etc. Examples of digital goods are software and music, which may be downloaded from the internet. The sale of intangible goods is sometimes called E-servicing. Examples of services that may be sold are information such as the most recent stock prices, the most recent foreign exchange rate, or education. Entertainment such as -games that would be played on the internet are also examples of e-services. So are the sales of services such as telecommunication services or banking services. The sale of tangible and intangible goods are all referred to as Customer oriented e-commerce or eretailing, if they are sold directly to the consumer who is the end user. Here we discuss the sale of tangible goods.

Selling of different type of goods
94 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

2.1.3 Difference between Traditional retailing and E-retailing Traditional retailing Traditional retailing essentially involves selling to a final customer through a physical outlet or through direct physical communication. This normally involves a fairly extensive chain starting from a manufacturer to a wholesaler and then to the retailer who through a physical outlet has direct contact with the final customer. Examples of physical outlets that retailers currently use are:     Malls generalized stores (e.g. department store) specialized stores franchise stores

NOTES

It is useful to reflect that even in traditional retailing we have moved away from just using a static physical outlet within which a customer can have direct contact with the retailer. Thus, more recent forms of traditional retailing include     direct mailing telemarketing door-to-door sales vending machines

Direct mailing to a customer normally involves sending a brochure or catalogue to a customer. The customer browses through this catalogue and then carries out mail ordering. In some respects, this notion of browsing through a catalogue is a forerunner of e-retailing. Direct mailing, telemarketing, door-to-door sales, or the use of vending machines includes other forms that have actually moved away from a physical fixed outlet and in a way are intermediate forms of the movement away from traditional physical retailing outlet to the virtual retailing we see on the internet. E-retailing The internet has allowed a new kind of specialization to emerge. Instead of specializing just in a special product line, they allow specialization in particular classes of
95 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

customers and sellers. Thus, we see lastminute.com, which allows last minute purchases of travel tickets, gift, and entertainment to be matched against last minute sellers of the same items. Here, we see specialization not in a product line but in a class of purchasers and a class of sellers. This kind of specialization would not have been possible before we had the internet. In addition to these specialized stores, we also get generalized e-stores where a store sells several product lines under a single management. Examples of these generalized stores include JC penny and Walmart. We also have the electronic counterpart of malls or e-malls. E-malls essentially provide a web-hosting service for your individual store much in the way that mall provide a hosting service in the sense of a physical location for your store. Examples of these e-malls are Yahoo! Store, GEO Shops, and CNET stores: 2.1.4 Benefits of E-Retailing To the customer Customers enjoy a number of benefits from e-retailing. The first of these is convenience. It is convenient for the customer as he does not have to move from shop to shop physically in order to examine goods. He is able to sit in front of a terminal and search the net and examine the information on goods. The second aspect of convenience he gets is in terms of time. Normally, the traditional shop has an opening time and a closing time and the customer can only visit the shop within these periods. On the net, the customer can choose at any time to visit a site to examine the goods that are available and actually carry out his purchasing at one’s own convenient time. The third type of convenience that the customer gets is that he has access to a search engine, which will actually locate the products that he describes’ and also the site where they may be available, or perhaps even locate the sites where they may be available at the best price The second type of benefit to customers is better information. The Internet and the World Wide web are essentially communication media that allow retailers to put on quite extensive information related to their products, which is available to the customers.
96 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The third type of benefit that the customer gets is competitive pricing. This is due to two factors.  The first is lowered costs to the retailer because he does not have to maintain a physical showroom, he does not have to hire several shop assistants, and these savings can be passed on to customers in the form of reduced prices. Secondly, competitive pricing pressure that arises from the fact that the customer is now able to look at prices at several sites. Therefore, the pressure is always there on the retailer to maintain a competitive price for his products.

NOTES



To the business There are a number of benefits of e-retailing to the business itself.  The first of these is global reach. The retailer now is no longer restricted to customers who are able to reach the store physically. They can be from anywhere around the globe. The retailer must, of course, deliver the goods of a purchase to the customer. The second benefit is better customer service. The use of email and the use of electronic interchange of messages between the customer and the retailer allow better communication between the customer and the retailer. These allow one to easily inquiries and deal with complaints. These also allow a much more rapid response time than was possible in the days of faxes and postal mail. The third benefit is the lowered capital cost to the retailer. The retailer does not have to maintain showrooms; he can probably have lower inventories. Thus, while Amazon.com lists over a few million titles, it keeps an inventory of a few thousand best selling titles only. Therefore, the retailer has lower warehousing costs. He does not have to have many shop assistants who are physically answering questions and. Showing the customer goods. The fourth benefit to the retailer is mass customization. Based on requests by the customers, the retailer is now able to carry out mass customization with reduced time to market for the customized products.
97 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI







DBA 1727

NOTES





The next advantage is targeted marketing. The retailer is now able to pick on a specific targeted group of customers and direct marketing towards these customers. The retailer is also able to provide more value-added services in the way of better information, add-on services to basic services, or add-on options to products that he is selling. The last advantage to the retailer consists of different new forms of specialized stores that he is now able to utilize.

2.1.5 Models of E-Retailing There are several models for e-retailing and these include        Specialized e-store Generalized e-store E-mall Direct selling by the manufacturer Supplementary distribution channel E-broker E-services

Specialized e-stores The first class of model what we mention in e-retailing was the specialized e-store and here you can distinguish between two different kinds of specialization: the more traditional specialization along product lines and specialization by function. When you have specialization by product line, essentially you have a store that decides to pick one particular product line, say books, flowers, CDs, clothes, and sells only this particular product line. It may also choose to position itself in a particular part of the product line, e.g. clothes; it could choose to position itself at the very expensive end of the market selling brand names _ Gucci and Armani. Alternatively it could do more mass marketing by selling non - brand names at a much lower price, or it could go into discount selling. So, you can have a specialization by product line, and then you could have specialization - positioning within that product line to cater for a particular part of the marker. In contrast to this, a new kind of specialization is emerging on the internet, as mentioned. earlier, namely specialization by function. A good example of this is lastminute.com In lastminute.com they sell gifts, travel tickets, and other items for last
98 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

minute shoppers who want to purchase these items at a very short notice. Generally, when one purchases an item at a very short notice (e.g. travel), he often pays a premium, which is an extra amount for the convenience of booking the travel at the last minute. Now, this means that the air ticket is likely to cost much more than if he had purchased it some time before traveling and made use of different discounts or promotions. The producers of the web site lastminute.com realized that there are groups of customers who make these purchases at the last minute and feel some degree of angst at having to pay the premium for doing this shopping at the last minute. On the other hand, you will find that you may have sellers, e.g. airline companies, that have empty seats at the last minute which they are unable to fill. So, what lastminute.com does is bring together travelers who want to book at the last minute and an airline which has got spare capacity at the last minute, and allow the former to buy from the latter at the last minute. In this situation, the purchaser may get his airline ticket at a reduced price. So, there is a win-win situation for both the purchaser and the seller. This is a unique kind of specialization. It is very difficult to do this unless one utilizes the internet to carry out this kind of specialization. Generalized e-stores The next category of e-retailing models that we intend to look at is generalized e-stores. Generalized e-stores sell a large number of product lines rather than con-fining themselves to just one or a very few product lines. E-malls The next e-retailing model we consider is the e-mall. In an e-mall, cyberspace is rented out to cyber e-stores that wish to sell their goods. This store could be a specialized or generalized e-store. So, several product lines can be present. in a single e-mall. However, unlike the generalized e-store which is under a single unified management, in an e-mall, each store is under its own management. E-mall management is responsible only for creating the cyber sites that can be rented and can support services and marketing of the mall. It, thus, provides a web hosting service. Several e-malls also provide software tools, which can be utilized by a prospective e-store to create and maintain it_ e-store. The advantage for an e-store is that it is grouped together with other stores in a wellknown e-mall site and, therefore, is likely to pick up visitors to the mall.
99

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Direct selling by the manufacturer A number of manufacturers with well-known brand name products have chosen to use the internet to carry out direct selling via the internet. One. of the best known here is Ford, which utilizes the internet to achieve direct selling but uses its dealer network to facilitate distribution and delivery. The other well -known examples are Cisco systems and Dell computers. Note that this approach permits mass customization to meet customer preferences. This direct selling by the manufacturer has an important disintermediation effect leading to reduced costs to the end customer and increased profitability to the manufacturer. A note of caution is important here. By and large, this approach can be used by manufacturers of well-known brands of products because the customer already knows the pro-duct. Secondly, the manufacturer must have a thorough understanding of customer preferences, otherwise he has to rely on the customer knowledge of a retailer. Brokers or intermediaries This class of e-retailers is essentially an extension of the notion of a broker from the physical to the cyber world. A broker is an intermediary who    may take an order from a customer and pass it on to a supplier may put a customer with specific requirements in touch with a supplier who can meet those requirements may provide a service to a customer, such as a comparison between goods, with respect to particular criteria such as price, quality, etc.

Thus, brokers provide comparison shopping, order taking and fulfilment, and services to a customer. That is the reason why they are sometimes referred to as electronic intermediaries. There are several different models for electronic brokers and these include:  Brokers that provide a registration service with directory, search facilities, e-payment facilities, and security-related facilities. Any business can register with such an e-broker (e.g. anewshop.com).
100 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

 

Brokers that meet a certain requirement such as a fixed price (e.g.Priceline.com). Brokers that provide comparison shopping between products (e.g. mySimon.com or bestbooksbuy.com).The last model i.e. E-services is discussed in the next lecture.

NOTES

2.1.6 Features of E-Retailing 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. The provision of an on-line catalogue, which allows one to browse through different categories of goods. Thus, it is dynamic and linked with order process. The provision of a search engine, which is a very important feature that does not exist in traditional retailing. The provision of a shopping cart, which allows convenient goods selection. An ability to provide an automatic price update. Personalization of store layouts, promotions, deals, and marketing. The ability to distribute digital goods directly. Thus, these goods can be downloaded instantly. An on-line customer salesperson, “who” can help customers to navigate through the site. An order status checking facility, which is a useful feature before submission. The use of Forums (collaborative purchasing circles) to create a customer community and thus increase “stickiness.”

2.1.7 Changing Retail Industry Dynamics Important factors that affects the retailing industry dynamics are:     Overbuilding and excess supply. Change in consumer demographics, which more premium placed on efficient use of time Changes in consumer behavior, with less focus on brand name and more on lowest prices. Technology improvements that provide greater convenience and more information than traditional retailing.

101

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Overbuilding and Excess Capacity With online retailing, constraints of time and space disappear. There is no bricks and mortar storefront to worry about, no critical locations. This new way of retailing can severely affect companies that have invested in expansion and adding capacity. It is important to understand the trouble traditional retailers will face if online retailing takes off. The 1980s was a period of overexpansion and turmoil for retailers. By the end of the decade, complaints about excessive retail space were being voiced. Profits were declining and control of operating expenses became a paramount management objective. Retailers reduced staff and minimized merchandising in order to enhance profits. Sales growth and market share development were given second priority behind profit enhancement. In the 1990s, companies are under pressure to grow and produce profit. An important measurement of profit gains is gross margin per square foot. For many retailers, these numbers is either growing slowly or declining, partially reflecting a less favorable product mix and more competition. Inadequate productivity, both per worker and per unit of space, is also reducing profit margins. Overbuilding also resulted in a growing shortage of lowcost, entry-level workers for the retail industry. The shortage of entry -level workers means that retailers are using under trained workers who are less able to empathize with shopper needs-leading to a perception that retailers in general and shopping centres in particular are unable or unwilling to provide quality service. Clearly, with crowded domestic markets and competition constantly grinding away at operating profit, new ways of retailing are being explored by forward-thinking companies such as Wal-Mart. Demographic Changes Shopping patterns are beginning to change with the increase of time -strapped, two-career couples and the aging ofAmerica. Value and time management are the consumer concerns driving interest in online retailing. Recent retail data shows a decline in the amount of time Americans are spending in shopping malls [EDR95]. The suggested reasons vary: time constraints, safety concerns, and growing frustration with the lack of courteous service and insufficient product information. Understanding the implications of time constraints on consumer shopping behavior is important as they portend the trends to come. For instance, Americans have openly embraced shopping channels like QVC and Home Shopping Network and retailers like CUC International.

102

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Today’s time-strapped shoppers have less time and want better values, fewer hassles, and more options. Today, a shopping trip requires a consumer to decide what he or she or the family needs, brave the traffic on the way to a store, hunt for parking, find and select items for purchase, take them to a checkout, wait in line, pay for the items, sometimes bag them, and carry them back home. It can be a hassle and a lot of work, so most working professionals have learned to dread shopping trips. As technology improves, it may not be long before driving to the store gives way to online shopping with home delivery as provided by Peapod. In contrast, there is a growing segment of the population for whom time constraints are less of a problem. The demographic outlook in the United States is for an increasing share of older shoppers (age 50 and above) who prefer shopping at stores rather than online. However, the product mix offered by many department stores and malls is increasingly out of touch with the aging population and does not reflect the shift in purchasing power. Also, with the aging of the population, there is evidence to indicate a shift in consumer interest away from material goods and toward experiences, such as travel and recreation. In addition, as people get older, they tend to become more frugal. Retailers will need to concentrate on value by offering new product mixes. By this we mean a product mix that includes not only merchandise but also bundles in entertainment and “recreational” shopping with movie theatres, restaurants, bookstores, libraries, and community meeting facilities. This sort of change is already occurring in bookstore design (such as Borders Bookstores and Barnes and Noble), which include a variety of facilities such as coffee shops. However, building shopping malls based on these new business models is a risky venture and requires huge investments. Consumer Behavior Consumer behavior is more volatile than ever before, and companies need new ways of responding to consumer needs and satisfying demand. According to one survey, the typical consumer spent only four hours a month in a shopping mall in 1990 versus ten hours in 1985, and sales per square foot dropped. Specialty retailing-power centres, discount malls, discount stores, and catalogue shopping-has become one solution for closely monitoring consumer trends and reacting to them quickly. All of these alter-natives have one thing in common: they provide consumers with a very large selection of producers priced with deep discounts.
103

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Consumers are no longer as influenced by brand names as they used to be. The emergence of the value shopper is changing retailing. Today, the shopper is less willing to pay the premium for the brand name and much more attentive to quality and value. The decline in gross margins is the first evidence of the impact of that change, reflecting lower initial mark-ups and more discriminating shoppers in that segment clearly, retailers that are focused on providing value-the best price, service, and selection-regardless of the brand name will be successful. The real differentiating characteristic for retailers will be in their ability to define what the broad or niche consumer segment is looking for, identifying characteristics of customers in each target segment, and learning how to bundle products and package brands so that they become the preferred choice for online customers Technology Improvements in Electronic Retailing Today, electronic retailing is still far from being a competitive threat to more traditional store retailing (see Table), but it is becoming increasingly attractive as technology and applications improve, and retailers gain experience.

104

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Three dominant forms of electronic retailing channels are: television re-tailing, CDROM retailing, and online service based retailing, in which we include Web-based retailing. Now we can discuss about the most prominent one: the television retailing. Television Retailing: Television retailing grossed an estimated Rs. 3.2 billion in 1994. One of the pioneers in this area is Home Shopping Network, Inc. (HSN), which began broadcasting electronic retailing to a small, local audience in 1982. Three years later they took this still unproven idea national- and made it work. Today, HSN is a television-based retail, entertainment company, and online retailer (owns Internet Shopping Network), with coast-to-coast customers and annual sales of $1 + billion. The breadth and reach of TV retailing are amazing. In. 1994, HSN reached 65.8 million television households throughout the United States. These households received the signals via cable, broadcast, and satellite dish, twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week. Unlike online audiences, which tend to be predominantly affluent and well educated (net annual in-come is estimated at Rs. 60,000 - Rs. 80,000), the target audience for television re-tailing is moderate income households and mostly women. How does it work? The TV retail marketing and programming are divided into segments that are televised live, with a show host who presents the merchandise and conveys information relating to the product, including price, quality, features, and benefits. Show hosts engage callers in on-air discussions regarding the currently featured product or the caller’s previous experience with the company’s products. Viewers place orders for products by calling a toll-free telephone number. Generally, merchandise is delivered to customers within seven to ten business days of placing an order. The purchased item may be returned within thirty days for a full refund of the purchase price, including the original shipping and handling charges. The success of television shopping is the result of the effective utilization of electronic media for capturing the power and influence of celebrity and the magic of showmanship, and bringing them to bear on a sale. In its annual report, the Home Shopping Network states that a celebrity can de-but a line of jewelry on HSN and sell more than Rs. 2 million in a single weekend. Of course, there’s another advantage to television retailing. When customer interest, which is monitored by the number of calls being received, begins to
105

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

wane, the retailer knows it instantly and can simply move on to the next product. More recently, infomercials have become a crucial retailing topic. The infomercial has become a new and interesting way to retail specialty products. Modem filming techniques and ingenuity make it possible to create high-quality, cost-efficient, and entertaining documentaries that sell. This Coincides with the television viewing public’s appetite for information. Infomercials are an especially logical medium since retailers have the opportunity to economically test and evaluate a product through mass channels such as television retailing before committing major capital resources to infomercial production. Management Challenges in Online Retailing While changes in retailing may be driven by technology, managerial vision is required for successful implementation. Traditionally, retailing has been a low-tech environment in which retailing executives often relegated technology issues to back-room operators. These managers are most at risk, as they do not have a clue that a major revolution has begun. Most of them have never used a computer (or had to), never been on an online service, and do not know what the Internet is or what it can do. The winners will be the players who understand how to leverage the unique capabilities of the on-line medium to effectively meet the changing needs of the consumer. While the technology required to implement online retailing is maturing, many management issues remain unanswered. No one really knows yet how to build and run a successful, mass market online mall. The sales Medium is new, the technology is new, and retailers have a lot to learn about tricky technology, customer behavior, and management issue. But one thing is clear: For online retailing to succeed, online technology must complement management and operational strategy. Online Retailing Success Stories Peapod, CUC International, and Virtual Vineyards help to explain the intricacies of online retailing. Online Retailing: Peapod’s Experience Peapod, based in Evanston, Illinois, is using the online medium for food retailing services. Founded in 1989 by two brothers, Peapod (http://www.peapod.com/) is a
106 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

member of an online grocery / drug-store shopping and delivery service that already has thousands of customers in the Chicago, San Francisco, and Boston areas. Peapod was founded on the idea that people do not want to go to the grocery store. Peapod has an online database of over 25,000 grocery and drugstore items, and allows comparison shopping based on price, nutritional content, fat, or calories. Other features include electronic coupons, retailer preferred customer discounts, and other benefits like recipes, tips, and information. Peapod membership also allows users to use the shopping and home delivery service. Peapod has a staff of professional shoppers, produce specialists, and delivery people who fulfil the order. How Does It Work? Peapod provides customers with home shopping ser-vices via Pc. Customers need to buy a software application that enables them to access Peapod’s database through an online computer service. Peapod initially had a DOS-based system with graphics. They introduced a new version of the software in 1995-a Windows platform in which product pictures are available. Using the PC, a consumer can access all of the items in a grocery store and drug store. Peapod customers create their own grocery aisles in their own virtual store. Customers can request a list of items by category (cereals), by item (Frosted Flakes), by brand (Kellogg’s), or even by what is on sale in the store on a given day. Within categories, they can choose to have the items arranged alphabetically by brand or sorted by lowest cost per ounce, package size, unit price, or nutritional value. Customers also can cre-ate repeated use shopping lists (baby items, barbecue needs, and the like). Peapod’s back office is linked with the mainframe databases of the super-markets at which it shops for its customers (Jewel in Chicago and Safeway in San Francisco), allowing it to provide the supermarkets’ stock keeping units and shelf prices electronically to its customers. Once consumers have made a selection, they can then give specific shopping instructions, such as “substitute with same calories,” or red grapes only.” They can click on the “Comment” button and type in any extra information they would like the Peapod shopper to know. At any time during the order, a consumer can subtotal the amount purchased, or access the “Help” screen for immediate assistance. Online ordering is simple: users double-click on the Peapod icon and then enter their user IDs and passwords. On verification, users get access to a whole grocery store and drug store of items. Before the actual purchase of an item, users can view images of it and the nutritional content as well. The system allows users to sort items by various criteria like price, price/ unit, total calories, fat, protein,
107

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

carbohydrates, and cholesterol. With these features, Pea pod aims to target the health and fitness conscious consumer who chooses foods tailored to specific dietary needs. There are also search features to help locate a particular item. A “Find Item” option at the top of the screen lets users search either by brand name or product type. When users have finished shopping, they click on “Done” and the order is electronically routed to Peapod. During the transaction closing process, users need to choose a delivery time within a 90minute slot. Pinpoint delivery within a 3Dminute window) can be selected for a small additional charge. Payment can be made by check, charge, or Peapod Electronic Payment.

Eighty-five to ninety percent of Peapod’s orders come in via computer; the rest are faxed or phoned. Peapod orders are taken centrally, and then faxed to the stores. The store gets a printout with the order, the delivery ad-dress, and instructions for getting there. Each order is filled by a Peapod employee, who shops the aisles of the store. The employee pays for the groceries, often at special Peapod counters in the back of the store. The order is then taken to a holding area in the supermarket, where the appropriate items are kept cold or frozen until the deliverer picks up a set of orders and takes them to the customers within their 90-minute pre-selected windows. At each stage-ordering, shopping, holding, and delivery-the processes are tailored to provide personalized service at a relatively low cost. If a customer has a problem, he or she can call Membership Services, and a service representative will try to resolve the matter. Peapod treats each call as an opportunity to learn (and remember) each customer’s preferences and to figure out what the company can do to improve service as a whole. For example, service representatives found that some customers were receiving five bags of grapefruits when they really wanted only five grapefruits. In response, Peapod began asking customers to confirm orders in which orderentry errors may occur. Peapod members are charged actual shelf prices, plus a monthly service fee, a per-order charge of Rs. 5.00 plus 5 percent of the order amount. Customers are willing to pay these extra charges for convenience and because Peapod provides a lower cost shopping experience for the consumer. Consumers save money-despite the extra overhead-because they use more coupons, do better comparison shopping, and buy fewer impulse items than they would if they shopped at a real supermarket. Reducing impulse purchases is important when you consider that 80 percent of the items purchased in a grocery store are impulse items-non-planned purchases. In addition, consumers save time and have more control because they can shop from home or work whenever they want.
108 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

What is the Business Model? Rather than automating the trip to a retail store, as other online providers are doing, Peapod is using interactive technology to change the shopping experience altogether. Indeed, the formula for Peapod’s success is the busy American lifestyle. The homes it delivers to cut across many demographics. The one thing these demographics have in common is they have better things to do than grocery shop. Still, if it were not for wellmanaged logistics, these customers would be back in the stores in a second. The behindthe-scenes logistics are central to what Peapod is all about; Peapod has to make sure the orders get to the stores and that they are shopped correctly. How does Peapod Compete with Traditional Retailers? Traditional retailers make money from the suppliers. They provide access to customers and make their money by buying on deals, volume discounts, and getting coop advertising. Peapod makes all of its money on the customers it serves, it is a mass customizer. It creates the supply chain after identifying a specific demand from a specific customer, and it feeds off the existing infrastructure to do it. However, existing retailers do have some advantages. An important, though subtle, advantage enjoyed by food retailers is the shopper’s resistance to switching food stores because of familiarity with the shelf locations of products purchased. It is also inconvenient for consumers to relearn dozens of product locations at a new store. The online environment must offer significant advantages to overcome shopper inertia and induce trial, let alone continued, patronage. Is Peapod a competitor to the retail grocer? Not really. Peapod’s strategy has been to partner with the retailer rather than compete directly. A lot of credibility comes with the name of the retailer in its individual market. Peapod can help grocers expand into places that might not otherwise be practical from a capital investment standpoint. However, it is quite possible that in the future Peapod may be tempted to compete with grocers by emulating certain aspects of their warehousing. Why? As these new retail formats emerge , and once Peapod gains enough customers, Peapod will be tempted to say it is costing a lot to go to the store and pick up product off the shelf. To avoid the overhead , Peapod could have its own warehouse. As soon as the Peapod does that it is likely to fall into the same traps as the retailers, such as having an overflow warehouse when something is available on a deal or buying products before there is actual need.
109

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

2.2 INTERNET CONSUMERS AND MARKET RESEARCH 2.2.1 What is Internet Marketing? If traditional marketing is about creating exchanges that simultaneously satisfy the firm and customers, what is Internet marketing? Internet marketing is the process of building and maintaining customer relationships through online activities to facilitate the exchange of ideas, products, and serv-ices that satisfy the goals of both parties. This definition can be divided into five components: A Process Like a traditional-marketing program, an Internet-marketing program involves a process. The seven stages of the Internet marketing program process are setting corporate and business-unit strategy, framing the market opportunity, formulating the marketing strategy, designing the customer experience, designing the marketing program, crafting the customer interface, and evaluating the results of the marketing program. These seven stages must be coordinated and internally consistent. While the process can be described in a simple linear fashion, the marketing strategist often has to loop back and forth during the seven stages. Building and Maintaining Customer Relationship The goal of marketing is to build and create lasting customer relationships. Hence, the focal point shifts from finding customers to nurturing a sufficient number of committed, loyal customers. Successful marketing programs move target customers through three stages of relationship building: awareness, exploration, and commitment. It is important to stress that the goal of Internet marketing is not simply building relationships with online customers. Rather, the goal is to build offline (as relevant) as well as online relationships. The Internet marketing program may well be part of a broader campaign to satisfy customers who use both online and offline services.

110

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Online By definition, Internet marketing deals with levers that are available in the world of the Internet. However, as noted above, the success of an Internet marketing program ‘may rest with traditional, offline marketing vehicles. Consider, for example, the recruiting and job-seeking service Monster.com. Monster’s success can be tied directly to the effectiveness of its television advertising and, in particular, its widely successful of the past two years. Exchange At the core of both online and offline marketing programs is the concept of exchange. In both the online and offline worlds, exchange is still the heart of marketing. In the new economy, firms must be very sensitive to cross-channel exchanges. That is, an online marketing program must be evaluated according to its overall exchange impact-not just the online exchange impact. Hence, online marketing may produce exchanges in retail stores. Firms must be increasingly sensitive to these cross channel effects if they are to measure the independent effects of online and offline marketing programs. Satisfaction of Goals of both Parties One of the authors of this book is a loyal user of the website weather.com. Each day he arises and checks the weather in his city as well as the weather in cities he will be traveling to during the week. He is clearly satisfied with and loyal to the site. To the extent that weather.com can monetize this loyalty-most likely, in the form of advertising revenueboth parties will be satisfied. However, if the firm is unable to meet its financial obligations to employees, suppliers, or shareholders, then the exchange is unbalanced. Customers are still happy, but the firm is unable to sustain its revenue model. Both parties must be satisfied for exchange to continue. 2.2.2 Scope of Internet Marketing Marketing is the process of planning and executing the conception, pricing, promotion, and distribution of ideas, goods, and services to create exchanges that satisfy individual and organizational goals

NOTES

111

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

The definition summarized above has four critical features. These are: Marketing is a Process A process is a particular method of doing an activity, generally involving a series of steps or operations. The classical marketing approach involves four broad steps: market analysis, market planning, implementation, and control. 5 Market analysis involves searching for opportunities in the marketplace, upon which a particular firm-with unique skills-can capitalize. Market planning requires segmentation, target market choice, positioning, and the design of the marketing mix (also termed the 4Ps, or marketing program). Market implementation includes the systems and processes to go to market with the marketing pro-gram. Finally, marketing control refers to the informal and formal mechanisms that marketing mangers can use to keep the marketing program on course. Analysis, planning, implementation, and control collectively provide a process for marketing managers to follow in the design and execution of marketing programs. It Involves a Mix of Product, Pricing, Promotion, and Distribution Strong marketing programs do not involve one action, such as the design of a great product. Rather, the most successful marketing programs involve mixing the ingredients of marketing to deliver value to customers. This mixing entails blending the right amounts of the 4P ingredients, at the right time, and in the right sequence. Too often, marketing programs fail because they allocate too many (or too few) resources in an uncoordinated way. How often have you witnessed the hot Christmas toy advertised-but not found it on the shelf? In the Internet environment, this translates into significant problems with order fulfilment at the most pressing times of the year. It is about Exchange Marketing is not successful unless two parties exchange something of value. The buyer may exchange time, money, or services, while the seller must exchange something of value to the buyer. The traditional retail context provides the simplest illustration of this principle. A given consumer exchanges money for a particular good or service. However, exchange also occurs in a wide variety of contexts, many of which are non monetary. These include bartering, volunteering services, and political donations.
112 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

It is Intended to Satisfy Individual and Organizational Needs The aim of marketing is to provide a satisfactory outcome for both the firm and the customer. Firms can have highly satisfied customers if they provide services for free. However, those organizations are not likely to have a long life. The key to modern marketing is simultaneously satisfying the customer, the firm, and its shareholders. In the long run, the firm must have a positive cash flow or show a clear path to profitability for investors to maintain confidence. 2.2.3 E-Business Issues & Internet Marketing At its core, the mission of marketing is to attract and retain customers. To accomplish this goal, a traditional bricks-and mortar marketer uses a variety of market-ing variables-including pricing, advertising, and channel choice-to satisfy cur-rent and new customers. In this context, the standard marketing-mix toolkit includes such mass-marketing levers as television advertising, direct mail, and public relations, as well as customer-specific marketing techniques such as the use of sales reps. With the emergence of the Internet and its associated technology-enabled, screento-face interfaces (e.g., mobile phones, interactive television), a new era of marketing has emerged. Well-respected academics and practitioners have called for new rules and urged debate about fundamental tenets of marketing, including segmentation, mass marketing, and regionalized programs.) At the ‘other extreme, pundits and academics alike have argued that both the basic building blocks of marketing strategy and the pathways to competitive advantage have remained the same The approach taken in the current volume falls between these polar views. That is, new levers have been added to the marketing mix, segments have been narrowed to finer gradations, consumer expectations about convenience have forever been altered, and competitive responses happen in real time. In short, these are new, exciting changes that have a profound impact on the practice of marketing. At the same time, some of the fundamentals of business strategy-seeking competitive advantage based on superior value, building unique resources, and positioning in the minds of customershave remained the same. The intent of this text is to provide a clear indication of what has changed and what has not changed. At the same time, the text would not be complete (and indeed might be actionable from the standpoint of business practice!) if it did not propose a broader
113

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

framework to understanding the practice of Internet marketing. Frameworks such as the 4Ps of marketing or the five forces of competitive analysis are important because they provide easy-to-remember, simplifying structures for complex problems. They also serve as guides to managerial action. Thus, under-standing the five forces enables firms to comprehensively map their competitive environment while simultaneously identifying specific actions for their managers (e.g., reduce buyer power by increasing the number of buyers). 2.2.4 The Seven Stages of Internet Marketing

114

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The given figure provides an overview of the seven stages of Internet marketing. The seven stages are these: setting corporate and business-unit strategy, framing the market opportunity, formulating the marketing strategy, designing the customer experience, designing the marketing program, crafting the customer interface, and evaluating the results of the marketing program. The Seven Stage Cycle Of internet Marketing Stage One: Setting Corporate and Business-Unit Strategy Corporate strategy addresses the interrelationship between the various business units in a firm, including decisions about which units should be kept, sold, or augmented. Business-unit strategy focuses on how a particular unit in the company attacks a market to gain competitive advantage. Consider, for example, Amazon.com. Corporate-strategy issues relate to the choice, mix, and number of business units such as kitchen, music, electronics, books, and tools/hardware. Once these business units are established and incubated in Amazon’s corporate head~ quarters, the senior leadership team of each unit sets the strategic direction and steers the business unit toward its goals. Stage Two: Framing the Market Opportunity Stage two entails the analysis of market opportunities and an initial first pass of the business concept-that is, collecting sufficient online and offline data to establish the burden of proof of opportunity assessment. Let’s say, for example, that you are running a major dot-com business such as Amazon. The senior management team is continually confronted with go/no-go decisions about whether to add a new business unit or develop a new product line within an existing business unit. What mechanism do they put in place to evaluate these opportunities? In this second part of the Internet-marketing process, a simple six-step methodology helps evaluate the attractiveness of the opportunity The six steps include: seeding the opportunity, specifying unmet or underserved customer needs, identifying the target segment, declaring the company’s resource-based opportunity for advantage, assessing opportunity attractiveness, and making the final go/no-go decision. The final go/ no-go choice is often a corporate or business-unit decision. However, it is very important to stress that marketing plays a critical role in this market-opportunity assessment phase. In order for the firm to make an informed choice about the opportunity, the management team needs to obtain a sufficient picture of the marketplace and a clear
115

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

articulation of the customer experience that is at the core of the opportunity. Thus, during the market-opportunity assessment phase, the firm also needs to collect sufficient market research data. Stage Three: Formulating the Marketing Strategy Internet marketing strategy is based upon corporate, business unit, and overall marketing strategies of the firm. This set of linkages is shown in figure . The marketing strategy goals, resources, and sequencing of actions must be tightly aligned with the businessunit strategy. Finally, the overall marketing strategy comprises both offline and online marketing activities. Corporate, Business-unit, and Marketing Strategy Corporate

Stage Four: Designing the Customer Experience Firms must understand the type of customer experience that needs to be delivered to meet the market opportunity. The experience should correlate with the firm’s positioning and marketing strategy. Thus, the design of the customer experience constitutes a bridge between the high-level marketing strategy (step three) and the marketing program tactics (step five).

116

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Stage Five: Designing the Marketing Program The completion of stages one through four results in clear strategic direction for the firm. The firm has made a go/no-go decision on a particular option. Moreover, it has decided upon the target segment and the specific position that it wishes to own in the minds of the target customer. Stage five entails designing a particular combination of marketing actions (termed levers) to move target customers from aware-ness to commitment. The framework used to accomplish this task is the Market space Matrix. Simply put, the Internet marketer has six classes of levers (e.g., pricing, community) that can be used to create target customer awareness, exploration, and, it is hoped, commitment to the firm’s offering. However, prior to discussion of the Market space Matrix, the stages of the customer relationship and the associated classes of levers that can be employed must be defined. Building and Nurturing Customer Relationships A relationship can be defined as a bond or connection between the firm and its customers. This bond can originate from cognitive or emotional sources. The connection may manifest itself in a deep, intense commitment to the brand (e.g., the Harley-Davidson HOG club-member) or a simple, functional based commitment (e.g., regular use of weather.com). Whether defined as a function or an organization-wide culture, marketing is responsible for acquiring and retaining target customers. In this process, successful marketers manage to move desirable customers from awareness through exploration and, finally, commitment. Once customers reach commitment, the firm is in a position to observe their behavior patterns and determine which customers to nurture and which customers to terminate (or serve at a lower level of cost). Managing this building and pruning process is one of marketing’s key tasks. The four stages of customer relationships are briefly outlined below Awareness When customers have some basic information, knowledge, or attitudes about a firm or its offerings but have not initiated any communications with the firm, they are in the awareness stage. Consumers become aware of firms through a variety of sources, including word-of-mouth, traditional marketing such as television advertising, and online marketing programs such as banner ads. Awareness is the first step in a potentially deeper relationship
117

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

with the firm. However, as one can imagine, awareness without action is not in the best interests of the firm. Exploration In the exploration stage, the customer (and firm) begin to initiate communications and actions that enable an evaluation of whether or not to pursue the four key stages of customer relationship.

This stage is also likely to include some trial on the part of the customer. Exploration is analogous to sampling songs, going on a first date, or test- driving a car. In the online world, exploration may take the form of frequent site visits, some e-commerce retail exchanges, and possibly even the return of merchandise. It may include phone call followups on delivery times or e-mails about product inventory. The exploration stage may take only a few visits or perhaps years to unfold. Commitment Commitment involves feeling a sense of obligation or responsibility for a product or firm. When customers commit to a website, their repeated, enduring attitudes and behaviors reflect loyalty. Dissolution Not all customers are equally valuable to the firm. In an industrial- marketing context, managers often refer to the 80/20 rule of profitability. That is, 20 percent of customers provide 80 percent of the profit. By implication, therefore, a large number of customers are unprofitable or have high cost to serve. Firms should segment their most valuable and less valuable customers. The most valuable customers may be identified based on profit, revenue, and/or strategic significance (e.g., a large well-regarded customer may not be profitable but opens the door to new accounts). The firm does not want this set of customers to terminate the relationship. Unprofitable, non strategic customers are a different matter.
118 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Often it is in the best interests of the firm to terminate the relationship or encourage this set of customers to disengage with the firm. The four stages vary by the ‘intensity of the connection between the firm and the customer Intensity of connection may be defined as the degree or amount of connection that unfolds between the firm and its target customers. Three dimensions capture intensity: 1. 2. 3. The frequency of the connection. (How often does the customer visit the site?) The scope of the connection. (How many different points of contact does the customer have with the firm?) The depth of contact. (How thoroughly is the customer using the site?)

NOTES

A customer might visit a website such as Amazon on a regular basis, but only to purchase books. This visitor would have a high level of frequent contact but a low level of scope. Another customer might visit Amazon frequently but not stay on the site for a long duration or engage in deeper connections such as writing reviews, commenting on products, or communicating with other Amazon users. This customer would have high frequency but low depth. In all cases, relationship intensity is correlated with the stage of the relationship. Stage Six: Crafting the Customer Interface The Internet has shifted the locus of the exchange from the marketplace (i.e., face—to-face interaction) to the market space (i.e., screen-tb-face interaction). The key difference is that the nature of the exchange relationship is now mediated by a technology interface. This interface can be a desktop PC, sub-notebook, personal digital assistant, mobile phone, wireless applications protocol (WAP) device, or other Internet enabled appliance. As this shift from people-mediated to technology -mediated interfaces unfolds, it is important to consider the types of interface design considerations that confront the senior management team. What is the look-and— feel, or context, of the site? Should the site include commerce activities? How important are communities in the business model? Stage Seven: Evaluating the Marketing Program This last stage involves the evaluation of the overall Internet marketing program. This includes a balanced focus on both customer and financial metrics.

119

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

2.2.5 Customer Relationship Management(CRM) Cross-selling and Up-selling This application has the capability to qualify prospects, track contact or the “moments of truth and refer them to sales persons when appropriate. By implementing a cross-sell strategy, complete with the applications necessary to track customer contacts, triggers can be established to identify prospects for additional sales. For example, in a bank an event would be a large deposit, which would then trigger a sales person to call the customer and ask if she or he would be interested in investment options. Cross-sell and up-sell application may be used to schedule sales calls, keep detailed records of sales activities, and check on the status of the customer orders. Cross-selling and up-selling depend on identifying life-path needs. For instance, in the finance industry, banks are attempting to build lasting relationships with customers by matching their life-path needs to complementary products and services. As customers approach retirement, banks could recommend assets such as money markets, bonds and annuities. If customers with young children can be identified, then banks could cross-sell education savings plans or even loan consolidation plans. Direct Marketing and Fulfilment This includes pre-sale interaction such as advertising that either influences or provides potential customers with the necessary information to make a purchase decision. Marketing automation is critical, as organizations grow larger. This is because, it becomes more difficult to manage multiple simultaneous programs and track costs across multiple channels. Campaign management, a direct marketing process, allows companies to manage, integrate and leverage marketing programs by automating such tasks as managing responses, qualifying leads, and arranging logistical aspects of events. Another critical core competency is fulfilment. Marketing departments today are being deluged with requests for information via the Web and other channels. The goal of effective fulfilment is to provide a myriad of information to customers and prospects quickly, easily and efficiently. Whether it is product or service inquiries, direct mail responses, pricing or billing issues, or requests for literature, responding to requests in a timely manner is critical. This creates a need for fulfilment capabilities that can get product information, literature, collateral packages, or other correspondence into the hands of the customers and prospects when they are most receptive.
120 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Effective fulfilment is not trivial; it requires a sophisticated interface with campaign management, sales force automation, and posting systems. Customer Service and Support Customer support provides customer care and other services. The applications include support for service request management, account management, contact and activity management, customer surveys, return material authorizations, and detailed service agreements. These discrete applications work together to ensure that customer service representatives can quickly assign, create and manage service requests, as well as look up detailed information about customer service contracts, contacts and activities. Customer support capabilities are used to manage customers who are having problems with a product or service and to resolve those problems. Help-desk software automates the management and resolution of support calls and improves efficiency and effectiveness. These applications typically include capabilities to verify customer status (e.g., what level of support they are entitled to) track specific tasks needed to resolve problems across multiple workgroups, monitor service-level agreements, maintain permanent incident histories, and capture support costs for charge backs. Armed with this complete customer and product information, service professional can resolve customer issues efficiently and effectively. Field Service Operations There is nothing like the hands-on approach to in they with of the customers about the company your company. Field service is the hands on extension of external customer support, activated when a problem can be solved over the phone and requires sending a repair person to the customer site to perform maintenance or repair. Field service and dispatch applications have become mission critical tools that affect a company’s ability to deliver effective customer service and contain costs. The field service application provides the organization with features for scheduling and dispatching repair personnel, managing inventory and logistics, and handling contracts and accounting. Retention Management Effective Customer Relation must be based on differentiating customers based on account and transaction histories. Today, very few organizations are able to make these
121

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

distinctions. The ability to effectively segment customers depends on the decision support technology, which most executives see as a powerful enabler of Customer Relation Management. Effective decision support depends on the ability to gather customer information at great levels of detail. Detailed knowledge about customers allows companies to treat all customers individually and, in many cases, disengage from customers are high maintenance, low-margin prospects. 2.2.6 Benefit from an e-Commerce Sales Strategy The internet is changing the balance of power between business and the customer. Before online shopping, companies could be reasonably certain that buying almost anything was not easy, so once a customer found a supplier they were comfortable with they tended to stick with them, at least until something went wrong. But with the advent of e-commerce, customers can check out the options anywhere, and then buy from anyone. Customers can use comparison sites or shopping agents, or “bots” as they are known, to search the web for a bundle of products and report back on which supplier is offering them the cheapest. As a general rule, whatever sells in print in a catalogue will also sell on the internet. There are several major advantages to developing an e-commerce sales strategy: Efficiency: Electronic purchase orders and sales orders are more economical to place, track and manage. Convenience: Buying and selling can go on 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year from any location. Speed: It takes far less time to complete the entire buy/sell process, thus speeding payment. Accuracy: Virtually eliminates processing errors. Buying and selling firms have the same views of the transactions, which make online commerce more precise. Global Reach: Gives businesses an instant global reach to find supplies anywhere in the world, in any time or currency zone.
122 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Low Cost Entry: Before the web, selling direct to consumers could be expensive. Setting up a retail outlet or printing a glossy catalogue could cost hundreds of thousands of pounds. On the web, you can sell direct to consumers worldwide for a hundred pounds a month. Up-to-date Status and Alerts: Generates instant pager, fax and e-mail notification to identify potential problems, enabling problem avoidance or swifter solutions. Also provides order histories. 2.2.7 Critical success factors for internet marketing executives Marketers have always been in the business of anticipating and managing change, and technology has been their principle tool for managing it. The Internet presents an adaptive challenge for the marketing executive. Today’s Internet marketing exec-utive must have all the traditional skills of the offline marketing professional, but must place extra emphasis on some of them to account for the new economy. These critical new skills include customer advocacy and insight, integration, balanced thinking, and a willingness to accept risk and ambiguity. Customer Advocacy and Insight An insatiable curiosity for customers and marketplaces is a bare necessity for today’s marketing professional. This innate curiosity fuels an individual’s desire to transform mounds of customer data into meaningful and actionable insights, which in turn become a platform for advocacy. Because the Internet enables a much greater degree of interaction with customers, designing and promoting these interactions around customers’ needs and progressively gaining deeper insights are critical components of creating positive customer experience. A true customer advocate will be looking to provide demonstrable added value to each customer interaction to form the basis for a meaningful relationship. As both customer behaviors and enabling technologies simultaneously evolve, a deep understanding of customer needs should serve as the guidepost driving marketing decisions. Marketing professionals will need to strategically collect information from many disparate sources, create insightful customer mosaics, and effectively trans-late them into marketing strategies and tactics.

NOTES

123

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Integration The Internet represents both a new channel and a new communications medium. The new-economy marketing professional needs to have an integrated or’ holistic view of the customer and the enterprise in order to create a uniquely advantaged strategic plan. In today’s multi channel environment, a consistent message and experience must be maintained across customer touch points in order to create a consistent brand image. Beyond strategy, a marketing manager must fundamentally understand how to integrate these new tools into the overall marketing mix. Managers who are able to hone their marketing plan in a highly integrated fashion are more likely to capitalize on the synergies between marketing elements and thus drive greater effectiveness. Balanced Thinking An Internet marketing professional needs to be highly analytical and very creative. Culling specific customer insights from a veritable fire hose of data is critically important for new economy managers. It requires understanding the dynamic tension between one-toone marketing and mass marketing and being able to strike a strategic balance between them. It also requires determining the appropriate customer data requirements. Internet marketing professionals must also be technologically savvy. Understanding the strategic and tactical implications of the Internet, leveraging the rapid learning environment and accelerated decision-making process it creates, and then creatively applying the insights gleaned from analysis are critical success factors for all Internet marketing professionals. Passion and Entrepreneurial Spirit Although very hard to objectively assess, passion, or fire in the belly, is what will differentiate leaders from followers in the new economy. Trying to change the status quo is never easy and only people with conviction and passion will be heard over the din of the inevitable naysayer. Successful marketing managers use this passion to fuel their entrepreneurial instincts and vision, creating “bleeding edge” tools as they lead their teams to success. Willingness to Accept Risk and Ambiguity In the new economy, Internet marketing professionals need to retool them-selves and their companies to enter into a whole new era of customer-centric marketing. The

124

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Internet has enabled customers to have much more information and many more choices than ever before, thus shifting the balance of power toward the customer and creating the need for a whole new set of “pull” -based marketing tools. Successful Internet professionals need to rely on a whole new set of marketing tools that work in an extraordinarily dynamic environment. Having the courage to try new things is the key to developing break-through Internet marketing. The risk and ambiguity of managing in such uncharted territory is tremendous, and the most successful Internet marketers will be willing to play at the edges. Today’s online marketing professionals must have the basic skill set of the offline marketing professional. But they must also react more quickly and manage more information and channels in order to stay one step ahead of the competition. The skill set has not changed tremendously, but-the tools need to be applied with more vigor and sometimes with greater speed. Successful Internet marketers will build their business models and value propositions around a deep understanding of customer needs-not around the product. 2.3 E-COMMERCE FOR SERVICE SECTOR 2.3.1 E-Services The delivery of services via the internet to consumers or other businesses can be referred to by the generic term of e-services. There is a wide range of e-services currently offered through the internet and these include banking, loans, stock trading, jobs and career sites, travel, education, consultancy advice, insurance, real estate, broker services, on-line publishing, and on-line delivery of media content such as videos, computer games, etc. This list is by no means exhaustive and it is growing all the time. In this lecture, we will give an overview of eservices. In order to bring some order to the discuss of these wide variety of e-services, we organize them into the following categories, namely 1. Web-enabling services, which were previously provided by humans in office agencies and/or their branches. The primary purpose here is that these services help to save time and effort for the user; bring convenience, and improve the quality of life. In many cases, it can result in a reduced cost for the consumer.

NOTES

125

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

E-services that fall into this category include    Banking Stock trading Education

In some cases, this may bring a new dimension to the original service, enhancing and altering it. E-education is an example of this. It may also bring into the catchments new groups of consumers of the service to whom it might not have been previously accessible. 2. Matchmaking services. These take a need from an individual or business customer and provide mechanisms (from providers) for matching that need.

E-services that fall into this category include       Jobs and employment sites Travel Insurance Loans including mortgage loans Real estate sales Brokers

The advantage of this kind of matchmaking through the internet is that the ability to search electronically over a wider area to satisfy the customer need and to more precisely meet the customer need is greatly facilitated by both computerization and communication over the internet. 3. Information-selling on the web. This group essentially sells information content of one sort or another and includes ecommerce sites that provide on-line publishing such as web-based newspapers   consultancy advice specialized financial or other information

126

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.

Entertainment services. These provide internet-based access to videos, movies, electronic games, or theme sites. This E-entertainment sector is expected to grow rapidly in the next few years, with a convergence of TV and internet-based technologies. Specialized services such as auctions. Many different auction sites have appeared and these are discussed further in this lecture. It is not possible to discuss all the different eservices in this lecture and so we will briefly sample only a few examples for each category.

NOTES

5.

2.3.1.1. Web-Enabled Services Web-enabled services include personal banking, stock trading, and education. E-banking Security First Network Bank (SFNB; www.sfnb.com/)was the first internet bank. It provides most of the banking services on the web. Therefore, you can do your banking with your fingers instead of your feet. Looking at e-banking, we can distinguish between twp distinct models: 1. 2. Pure cyber banks Traditional banks that provide e-banking to complement their retail banking SFNB. is a pure cyber bank, while the homepage of Bank of America (www.bankofamerica.com) illustrates the second model.

While not all banks offer the full range of services on the internet, banks in both the mentioned groups offer a varied range of services including 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. personal banking commercial banking for both small businesses and large corporations financial services loan application services international trade including settlement instruments, foreign exchange transactions, etc.

127

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

There are significant advantages for both the individual or corporation as well as the bank in using e-banking. An individual doing personal banking on the internet can, amongst other things, pay bills, do account transfers, make queries on account balances, obtain statements, in some cases view images of checks, etc., and import transactions directly into home account management software. Furthermore, one can make such transactions 24 hours a day from any place with internet access around the world. In addition to these, a number of banks offer personal financial services including making personal loan applications on the internet. All these represent a large increase in convenience and time saving for the bank customer, saving him trips to the bank branch, queuing, etc. The advantages to the banking institutions themselves include 1. 2. 3. reduction in the number of retail banking branches, saving rentals or ownership of the related properties. reduction in staffing because of the reduction in paper processing as well as face-toface bank teller contact. bringing about increase in the time the bank hangs on to the money before making the required transfers, leading to increase in interest received by the banks. These advantages are so significant that some banks offer customers a number of incentives to -switch to internet banking, such as free checks, reduced fees, increased deposit rates, etc.

E-stock trading and e-investing Several companies such as E-Trade (www.etrade.com). Datek.on-line, American Express Financial Services, etc. allow you to trade stocks, bonds, mutual funds, etc. on the internet. These companies offer you to trade at a very small cost compared to discount brokers or full-service brokers. This has resulted in these on-line trading companies grabbing an increasing market share. In response to this, discount brokers including Charles Schwab and full-service brokers have also moved to introduce internet trading of stocks. The steps involved essentially are the following: 1. 2. place a request to trade, say buy a stock the system responds with current “on the web site” prices
128 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

3.

the internet trader has to confirm this trade or cancel it Several companies allow one to create a simulated portfolio, which one watches over time without actually buying or selling the stocks in reality. An example of this can be found on the Smart Money site (www.smartmoney.com).

NOTES

The major advantages to the person doing the trading are 1. 2. 3. the reduced cost; the convenience of being able to trade anywhere in the world with internet access, e.g. while travelling; and access to a wide variety of information on a number of sites.

In addition to actually allowing you to trade, these sites provide a considerable amount of information. The reduction in margins available to stockbrokers as a result of internet trading is beginning to have an effect on other more traditional forms of brokers. This has led to some traditional brokers also providing internet trading of stocks. E-education A number of e-universities are being spawned around the world. Again, three models can be seen: 1. 2. Pure cyber universities, such as Jones International University (http://www. jonesinternationa.edu) Traditional universities setting up new cyber vehicles for providing university education perhaps with other business partners. An example of this the Hong Kong CyberU .(www.hkcyberu.com.hk;) which was set by the Hong Kong Polytechnic University and Pacific Century CyberWorks. Traditional universities offering courses themselves on the internet. There are a number of web-based technology tools for this purpose. An example is Web CT. A number of so called “open universities” that previously provided distance learning have moved into providing an internet-based version of their courses. These traditional universities have a number of advantages. They can now reach a client base that is outside their catchment. They also expect to be able to deliver these courses at a reduced cost; however, the jury is still out on this. Another advantage a traditional university has on the internet over a new pure cyber university is that it has an established brand
129 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

3.

DBA 1727

NOTES

name. There are a variety of issues that need to be explored carefully when preparing to deliver educational material on the internet and these include the following: 1. 2. Does one use a distance learning model where the student uses a PULL model to acquire the material? Does one use a traditional lecture model using video streaming? This is a PUSH model whereby a teacher “pushes” the materials to the students.

The use of the ‘internet for education opens up many possibilities, namely use of quizzes, tests to provide the student with instant feedback on his/her mastery of the materials, use of graphics and animation to explain concepts, particularly those that have a dynamic character to them. It is anticipated that the internet will not only lead to cyber universities of one kind or another but will also have a marked effect on teaching and learning in traditional universities. One among some of the innovations that are being explored is the joint teaching by two universities on different continents in order to enhance the learning experience. 2.3.1.2 Matchmaking Services This has perhaps been the area in which there has been the greatest growth in eservices. Essentially, in most of these applications, the customer who could be an individual or business specifies his requirements in relation to the service. The e-commerce site then does a search over its own databases or over the internet using mobile agents, or over other databases or web sites to look for one or more matches to these requirements. The information is then returned to the e-service provider site to give the customer the required service. Travel Services Before the internet, one might have gone along to a travel agent in order to book one’s travel requirements such as air tickets, train tickets, car hire, hotel, tours, etc. The travel agent would try his best to meet these requirements by providing information regarding schedules, pricing, promotions, as well as suggestions on changes to de itinerary. These bookings could be for individuals or corporations involving corporate rates, etc. A large number of e-commerce sites have appeared, which address this precise market segment. These include trip.com travelweb.com, and priceline.com. These web sites work in exactly
130 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

the same way. When a customer provides requirements, these sites do a search of their own databases or send agents our _ explore other web sites and respond to the consumer. Amongst the requirement that the customer could specify is an acceptable price. A number of sites, such as priceline.com, require that provided the price specified is met, the customer cannot refuse the offer found. These ecommerce sites are beginning to grab an increasing part of the travel market. They are attractive to consumers because of the convenience, the ability to meet requirements such as specified prices, and in some cases like lastminute.com, a special customer need (i.e” booking at the last minute). These travel sites often also have a lot of information on promotions, suggestions, etc., which are useful for customers. These ecommerce sites are having a strong “disintermediation” effect. Disintermediation refers to the removal of intermediaries such as travel agents from the process involved in the purchase of the service. A recent increasing trend has also seen the primary provider of a service such as an airline introducing internet based booking at reduced prices, further emphasizing the disintermediation effect. E-employment and e-jobs There are several different kinds of services provided here, namely 1. 2. 3. sites where you can get advice on developing your resumes and can post your resumes on the web recruiters who use the web site to post available jobs, such as Hot jobs (www.hotjobs.com) or Jobdirect employers who list available jobs on the web sites a. matchmaking facilities that search the internet for jobs for jobseekers based on a specification, such as www.monster.com b. matchmaking facilities to search the internet for resumes that best fit a job description given by a prospective employer use of agents to do the search These approaches of using the internet for e-employment or ejobs avoid many of the costs and difficulties associated with traditional approaches to advertising, such as high cost, limited duration, and minimal information.

NOTES

Others In some areas, such as real estates e.g., (www.realestate.com) the visualization ‘(3D’ facilities provided on the web allow one to either
131 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

 

show visualizations of buildings at the drawing board stage, or allow people distant from the physical site of building to actually visualize it

This area of matchmaking and brokering services is expected to grow greatly in the near future with e-commerce sites exploiting new market niches. This is also an area with the greatest likelihood of disinter mediation, and traditional agents or brokers will have to build new dimensions to their services in order to survive. E-Entertainment This is expected to be a growing area of e-commerce in the future. A number of companies are gaining access to or have purchased large inventories of movies or other entertainment material with the view of allowing people to download this on the web. Sites here vary from theme sites that use a small amount of interactive entertainment to promote their products, such as Disney, to others that provide games either for a fee or are free coupled together with advertising that pays for the site. An important issue here is that the payments involved are relatively small for each transaction, and hence the use of micro payment techniques is likely to be of considerable importance here. 2.3.2 Electronic Commerce and Banking “Banking is vital to a healthy economy. Banking as a business can be subdivided into five broad types: retail, domestic wholesale, international wholesale, investment, and trust. Of all these types, retail and investment banking are most affected by online technological innovations and are the ones that stand to profit most from electronic commerce. The role of electronic commerce in banking is multifaceted impacted by changes in technology, rapid deregulation of many parts of finance, the emergence of new banking institutions, and basic economic restructuring. Given these environmental changes, banks are reassessing their cost and profit structures. Many banks feel that in order to be profitable they need to reduce operating expenses and maintain strict cost control. This philosophy is evident in the many mergers and acquisitions occurring in the banking industry. The challenge behind bank restructuring lies in adequately operational zing the notion of cost control.

132

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Technology is the predominant solution for controlling costs. Banks are

NOTES

Increasingly help to reduce operating costs and still provide adequate customer service. Innovation and technology are becoming the key differentiators in the financial services business. Advance in networking, processing, and decision analytics have allowed institutions to lower service costs. Technology has also accelerated the pace of product innovation. For example, sophisticated arbitrage instruments like derivatives are changing the nature of investment banking. The Securities and Exchange Commission’s decision to allow Spring Street Brewery to trade its stock online may also fundamentally change investment banking by disinter mediating the traditional role of underwriting. Technology is enabling the development of new products and services. For example, technology is capable of replacing or expediting tedious financial exercises like check writing, filing taxes, and transferring funds. Although large businesses have automated these tasks, many small businesses and most households still do them manually. This is not surprising; large businesses have been undergoing computerization for more than thirty years, whereas PCs have been entering households in significant numbers only in the last few years. Technology is changing the interaction between banks and consumers. In particular, technological innovations have enabled the following capabilities: online delivery of bank brochures and marketing information; electronic access to bank statements; ability to request the transfer of funds between accounts; electronic bill payment and presentment; ability to use multiple financial software products with “memory” (thus eliminating the need to re-enter the same data); online payments—encrypted credit cards for transferring payment instructions between merchant, bank, customer; and finally, micro payments (or nickel-and-dime transactions using electronic cash and electronic checks). These online capabilities increase the facility and speed of retail banking. However, new technology is a double-edged sword. While it enables banks to be more competitive through huge investments, it also enables new competition from fast-moving, non banking firms. This trend can be seen in the area of online payments, where recent innovations have provided an opportunity for non banks to break into the banking business, threatening the banking stronghold on one of the last key services provided by banks. The present nature of online payments is a clear indication that if the banking industry fails to meet the demand for new products, there are many industries that are both willing and able to fill the void.

133

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Technology also creates problems in the product development lifecycle. In the past, banks had the luxury of long roll-out periods because successful investment in retail banking required a large monetary commitment for product development. This financial requirement pre-vented new participants from entering the market and was a key determinant of success. This is no longer the case. Instead of a single institution doing everything, technology allows the creation of a “virtual financial institution” made up of firms, each contributing the best-of-breed software or products to the overall product. In this new “virtual model,” banks compete with the twelve-to-eighteen-month product development times of companies like Intuit or Netscape, which have product life-cycle times of only six to nine months. Changing Dynamics In Banking Industry In recent years, there has been a major change in the way banks strive for increased profitability. In the past, the banking industry was chiefly concerned with asset quality and capitalization; if the bank was performing well along these two dimensions, then the bank would likely be profitable. Today, performing well on asset quality and capitalization is not enough. Banks need to find new ways to increase revenues in a “mature market” for most traditional banking services, particularly consumer credit. A thorough understanding of this competitive environment is needed before banks can determine their online strategy. Five distinct factors contribute to the new competitive environment:  Changing consumer needs driven by online commerce  Optimization of branch networks in order to reduce costs,  Changing demographic trends and potential new consumer markets  Cross-industry competition caused by deregulation, and  New online financial products.

Changing Consumer Needs Consumer requirements have changed substantially in the last decade. Customers want to access account-related information, download account data for use with personal finance software products, transfer funds between accounts, and pay bills electronically. Of course, along with these services, banks must be able to supply/guarantee the privacy and confidentiality that customers demand, which is not a trivial matter to implement on the part of the banks.
134 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Many consumer requirements are based on a simple premise: customers and financial institutions both seek closer and more multifaceted relation-ships with one another. Customers want to be able to bank at their convenience, including over the weekend or late at night. Bankers want more stable and long term relationships with their customers. From the bank’s perspective, developing and maintaining this relation-ship is difficult. Although financial products are essentially information products and financial institutions are highly automated, there is a gulf between automated information and the bank’s ability to reach the consumer in a unified way. This gulf is filled with established methods, such as branches, postage and mail, advertising, and people on telephones. These methods can be costly and impersonal. Electronic banking provides a method of communication that will enable the bank customer to be reached, served, and sold products and services in their homes and offices whenever it is convenient for them-twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week. 2.3.3. Banking Via Online Services Although personal finance software allows people to manage their money, it only represents half of the information management equation. No matter which software package is used to manage accounts, information gets man-aged twice once by the consumer and once by the bank. If the consumer uses personal finance software, then both the consumer and the bank are responsible for maintaining systems; unfortunately, these systems do not communicate with one another, thus giving new meaning to double-entry bookkeeping. For example, a consumer enters data once into his system and transfers this information to paper in the form of a check, only to have the bank then transfer it from paper back into electronic form. Unfortunately, off-the-shelf personal finance software cannot bridge the communications gap or reduce the duplication of effort described above. But a few “home banking” systems that can help are beginning to take hold. In combination with a PC and modem, these home banking services let the bank become an electronic gateway, reducing the monthly paper chase of bills and checks

NOTES

135

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Citibank and Prodigy

To understand the more contemporary online banking services, we look at CitiBank and Prodigy. Prodigy has been pro-viding home banking to consumers since 1988, and has relationships with more banks than any commercial online service. To expand the attractiveness of its online banking services, in 1996 Citibank began offering Prodigy subscribers a free and direct link to its electronic home banking service. Access to Citibank is available to Prodigy sub-scribers at no extra fee throughout the New York metropolitan area. The agreement represents the first time that CitiBank has expanded access to its proprietary PC Banking service through a commercial online service. To en-courage Citi Bank customers to try online banking through Prodigy, free Prodigy software will be made available at local Citi Bank branches. CitiBanking on Prodigy offers a full range of banking services. Customers can check their account balances, transfer money between accounts, pay bills electronically, review their Citi Bank credit card account, and buy and sell stock trough Citi Corp Investment Services. Citi Bank and Prodigy al-low customers to explore the wide array of services using an interactive, hands-on demonstration. Banking via the Web: Security First Network Bank With the explosive growth in Internet use, banking via the World Wide Web will undoubtedly catch on quickly. The goal of this approach to banking is to provide superior

136

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

customer service and convenience in a secure electronic environment. The competitors in this segment are banks that are setting up Web sites, and firms like Intuit that can easily transport their product to the Internet. Banking on the Internet is not the same as banking via online services. Internet banking means that: Consumers do not have to purchase any additional software (the Web browser is sufficient), store any data on their computer, back up any information, or wait months for new versions and upgrades, since all transactions occur on a secure server over the Internet. Consumers can conduct banking anywhere as long as they have a com-puter (not necessarily their own computer) and a modem-whether at home, at the office, or in a place outside the United States. Banking via online services is restrictive in that the consumer has to install a soft-ware package onto her computer. This limits the customer to banking only from that computer, making a call to access a separate network, working with a separate software company, and banking during limited hours of operation. Consumers can download account information into their own choice of programs rather than following the dictates of the service provider. Internet banking allows banks to break out of the hegemony of software developers. If bank customers (end users) install personal financial management software on their PCs, these customers become direct customers of software firms. By controlling the software interface, software firms such as Intuit can control the kinds of transactions end users make and with whom these transactions occur. By maintaining a direct relationship with end users via the Web, banks can offer additional services and provide a personal feel to the interface, without seeking the cooperation of a software company. If banks choose to offer home banking via personal financial management software, they lose control over the end user interface and the relationship they have with customers. This loss of control has tremendous long-term implications. The software industry history offers com-pelling proof of the importance of organizations having a direct relationship with consumers. In the early 1980s, IBM decided that operating systems were not central to IBM business strategy. As a result, IBM licensed DOS from a small software company called Microsoft. IBM called this operating system PC-DOS and allowed Microsoft to market this same operating system to competing computer manufacturers under the name of MSDOS. IBM’s seal of
137

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

approval made DOS an industry standard. However, IBM was unable to move the industry to a new operating system called OS/2 in the late 1980s because Microsoft controlled the customer relationship and was able to convert most end -users to Windows. For banks, too, losing control over the interface could have dire consequences. 2.3.3.1 Management issues in Online Banking The challenge facing the banking industry is whether management has the creativity and vision to harness the technology and provide customers with new financial products necessary to satisfy their continually changing financial needs. Banks must deliver high quality products at the customers’ convenience with high-tech, high-touch personal and affordable service. In order to achieve this, management has to balance the five key values that increasingly drive customers’ banking decisions: simplicity, customized ser-vice, convenience, quality, and price. Online banking will realize its full potential when the following key elements fall into place:      The development of an interesting portfolio of products and services that is attractive to customers and sufficiently differentiated from competitors. The creation of online financial supply chains to manage the shift from banks as gatekeeper models to banks as gateways. The emergence of low-cost interactive access terminals for the home as well as affordable interactive home information services. The identification of new market segments with untapped needs such as the willingness to pay for the convenience of remote banking. The establishment of good customer service on the part of banks. The fact that technology increases the ease of switching from one bank to an-other means that banks that do not offer superior customer service may see low levels of customer loyalty. The development of effective back-office systems that can support sophisticated retail interfaces.



Marketing Issues: Attracting Customers The benefits of online banking are often not made clear to the potential user. Consumer question includes :

138

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

How is balancing the checking account online superior to doing it on paper? Is paying bills online superior to the familiar 5 of writing checks? Where is the consumer gaining value? Perhaps the answers to these questions are not clear to the bankers themselves. Regardless of how a bank chooses to answer these questions, it is clear that make a mistake trying to sell online banking services on the basis of convenience. While short term convenience is important, consumers want 19-term ability to control and organize their finances more than they want convenience. Banks must also look beyond home consumers for online banking consumers. The rapidly growing use of personal computers by small business- provides a solid opportunity for banks to build a profitable base of small business until a broader consumer market evolves. There are mil-lions of small businesses with annual sales ranging from Rs. 250,000 to Rs. 5 million. Many of these firms have PCs and modems. New services like interactive cash management services could generate significant revenues for banks. Industry studies indicate that 20 percent of small businesses are immediate prospects for online banking and are willing to pay more than individual consumers for the service-up to $100 a “month. Thus, banks have opportunity to tap into this market segment. Marketing Issues: Keeping Customers Keeping customers (or customer loyalty) requires the following: 1. Banks must switch the costs of moving from one software platform to other to keep customers from moving. Customers are increasingly familiar with using technology to access bank accounts and to handle financial affairs, and this familiarity increases interest in additional vices and increases switching costs. Banks must provide integrated services. The oftcited time squeeze on consumerslong commutes, heavy workload, family obligations, household management is pushing consumers toward integrated services that can speed up financial procedures. These integrated services contribute to cementing the customer relationship. Banks can realize the positive cost implications for the longterm value of building customer loyalty. In the online world, there is not a big cost dif-ference between serving one customer and serving 100,000 customers. Clearly, marketers must also work on building a loyal customer base not only in order to maintain the existing base, but also in order to be attractive to potential customers.

NOTES

2.

3.

139

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

2.4 ADVERTISING AND ONLINE PUBLISHING 2.4.1 Advertising and Online Publishing With the intention of attracting advertising dollars, magazines and newspapers have also set up sites on the Web. Many online periodicals include traditional advertisements as well as icons, which display an advertiser’s logo and, when clicked with a mouse, send a user across the Web to the advertiser’s Web site. Among periodicals that have gone from print to online advertising with some degree of advertising success are: Knight-Ridder’s San Jose Mercury News newspaper, which reportedly charges Rs. 100 per day for an advertisement, and magazines such as Hot Wired, Playboy, and People, which reportedly charge Rs. 30,000-Rs. 45,000 per quarter for an advertiser to place an icon in the periodical. Promotions are also common. In many cases, advertisers ask site visitors to provide their names and addresses in exchange for a product discount. 2.4.1.1 Reasons expected for the increase in Advertising spending Shorter Access Times As more bandwidth becomes available, users will spend a larger proportion of their time on Web sites and a smaller proportion waiting to access them. With more time available to draw users’ attention, advertisers should be willing to pay more per user to place their icons in online periodicals. Shorter access times also enable increasingly complex graphics to be placed on Web sites, without requiring additional access time. This should draw to the Web advertisers who may have been concerned that the current graphical quality was insufficient for displaying their products. With more advertisers, advertising rates should rise. Reduced Access Fees New Internet users will be attracted by reduced ac-cess fees, with part of the reduction covered by advertisers. The cost of the access fee itself can be shared by an advertiser if, for example, the advertiser pays for the access time used when accessing online yellow pages.

140

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Increasingly Convenient Access to Information As the amount of information online increases, it should be increasingly important for advertisers to get users to their sites quickly, leading them to pay more for placement in online periodicals. Increasingly Valuable Information Product descriptions can be enhanced through online advertising. With more information available, the decision to purchase should be easier and more purchases should occur (assuming the product is desirable). This should boost the appeal of the Web and increase the rates that advertisers could be charged for placing their icons in an online periodical. 2.4.1.2 Better Measurement of Advertising Effectiveness Product advertising is far more effective if it leads to a purchase. If online advertising encourages users to shift a portion of their purchases to the Web, then companies may pay far more to advertise. However, a measurement system will not be useful until: 1. 2. an online publisher can use it to determine advertising rates and the appeal of its articles, and an advertiser can use it to justify the cost of promoting a Web site, maintaining a Web site, and placing a site -linked icon in an online page. Despite the popularity of advertising on Web sites, few publishers have attempted to measure how many advertising dollars are being spent. There are three reasons for this:    The market is too small to justify the cost of measuring its size. There is not a clear definition of what advertising expenses should be counted. Spending can be the amount that advertisers pay other Web sites such as periodicals and games to display their icons or product offerings. The market is changing too rapidly to develop an effective means of measurement.

NOTES

141

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Effective measurement of online advertising is taking centre stage. It was reported in MediaWeek [MW96] that Procter & Gamble was ready to spend some of its $3.3 billion ad budget to advertise on various Web sites. However, the packaged goods giant told the online publishing community that it will compensate the ad banners it buys only on a “click-through” ba-sis. In other words, standard impressions-delivered when an Internet surfer sees an ad banner but does not click on it to connect to a Web site -are considered to have no value by P&G. The anticipated P&G strategy, a sharp departure from the industry standard which measures hits ,has sent a shiver down the spine of many ad sales executives. The concern was that other advertisers will follow P&G’s lead. 2.4.1.3 Digital Copyrights and Electronic Publishing Intellectual property rights (copyrights, trademarks, and licenses) are an important asset possessed by the publishers in their respective markets. Protecting intellectual property rights and collecting dues from online users is proving to be quite challenging. The scope and magnitude of the problem is clear. The potential of online copyright infringement vastly surpasses the damage that can be inflicted with a photocopy machine. Anyone with a computer can make and distribute countless copies of anything digital, be it a book, a TV or computer program, or a piece of music. Even worse, the digital version can be sent to friends or even a bulletin board system (BBS) for downloading by anyone with a modern. Advances in technology have raised the stakes considerably. Today, virtually any work can be “digitized,” archived, and used in the digital format. This increases the ease and speed with which a work can be reproduced, the quality of the copies, the ability to manipulate and change the work, and the speed with which copies (authorized and unauthorized) can be “delivered” to the public. Works also can be combined with other works into a single medium, such as a CD-ROM, causing a blurring of the traditional content lines. The establishment of high-speed networking makes it possible for one individual, with a few key strokes, to deliver perfect copies of digitized works to scores of other individuals. In short, the emergence of the Internet is dramatically changing how consumers and businesses deal in information and entertainment products and services; as well as how works are created, owned, distributed, reproduced, displayed, performed, licensed, managed, presented, organized, sold, accessed, used, and stored. All of this has led to a clarion call for changes in the copyright law.

142

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The stakes are high. Owners of copyrights are not willing to put their interests at risk if appropriate protections are not in place to permit them to set and enforce the terms and conditions under which their works are made available online. Likewise, the public will not use the services avail-able and create the market necessary for online publishing’s success un-less access to a wide variety of works is provided under equitable and reasonable terms and conditions, and unless the integrity of those works is assured. Online Copyright Protection Methods Unauthorized access to published content can be restricted by two methods: 1. 2. Restricting access to the source of the work. This includes controlling Web server access or controlling individual document access. Restricting manipulation of the electronic file containing the work.

NOTES

2.4.2 Electronic Commerce and Online Ppublishing The Web may have blossomed because of peer-to-peer publishing, but judging from recent product offerings, there is an enormous groundswell of interest among both commercial and corporate publishers in the Web. For instance, it was reported that, in less than three months, the Wall Street Journal Interactive Edition attracted 500,000 registered readers on the Web, and that number is growing by some 3,000 readers per day. Also, the electronic edition has attracted more than thirty advertisers paying to reach this audience. Initially, growth in the online publishing marketplace was driven by the potential of new interactive technologies and applications. The promise of new interactive publishing captured the imagination of both content providers and the public. However, from 1993 to 1995 much of online publishing was inhibited by a lack of business purpose. At that time, the con-tent creation side of online publishing was dominated by techno-savvy individuals who were not experienced at selling and who did not under-stand the business of publishing. In addition, there were publishing companies who took a “Just Get Me on the Web!” approach, failing to define the business purposes driving their online presence. As the initial euphoria wore off, publishers realized that simply having a presence on the Web did not guarantee profits. They discovered that offering exciting technology without compelling content is insufficient to capture market share. These firms are learning that the best way to capture consumers’ attention is to develop a business model that allows the company to
143 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

offer unique and valuable information, programming, and services. This content, no matter how it is delivered, must be packaged so that it provides more value than alternative sources of information. The key is to identify what the customer wants and finds interesting and to avoid being distracted by new technologies. Publishers need to pay more attention to their core competency of packaging and delivering content and making money online. These are tricky but necessary conditions to successful online publishing. Many online publishing pioneers have gone up the technology curve and are confronting tough management questions such as how to gain market share and how to be profitable sooner than later. Some of these firms have invested tens of millions of dollars in people, equipment, and marketing, and they have not yet turned a profit. Some of the sites employ hundreds of people, with millions of dollars in payroll alone. Many early pioneers invested a huge amount of money into brand building, marketing, and content, but they have not been able to figure out which business model works best for making money. Online publishers are developing new business models to charge customers directly and convince them that such charges are justified. As more and more firms begin to offer online content, they are being forced to adjust to new customer attitudes regarding pricing. Publishers currently finance their businesses by offering advertisers mass markets for delivering their message in return for large advertising fees. The public has been trained to think that the news, information, and entertainment they receive should be subsidized or nearly free and that advertisers will pay the bill. This approach may not be viable in the online medium when mass markets are re-placed by customers selecting their information and delivery methods. The early online publishing pioneers are trying to accomplish a difficult feat. Newspaper and magazine publishers, some of the first to stake their claims on the Internet, are tinkering with new advertising models for their fledgling Web sites. In general, mainstream advertisers have been skittish about pumping money into a medium with an audience whose size and habits are nearly impossible to figure out. As a result of relatively low ad revenues, none of the Web publishers have turned a profit. While ad revenues are not coming close to covering expenses now, they could grow substantially in coming years as the traffic increases and brand names become established. Brand development is important because every time a user sits in front of a Web browser, she needs to make a decision about where to go. The better the brand, the more likely it is to pop up in the consumer’s mind another key issue in online publishing relates to digital copyrights.
144 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Effective technological protection mechanisms are vital to ensuring the availability of quality content online. Today, publishers such as Addison—Wesley only offer catalogs or sample selections of works available online. They do not and cannot offer more because in an environment where the culture and technology provide so little protection for the rights of content producers, there is too great a risk to their intellectual property. The Internet makes it extremely easy to copy, retransmit, and alter works without the permission or the copyright holder. Moreover, the digital world has no international boundaries, and policing is impossible since the levels of protections and sanctions against infringement vary widely in countries across the globe, which makes the risk even greater. 2.4.2.1 Online Publishing Strategies As with any new development, there are generally three strategies for publishing companies to consider: Early Movers These are highly skilled independent publishers with existing access to such key capabilities as direct marketing and order fulfilment. These publishers have the capacity to derive the highest benefits from new media as their learning curves are much shorter than others, and they already have many of the necessary resources at hand. Watchers These are large publishing companies that employ scale-sensitive economics. They are unlikely to view online publishing as a sufficiently attractive channel until costs fall and distribution widens. This category includes publishers of unbranded or less distinctive content who cannot attract a sufficiently large initial consumer franchise, as well as fo-cused publishers in categories not easily suited for the online medium. Testers These are the majority of publishers that face either attractiveness and/ or skill challenges. Gathered here are many multi category and specialty publishers who are competing successfully in traditional markets, who are uncertain who will win in the online marketplace, and who neither need nor want to make a choice now. Testers also include
145

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

branded general publishers with robust consumer franchises and attractive distribution channels already in place. For this group, the online medium appears to be an alternative. In general, publishers are educating themselves about the potential opportunities without committing themselves to anyone position. Those with strong brand images and existing consumer franchises may choose to post-pone entry until they find viable service providers and distributors. Publishers such as the Wall Street Journal and New York Times are taking part in targeted tests and pilot projects aimed at learning what online publishing has to offer, building required skills, and exploring the attractiveness of potential channels. These tests often include a skill-building program as well as an early warning system so that a company can quickly identify and re-act to changes within the industry or economy. Content, incentives, service, quality, and price will not be enough to compete in this new environment. Speed of delivery, bundling of products, and diversity of choice also become critical success factors. Publishers will have to innovate constantly and challenge present concepts if this form of commerce is to become widely accepted and popular. Winning in online publishing will entail developing new skills in areas such as tailored advertising, order processing and fulfilment, and customer service as well as re-learning the fundamental principles concerning why people subscribe. 2.4.2.2 Online Publishing Approaches There are four contrasting content publishing approaches.     The online archive approach. This is new to the Web, but is a logical extension of the trends in electronic delivery over the past several years. The new medium approach. This is more controversial and more difficult to implement, but also more exciting. The publishing intermediation approach. This is an online extension of the thirdparty publisher role off-line. The dynamic and just-in-time approach. In this approach, content is assembled in real-time and transmitted in the format best suited to the user’s tastes and preferences.

The Online Archive Approach The online archive approach (including bibliographic databases and full-text search/ retrieval services) is one that appeals to corporate publishers and, to some extent,
146 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

commercial publishers (such as academic or journal publishers) who have an existing digital archive that they want to deliver over the Web as well as on paper, CD- ROM, or other media. The most prevalent example of online archive approach is library catalogs and bibliographic databases. Most libraries have replaced traditional card catalogs with sophisticated electronic online bibliographic databases offering an incredible range of functions. At revenues of over $1 billion a year, bibliographic databases represent a sizable chunk of the online data-base market. An example of a bibliographic database is MEDLINE, developed by the National Library of Medicine (NLM), which caters to an increasing number of physicians who rely on online medical databases to keep up to date with the latest developments and literature. The spread of PCs has enabled physicians to directly search databases used only by librarians in the past. MEDLINE and other medical databases are available free of charge on the Internet. The online archive approach is also being used by niche publishers such as ZiffDavis, which began its venture into electronic publishing in .1985 with a bulletin board system for readers of PC Magazine. That bulletin board evolved in 1988 to become PC Mag-Net on CompuServe, which quickly grew in popularity. In 1991, Ziff-Davis created the ZD Net subscription service on CompuServe to provide a service supporting online versions of all its publications. Members of the ZD Net/CompuServe edition have access to several features, including the ZD Net University series of comprehensive online “continuing education courses, sophisticated on-line forums with top industry personalities, and a comprehensive database of past articles. In addition to its successful CompuServe subscription ser-vice, the ZD Net Web Edition (http://www.zdnet.com) logs access by more than 700,000 Internet hosts each month and is reportedly showing a profit. The New Medium Approach The new medium approach (including real -time news delivery, personalized news delivery, and edutainment) aims to create new material for the Web-to treat the Web as its own medium, one deserving its own material. This approach will have the most appeal to commercial print publishers, such as magazines, that view the Web as an alternative, not a replacement, for print publications. For example, Wired magazine sees very little crossover in content between its magazine and its HotWired venture. Some writers may write for both media, but separate content streams will be developed for each medium. This approach currently has some teething problems because of technological limitations. For instance, the formatting limitations of the Web are frustrating at the moment, but with technological
147

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

advancements they will soon be forgotten. The frustrations are more than offset by the excitement of the interactivity the Web offers; its model is both broadcasting and conversation at the same time. With online publishing there may be a well-known starting point, but with no controlling gatekeeper, the subsequent value-added improvisation from readers makes each online magazine a unique experience. Even if the technology constraints were overcome, the expectations of the Web are so different from print media that new content, written for a Web audience, must be created. It quickly becomes apparent that under this model, the old paradigms do not work. The publisher gives up not only its brand name, but its intellectual content, too-once the information is out there, it is no longer, owned. Faced with that model, all a publisher can do is “be the first with the most interesting stuff,” an approach that HotWired is taking in its attempt to create a place where readers can see what the world has to say on a minute-by minute basis. The Publishing Intermediation Approach The publishing intermediation approach (including online directories) exploits new service opportunities for intermediaries. For example, in the growing market for educational material such as course packs and other customized books, companies offering material owned by more than one publisher face the daunting task of obtaining permissions. New organizations that specialize in the management of copyright clearance are emerging as key players. Online directories are important for several reasons. Companies and consumers interested in conducting electronic commerce often struggle to navigate the Internet to create an electronic marketplace. Once on that sprawling network, they are having trouble finding other companies, products, and services. The success of Yahoo’s initial public offering (IPO) underscores the importance of online directories. Yahoo (which stands for Yet Another Hierarchical Officious Oracle) was created in 1994 by David Filo and Jerry Yang, two Stanford, University electrical engineering PhD students who began DY simply compiling lists of their favorite Web sites. It went on to become one of the most popular means of navigating around the Internet. Yahoo is the first place millions of Internet users go when they try to find their way around the rapidly growing Internet. At one time, Yahoo was getting about 6 million visitors per day, which made it the second most active Web site next to Netscape’s home page.
148 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Clearly, there will be a demand for intermediation because there will al-ways be a need for a good directory to help people locate goods, services, and products. The future is bright for the publishing intermediaries who offer ease of operation, speed, and detailed information. The Dynamic and Just-in-Time Publishing Approach Online content is no longer static information. Content can now be created in realtime and transmitted on the fly in the format best suited to the user’s location, tastes, and preferences. More importantly, the content engine recognizes repeat visitors to a site and configures the Web pages to match the individual’s known preferences. For example, a publisher planning to deploy a large product catalog will no longer have to author and update each individual Web page. Instead, the elements of each page-text, graphics, video, and sound-are stored separately in a database and used to create individualized pages on the fly as each user browses the site. The page content can be further customized to reflect which Web browser is being used, the user’s geographic location, and modem speed. Another way of looking at dynamic publishing is that it is just-in-time publishing. That is, the stories, applets, and content flow into the computer just as consumers need them, and then self-destruct after usage. A number of micro payment schemes are emerging. The world of online entertainment-specifically “pay-for-play” outlets being developed by Sony, Sierra OnLine, and others-could serve as the best model for every-one else [PCW96]. Clearly publishers and developers should be thinking about low-value payments, but it is still too early for most companies to de-ploy. For micro payments to work, transaction costs must be very small (around 10 cents), and they are nowhere near that yet. What is more, the proposed schemes vary widely and many kinks in the micro payment puzzle have to be worked out.

NOTES

149

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

2.5 B2B E-COMMERCE 2.5.1 B2B - Business to Business E-Commerce E-commerce has been in use for quit a few years and is more commonly known as EDI (electronic data interchange). In the past EDI was conducted on a direct link of some form between the two businesses where as today the most popular connection is the internet. The two businesses pass information electronically to each other. B2B e-commerce currently makes up about 94% of all e-commerce transactions. Typically in the B2B environment, E-Commerce can be used in the following processes:    Procurement; order fulfilment; Managing trading-partner relationships.

For many Welsh SMEs, B2B E-Commerce is synonymous with the vision of integrated supply chains. This might be the ultimate objective, but, in the short term, B2B E-Commerce could be used as a significant enabler in their move towards greater trading partner collaboration. E-Commerce technologies have allowed even the smallest businesses to improve the processes for interfacing with customers. They are now able to develop services for individual clients rather than provide a standard service. Pentwyn Splicers based in Pontypool manufacture pneumatic splicers for the UK and world textile market. They evaluated all aspects of their business process to determine where the greatest return could be obtained. Using the Web to sell more products was an initial consideration, but it was in the provision of customer service and support to their overseas distributors that the greatest benefits have been achieved. An alternative way of thinking of B2B eCommerce is to think of it as being used to:   Attract, develop, retain, and cultivate relationships with customers; Streamline the supply chain, manufacturing, and procurement processes, and automate corporate processes to deliver the right products and services to customers quickly and cost-effectively;

150

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT



Capture, analyze, and share, information about customers and company operations, in order to make better decisions.

NOTES

In business-to-business electronic commerce businesses use the Internet to integrate the value- added chain, which can extend from the supplier of raw materials to the final consumer. Business for business dominates the total value of e-commerce activity, accounting for about 80 per cent at present. Because the-economic factors affecting the adoption of e-commerce between businesses are such different from those affecting business-toconsumer ecommerce, business-to- business e-commerce is likely to maintain for enlarge is advantage for the foreseeable future: Electronic links between businesses are not new. They have existed for decades, in the form of electronic data interchange (EDI) supplied by value-added networks (VAN) operated over leased telephone lines. Large manufacturing firms are the main users of EDI. General Electric (GE), one of the largest EDI service suppliers, estimates that 80 per cent of suppliers are not connected to an EDI system but rely on from, telephone or mail. Drivers and inhibitors of business-to-business electronic commerce in businessto-business e-commerce, three factors are likely to lead to e-commerce a reduction in transaction costs and improvement of product quality/customer service a. b. a defensive reaction A competitors engaging in commerce; and Insistence by large businesses that all of their suppliers link into their e-commerce system as a condition of-doing business.

The first factor, reduced transaction costs, drives the second and third and will be explored in greater detail in the next chapter. However, electronic commerce clearly reduces these costs and thus drives its adoption. It is expected that by 2001-02, many barriers, such as questions of security and reliability, which now limit the extension of Internet EDI to unknown firms, will have been overcome. As a result, there will be a significant increase in business-to-business e-commerce as it draws in smaller second- and third-tier suppliers. For example, the US Automotive Network exchange (ANX), developed by the Automotive Industry Action Group (AIAG), makes use of the Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) to link automotive
151 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

suppliers to each other and to original equipment manufacturers (OEM) (e.g. GM, Ford and Chrysler). Dispensing with the multiple networks and protocols that now link first-tier suppliers to OEMs, the new system will provide a single common system that can be extended to include all suppliers. The largest impact of business –to – business e-commerce is likely to be on small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs), because many large business already have EDT’ systems in place. The accessibility of the Internet makes electronic commerce realistic possibility for SMEs and is likely to lead to its widespread diffusion. In addition to migrating existing activity to e-commerce, new business—to-business products are being created which did not, or could not, exist before electronic commerce over the Internet made them economically viable. For example, spot markets that match buyers and sellers for a wide variety of goods ranging from electronic components to agricultural commodities to transportation futures have sprung up; they represent only the beginning of what is expected to be a wide number of new business-to-business opportunities. Another example is the extension of EDI-type links via the Internet. Parcel delivery, logistics and order fulfillment services, frequently by the same firm, are also experiencing growth as ecommerce increases. As businesses move to “build-to-order” processing and just-intime inventories, a premium is placed on timely, accurate inbound and outbound logistics. In addition, there is greater demand by final consumers for fast order fulfillment and the ability to track an order as it is being processed and delivered. 2.5.2 Automated Ecommerce Transactions It is a term also used in electronic commerce and to describe automated processes between trading partners. The volume of B2B transactions is much higher than the volume of B2C transactions. One reason for this is that businesses have adopted electronic commerce technologies in greater numbers than consumers. Also, in a typical supply chain there will be many B2B transactions but only one B2C transaction, as the completed product is retailed to the end customer. An example of a B2B transaction is a chicken feed company selling its product to a chicken farm, which is another company. An example of a B2C transaction is a grocery store selling grain-fed chickens to a consumer. B2B can also describe marketing activities between businesses, not just the final transactions that result from marketing, though the term can be used to identify sales transactions between businesses (also referred to as
152 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

“institutional sales”). For example, a company selling photocopiers would more likely be a B2B sales organization than a B2C sales organization. “Business-to-business” can also refer to all transactions made in an industry value chain before the finished product is sold to the end consumer. 2.5.3 Characteristics of B2B EC Business – to – business electronic commerce implies that both the sellers and buyers are Business Corporation, while business – to – consumer electronic commerce implies that the buyers are individual consumers. Business-to – business EC is expected to grow to $1,330.9 billion by 2003 and continue to be the major share of the EC market (Free-man 1998, Retter and Calyniuk 1998). The percentage of Internet – based B2B EC compared to total B2B commerce will expand from.2 percent in 1997 to 2.1 percent in 2000 and 9.4 percent in2003. Computing electronics, utilities, shipping and warehousing, motor vehicles, petrochemicals, paper and office products, food, and agriculture are the leading items in B2B EC. Business-to-business EC covers a broad spectrum of applications that enable an enterprise or business to form electronic relationships with their distributors, resellers, suppliers, and other partners. As Handfield and Nichols (1999) suggest, B2B applications will offer enterprises access to the following sorts of information:           Product – specifications, prices, sales history Customer – sales history and forecasts Supplier – product line and lead times, sales terms and conditions Product process – capacities, commitments, product plans Transportation – carriers, lead times, costs Inventory – inventory levels, carrying costs, locations Supply chain alliance – key contacts, partner roles and responsibilities, schedules Competitor – benchmarking, competitive product offerings, market share Sales and marketing – point of seal (POS) , promotions Supply chain process and performance – process descriptions, performance measures, quality, delivery time, customer satisfaction

NOTES

153

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

2.5.4 What is B2B Marketing Communications? B2B marketing communications is how businesses promote their products and services to other businesses using tactics other than direct sales. The purpose of B2B marketing communications is to support the marketer’s sales effort and improve company profitability. B2B marketing is generally considered to be more complex than B2C marketing, often complicated by a longer sales cycle and multiple decision makers on the buyer’s side. B2B marketing communications tactics generally include advertising, public relations, direct mail, trade show support, sales collateral, branding, and interactive services such as website design and search engine optimization. The Business Marketing Association is the trade organization that serves B2B marketing professionals. It was founded in 1922 and offers certification programs, research services, conferences, industry awards and training programs. B2B Marketing Methodologies Positioning Statement An important first step in business to business marketing is the development of your positioning statement. This is a statement of what you do and how you do it differently and better than your competitors. Developing your messages The next step is to develop your messages. There is usually a primary message that conveys more strongly to your customers what you do and the benefit it offers to them, supported by a number of secondary messages, each of which may have a number of supporting arguments, facts and figures. Building a campaign plan Whatever form your B2B marketing campaign will take, build a comprehensive plan up front to target resources where you believe they will deliver the best return on investment, and make sure you have all the infrastructure in place to support each stage of
154 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

the marketing process - and that doesn’t just include developing the lead - make sure the entire organization is geared up to handle the inquiries appropriately. Briefing an agency A standard briefing document is usually a good idea for briefing an agency. As well as focusing the agency on what’s important to you and your campaign, it serves as a checklist of all the important things to consider as part of your brief. Typical elements to an agency brief are: Your objectives, target market, target audience, product, campaign description, your product positioning, graphical considerations, corporate guidelines, and any other supporting material and distribution. Measuring results The real value in results measurement is in tying the marketing campaign back to business results. After all, you’re not in the business of developing marketing campaigns for marketing sake. So always put metrics in place to measure your campaigns, and if at all possible, measure your impact upon your desired objectives, be it Cost Per Acquisition, Cost per Lead or tangible changes in customer perception. B2B standards UN/EDIFACT is one of the most well-known and established B2B standards. ANSI ASC X12 is a popular standard in North America. RosettaNet is an XML-based, emerging B2B standard in the high tech industry. An approach like UN/CEFACT’s Modeling Methodology (UMM) might be used to capture the collaborative space of B2B business processes. 2.5.5 E-Marketplace “E-” or “electronic” marketplace in a business-to-business context is primarily a large online platform (B2B portal) or website that facilitates interaction and/or transactions between buyers and suppliers at organizational or institutional rather than individual levels. Since the builders of such marketplaces primarily aim at facilitating buyer-seller interaction (in most cases without being a buyer or seller themselves), these are also referred to as “third-party” B2B marketplaces.
155

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

These marketplaces can do one or more of the following: 1. Help buyers find new suppliers and vice versa 2. Help reduce the time and cost of interaction for B2B transactions 3. Help increase trade between distant geographies 4. Help manage payments and track orders for B2B transactions 5. Help reduce the number of profits after tax 6. Help increase the greenhouse gas emissions in the country 7. Help the environment by using appropriate technology that is environmentally friendly Vertical e-Marketplace A vertical e-marketplace spans up and down every segment of one specific industry. Each level of the industry has access to every other level, which greatly increases collaboration. Buyers and sellers in the industry are connected to increase operating efficiency and decrease supply chain costs, inventories and cycle times. This is possible because buying/selling items in a single industry standardizes needs, thereby reducing the need for outsourcing many products. E-commerce has a variety of different opinions going out towards different people in different organization that are committed to such technology. Therefore e-commerce is not well no where near the advanced technology that us in organizations use now a days. Horizontal e-Marketplace A horizontal e-marketplace connects buyers and sellers across many industries. The most common type of materials traded horizontally are MRO (maintenance, repair and operations) materials. Mainly business and consumer articles, these items are in demand because they are crucial to the daily running of a business, regardless of industry and level within that industry. Many corporations have MRO materials bought directly on-line by the maintenance team in order to relieve the purchasing department. No-frills e-Marketplace Developed in response to customers wanting to purchase products without service (or with very limited service), the no-frills e-marketplace parallels the B2C offering of no-frills budget airlines. The subject of several Harvard and IMD articles/case-studies, no-frills B2B e-marketplaces enable the effective de-bundling of service from product via
156 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

clear “business rules.” This provides the basis of differentiation from conventional B2B sales/purchasing channels. Etymology The term “business-to-business” was originally coined to describe the electronic communication relations between businesses or enterprises in order to distinguish it from the communications between businesses and consumers (B2C). It eventually came to be used in marketing as well, initially describing only industrial or capital goods marketing. However, today it is widely used to describe all products and services used by enterprises. 2.5.6 EDI Standards EDI stands for Electronic Data Interchange. This is one of the applications of E Commerce which makes Business to Business transactions possible over a network. Electronic data interchange (EDI) is a technology poised for explosive growth in use as the Internet provides an affordable way for businesses to connect and exchange documents with customers and suppliers of any size. EDI is the electronic exchange of business documents, data, and other information in a public-standard format. It cuts the cost of managing business-to-business transactions by eliminating the need for labor-intensive manual generation and processing of documents. In this lecture we will discuss the EDI standards, the EDI networks and the EDI software that interfaces these two elements and the business applications. These elements together with the EDI Agreement are covered in detail in this lecture. Let’s start with EDI Standards. EDI Standards At the heart of any EDI application is the EDI standard. The essence of EDI is the coding and structuring of the data into a common and generally accepted format -anything less is nothing more than a system of file-transfers. Coding and structuring the documents for business transactions is no easy matter. There have been a number of EDI standards developed in various industry sectors or within a specific country and there are complex committee structures and procedures to support them.

NOTES

157

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Following on from the various sectorial and national EDI standards is the United Nations (UN) EDI Standard: EDIFACT. This is the standard that should be adopted for any new EDI application. EDI provides an electronic linkage between two trading partners. Business transactions are output from the sending computer system, transmitted or transported in electronic format and input into the second, receiving computer system. The computer systems that exchange data need a common format; without a common format the data is meaningless. Two organizations that exchange data can, with relative ease, agree a format that meets their mutual needs. As the network of exchanges develops then the number of organizations needing to be party to the agreement grows. To illustrate this, assume a network of three customers (say supermarkets) ordering goods from four suppliers (food manufacturers), see

Interchanges between Customers and Suppliers. The network in is 12 separate interchanges. It is unlikely that each of these exchanges would have its own format but it is perfectly possible that each customer would have developed its own standards (giving each supplier three separate standards to cope with).
158 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

It is also possible that new exchanges added to the system will have requirements not envisaged when the data formats were originally agreed; this would require a change to the existing standard or the introduction of an additional standard. The overall picture is one of unnecessary complexity and incompatibility. EDI standards overcome these difficulties. The EDI standard provides, or attempts to provide, a standard for data interchange that is:     Ready formulated and available for use; Comprehensive in its coverage of the data requirements for any given transaction; Independent of hardware and software; Independent of the special interest of any party in the trading network.

NOTES

EDI Standards provide a common language for the interchange of standard transactions. Most of the work on EDI standards has been concerned with the interchange of trade documentation and financial transactions but the principle applies to any interchange where the data can be systematized and codified. EDI standards are used for the interchange of information as diverse as weather station readings and school exam results. Now let’s see how the various standards evolve. National and Sectorial Standards Evolution of EDI Standards The first EDI standards evolved from the formats used for file transfer of data between computer applications. The evolution of EDI standards can be seen as having three stages (although in practice it was and is somewhat more complex than that): 1. The first formats that might properly be called EDI were developed by organizations that had to process data from a large number of customer organizations. The data recipients set the standard and the customers conformed to it. The concept of EDI as an application independent interchange standard evolved and several industry sector and / or national standards bodies developed EDI standards to meet the needs of a specific user community.

2.

159

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

3.

The requirements of international and cross sector trade meant that the sector and national standards were becoming an impediment to the further development of electronic trading. EDIFACT was developed, under the auspices of the United Nations (UN), as a universal standard for commercial EDI.

The International EDI Standard As already outlined, EDI developed in closed user communities within trade sectors and / or national boundaries. The use of sector and national standards for this type of trade was satisfactory. However, as electronic trade developed to cover wider trading relationships there is a growing problem of trade between organisations using different EDI standards. In addition to the problem of cross sector trade there is a desire to use EDI for international trade. This (sensibly) requires a common format for the exchange of the standard business forms (order, invoice, etc.) between organisations in differing countries. International trade also requires a great deal of additional documentation for shipping, customs authorities, international credit arrangements, etc. - all of this is potentially electronic and obviously a common format is very desirable. To facilitate this cross sector and international development of EDI the EDIFACT standard has been, and is being, developed. EDIFACT is the United Nations standard of Electronic Data 2.5.7 Business - TO - Business Actions Business – to-business auctions are growing very rapidly due to the following benefits they provide: Generating Revenue   New sales channel that supports existing online sales. For example, Weirton steel Corp. doubled its customer base when it started auctions, New venue for disposing of excess, obsolete, and returned products quickly and easily.

160

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Increasing Page Views  Auctions give “stickiness”. Auction users spend more time on a site and generate more page views than other users.

NOTES

Acquiring and Retaining Members  All bidding transactions result in additional registered members.

There are three major types of B2B auctions according to Forrester Research: 1. Independent auctions. In this case companies use a third – party auctioneer to create the site and sell the goods. (e.g., www.fairmarket.com, www.imx exchange.com, and www.auctionagate.com). Commodity auctions. In this case many buyers and sellers come together to a third – party Web site. For example, access energy, utilities, and telecommunications are sold at www.band – x.com. The Dutch flower market is another example. Typical intermediaries are www.metalsite.net and www.fastparts.com. Private auctions by invitation only. Several companies by pass the intermediaries and auction their products by themselves. Ingram Micro has its own site, www.autionblock.com, for selling obsolete computer equipment to its regular business customers. 2.5.8 Business – TO – Business Services Many companies provide services that are intended to facilitate B2B. Some of these services are provided by intermediaries, others by specialists. Here are some examples. CommerceNet CommerceNet (www.commerce.net) is a global non-profit membership organization that aims to meet the needs of companies doing EC. It targets promoting and supporting emerging communities of EC. CommerceNet established a forum for companies doing EC to meet and exchange their experiences, while introducing the latest technology to them to facilitate their business.

2.

3.

161

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

It does contain information about members, which can be buyer or supplier companies. However, no specific product information is stored in its database. In fact, CommerceNet mainly acts as a services provider, not dealing with any of the individual transactions. CommerceNet also certifies Internet-enabled EDI products. Open Buying on the Internet The Open Buying on the Internet (OBI) Consortium (www.openbuy.org) is a non-profit organization dedicated to developing open standards for B2B Internet commerce. Membership in the consortium, an independent collaborative managed by CommerceNet, is open to buying and selling organizations, technology providers, financial institutions, and other interested parties on an annual fee basis. ConnectUS ConnectUS is an online service designed for use by companies paying with corporate purchasing cards. It is basically for – fee database, operated by Thomas Publishing Co. and General Electric Information Systems, allowing companies to search for suppliers anywhere in the world. The service may cut up to 90 percent of the transaction cost for the average ($150) purchase. ConnectUS also aids companies in overcoming the shortfalls of purchasing card programs, which are difficult to audit, sometimes resulting in vendor overpayment. ConnectUS provides all the necessary information that supports card purchasing and facilities trades done EDI. The service is now as part of www.geis.com and www.thomasregister.com systems. Summary 1. EC and Retailing: Retailing is expected to change with the rapid development of new online sales and distribution channels that literally can be used from anywhere, anytime-from work, school, a hotel, car, or airplane. These developments should impact retailing as much as the advent of strip malls, catalogue retailing, and TVbased home shopping.

162

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

2.

There are several models for e-retailing and these include Specialized e-store Generalized e-store E-mall Direct selling by the manufacturer Supplementary distribution channel E-broker E-services Internet Marketing: Internet marketing is the process of building and maintaining customer relation-ships through online activities to facilitate the exchange of ideas, products, and services that satisfy the goals of both parties. E-commerce Sales strategy: There are several major advantages to developing an e-commerce sales strategy: Efficiency, Convenience, Speed, Accuracy, Global Reach, Low Cost Entry, Up-to-date Status and Alerts. E-Services: The delivery of services via the internet to consumers or other businesses can be referred to by the generic term of e-services. There is a wide range of eservices currently offered through the internet and these include banking, loans, stock trading, jobs and career sites, travel, education, consultancy advice, insurance, real estate, broker services, on-line publishing, and on-line delivery of media content such as videos, computer games, etc We organize e-services into the following categories, namely Web-enabling services, Matchmaking services, Entertainment services, Specialized services such as auctions EC in Banking: The role of electronic commerce in banking is multifaceted impacted by changes in technology, rapid deregulation of many parts of finance, the emergence of new banking institutions, and basic economic restructuring. EC and On-line publishing: The Web may have blossomed because of peer-topeer publishing, but judging from recent product offerings, there is an enormous groundswell of interest among both commercial and corporate publishers in the Web.

NOTES

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

163

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

8.

B2B EC: In business-to-business electronic commerce businesses use the Internet to integrate the value- added chain, which can extend from the supplier of raw materials to the final consumer. Business for business dominates the total value of ecommerce activity, accounting for about 80 per cent at present.

Questions for review 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. How do you differentiate between traditional and E retailing? What are the benefits of E retailing for a customer? What are the benefits of E retailing for a business? Describe the several models of E-retailing? What is Internet Marketing? What are the E-Business issues? What is CRM? What are the critical success factors for internet marketing executives/? Discuss about the wide variety of E-Services? How do you find E-education to be better than the traditional one? What are the advantages of E-banking? What is On-line banking? Discuss the management issues in On-Line banking? Discuss about on-line publishing and its strategies What is B2B EC? List the characteristics of B2B EC. What is E-Marketplace in a B2B EC? Discuss B2B auctions and B2B services

164

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

UNIT III

NOTES

E-COMMERCE INFRASTRUCTURE
3.1 INTERNET 3.1.1 What is the Internet? The Internet is a worldwide, publicly accessible series of interconnected computer networks that transmit data by packet switching using the standard Internet Protocol (IP). It is a “network of networks” that consists of millions of smaller domestic, academic, business, and government networks, which together carry various information and services, such as electronic mail, online chat, file transfer, and the interlinked web pages and other resources of the World Wide Web (WWW). The Internet and the World Wide Web are not synonymous. The Internet is a collection of interconnected computer networks, linked by copper wires, fiber-optic cables, wireless connections, etc. In contrast, the Web is a collection of interconnected documents and other resources, linked by hyperlinks and URLs. The World Wide Web is one of the services accessible via the Internet, along with various others including e-mail, file sharing, online gaming and others described below. America Online, Comcast, Earthlink, etc. are examples of Internet service providers. They make it physically possible for you to send and access data from the Internet. They allow you to send and receive data to and from their computers or routers which are connected to the Internet. World Wide Web is an example of an information protocol/service that can be used to send and receive information over the Internet. It supports:  Multimedia Information (text, movies, pictures, sound, programs . . . ).
165 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

 

Hypertext Information (information that contains links to other information resources) Graphic User Interface (so users can point and click to request information instead of typing in text commands).

The server software for the World Wide Web is called an HTTP server (or informally a Web server). Examples are Apache and IIS. The client software for World Wide Web is called a Web browser. Examples are: Netscape, Internet Explorer, Safari, Firefox, and Mozilla. These examples are particular “brands” of software that have a similar function, just like Lotus 123 and Excel are both spreadsheet software packages. 3.1.2 Internet Structure The Internet is an international network of computers connected by wires such as telephone lines. Schools, businesses, government offices, and many homes use the Internet to communicate with one another. You have access to the Internet when you work in one of this university’s computer labs. You also may have access at home or in your residence hall. If not, you can obtain access once you have three things. First, you need a computer and a modem, a device that allows you to connect your computer with the Internet. Many new computers have built-in modems. Second, you need a browser, a piece of software that allows you to view information on the Internet. Many new computers also come with a browser, usually Internet Explorer. You also can download another popular browser, Netscape Navigator, from the Internet for free. Finally, you need to subscribe to an Internet Service Provider, or ISP, such as America Online or Carolina Online.  One popular component of the Internet is electronic mail, or e-mail, which people at separate locations can use to send messages to one another. In general, each of these people has an e-mail address, which usually looks so mething like this: [email protected]. The first part of the address (.mark.canada) specifies the individual user, and the rest of the address refers to the server (uncp.edu), which is a computer that can store a lot of information. In addition to allowing people to send e-mail messages to one another, the Internet also allows organizations and individuals to post information about themselves so that others can see it. For example, many companies post pictures and descriptions on World
166 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Wide Web sites.  In fact, you can set up your own World Wide Web site by reserving space on a server. To understand how this process works, imagine that you wanted to store some articles you have written at a library so that people could come and read them. First, you would need to obtain permission from the librarians, who would assign you a folder where they would store your articles. Whenever you finished a new article, you would put a name on it and send it to the librarians, who would then place it in your folder. When people wanted to read one of these articles, they would need to know the address of the library, the name of your folder, and the name of the specific article they want to read.  When they supplied this information, the librarian would give them the article they want.  The World Wide Web works the same way. First you need to identify an Internet company (librarian) and ask permission to save Web pages (articles) on its server (library). The company (librarian) then assigns you a directory (folder) where it will store your Web pages (articles). As you create each Web page (article), you give it a filename (name) and publish it on the server (send it to the library). When people want to read your Web page (article), they need your Web address, sometimes called a Uniform Resource Locator, or URL.  The URL consists of the domain name of the server (address of the library), name of your directory (name of your folder), and the filename of the particular Web page (name of article). 3.1.3 The Internet and its Characteristics The Internet by the late 1990s has evolved into a complex environment. Originally a military communication’s network it is now routinely used for five types of operations: (i) long-distance transactions (e.g. e-commerce, form-filling, remote work, entertainment); (ii) interpersonal communication; (iii) data storage; (iv) research (i.e. data finding); (v) remote data access and downloading. The Internet is a dynamic and mercurial system endowed with a number of traits. These are: 1. Technological neutrality. The Internet joins together computers of various sizes and architectures. They may run on various operating systems and utilise a great variety of communication links.

NOTES

167

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

2.

3.

4.

5.

Built-in piecemeal change and evolution. The Internet is not a one-off development. It is an energetic, polycentric, complex, growing, and self-refining system. It is a network which is geared to expansion and growth. It is a system which scales up extremely well. Robustness and reliability. All basic technical features of the Net such as the TCP/IP (transfer control protocol/internet protocol) (Kessler and Shepard 1997), the multiplicity of routes followed by the packet-switched data, and the sturdiness of related software are designed to eliminate errors, to handle unexpected interruptions and interferences, to advise users of encountered difficulties and to recover gracefully from any disasters and down-times. Low cost. The Internet makes new uses of old technologies (standalone computers, operating systems, telecommunication networks). Whenever possible, Internet operations piggyback on already existing solutions. They rely on modularised, configurable, easy-to-replace, and easy-to-upgrade off-the-shelf software and hardware. Ubiquity. The robustness, modularisation and low cost of the system is coupled with the growing densities of dedicated computer lines, network backbones, as well as wired and wireless phone networks. This means that Internet-enabled tools are deployed in ever growing numbers in an ever widening range of environments

3.1.4 The Internet Tools and their Characteristics The evolution of the Internet is punctuated by the introduction and mass acceptance of such key resources and tools as Unix, Email, Usenet newsgroups, Telnet, Listserv Mailing List Software, File Transfer Protocol, Internet Relay Chat, WAIS, Gopher, WWW, and more recently by the Altavista search engine, Java language UNIX The foundations of an operating system called Unix were laid at AT&T Bell Laboratories in 1969. Unix is not a product of Internet culture. It is its catalyst and cornerstone. Internet culture owes Unix a major debt in the four areas. These conceptual and procedural debts are: multitasking, community fostering, openness and extensibility, and public access to the source code. Let’s briefly look at each of these debts.

168

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Unix was one of the first operating systems which embodied the principle of multitasking (time-sharing). In most general terms it means that several users could simultaneously operate within a single environment and that the system as a whole coped well with this complicated situation. Unix was the first operating system which demonstrated in practical terms robustness and tolerance for the variety of it’s users simultaneous activities. Email Email is the first of the Internet’s tools dedicated to the provision of fast, simple and global communication between people. This revolutionary client/server software implied for the first time that individuals (both as persons and roles) could have their unique electronic addresses. Within this framework messages were now able to chase their individual recipients anywhere in the world. The initial format of email communication was that of a one-to-one exchange of electronic messages. This simple function was subsequently augmented by email’s ability to handle various attachments, such as documents with complex formatting, numbers and graphic files. Later, with the use of multi-recipient mailing lists electronic mail could be used for simple multicasting of messages in the form of one-to-many transmissions. Usenet Newsgroups Usenet (Unix Users Network), the wide-area array of sites collating and swapping UUCP-based messages was pioneered in 1979. Usenet was originally conceived as a surrogate for the Internet (then called ARPANET). It was to be used by people who did not have ready access to the TCP/IP protocol and yet wanted to discuss their various Unix tools. It was only in 1987 that the NNTP (Network News Transfer Protocol) was established in order to enable Usenet to be carried on the Internet (i.e. TCP/IP) networks (Laursen 1997).

NOTES

169

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Telnet The networking tool called Telnet was invented in 1980 (Postel 1980). It allowed people (with adequate access rights) to login remotely into any networked computer in the world and to employ the usual gamut of computer commands. Thereby files and directories could be established, renamed and deleted; electronic mail read and dispatched; Usenet flame wars indulged in; and statistical packages run against numeric data - all at a distance. Moreover, results of all these and other operations could be remotely directed to a printer or via FTP to another networked computer. In short, Telnet gave us the ability to engage in long distance man-machine transactions, that is, ability to do the work as telecommuters. File Transfer Protocol The FTP client/server technology was first introduced in 1985 (Barnes 1997). Its usefulness to Internet culture is three-fold. Firstly, the FTP was a first widely-accepted tool for systematic permanent storage and world-wide transmission of substantial electronic information (e.g. programs, text files, image files). Secondly, FTP archives promoted the use of anonymous login (i.e. limited public access) techniques as a way of coping with the mounting general requests for access to the archived information. That novel technique placed electronic visitors in a strictly circumscribed work environment. There they could browse through data subdirectories, copy relevant files, as well as deposit (within the context of a dedicated area) new digital material. However, the FTP software would not let them wander across other parts of the host, nor did the visitors have the right to change any component part of the accessed electronic archive. Thirdly, the rapid proliferation in the number of public access FTP archives all over the world necessitated techniques for keeping an authoritative, up-to-date catalogue of their contents. This was accomplished through the Archie database (Deutsch et al. 1995) and its many mirrors. Archie used an automated process which periodically scanned the entire contents of all known “anonymous FTP” sites and report findings back to its central database. This approach, albeit encumbered by the need to give explicit instructions as to which of the FTP systems need to be monitored, nevertheless integrated a motley collection of online resources into a single, cohesive, distributed information system.

170

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

3.1.5 Web based Client/Server Gopher Gopher client/server software was used for the first time in 1991 (La Tour nd; Liu, C. et al. 1994). It was a ground-breaking development on two accounts. Firstly, it acted as a predictable, unified environment for handling an array of other electronic tools, such as Telnet, FTP and WAIS. Secondly, Gopher acted as electronic glue which seamlessly linked together archipelagos of information tracked by and referenced by other gopher systems. In short, Gopher was the first ever tool capable of the creation and mapping of a rich, large-scale, and infinitely extendable information space. World Wide Web Server The first prototype of the WWW server was built in 1991 (Cailliau 1995, BernersLee, nd; Berners-Lee 1998). The WWW server is an invention which has redefined the way the Internet is visualized by its users. Firstly, the WWW server introduced to the Internet the powerful point-and-click hypertext capabilities. The hypertext notions of a home page and links spanning the entire body of data was first successfully employed on a small, standalone scale in 1986 in the Macintosh software called Hypercard (Goodman 1987). The WWW however, was the first hypertext technology applied to distributed online information. This invention was previously theoretically anticipated by a number of writers, including in the 1945 by Vannevar Bush of the Memex fame, and again in the 1965 by Theodor Nelson who embarked on the never-completed Project Xanadu (Nielsen 1995, Gilster 1997:267). Hypertext itself is not an new idea. It is already implicitly present (albeit in an imperfect because a paperbased form) in the first alphabetically ordered dictionaries such as Grand dictionnaire historique, compiled in 1674 by Louis Moreriego; or John Harris’ Lexicon Technicum which was published in 1704 (PWN 1964). It is also evident in the apparatus, such as footnotes, commentaries, appendices and references, of a 19th century scholarly monograph. The hypertext principle as employed by the WWW server meant that any part of any text (and subsequently, image) document could act as a portal leading directly to any other nominated segment of any other document anywhere in the world.
171

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Secondly, the WWW server introduced an explicit address for subsets of information. Common and simple addressing methodology (Universal Resource Locater [URL] scheme) enabled users to uniquely identify AND access any piece of networked information anywhere in the document, or anywhere on one’s computer, or - with the same ease - anywhere in the world. Thirdly, the WWW provided a common, simple, effective and extendable language for document markup. The HTML language could be used in three different yet complementary ways: (a) as a tool for establishing the logical structure of a document; (b) as a tool for shaping the size, appearance and layout of lines of text on the page; (c) as a tool for building the internal (i.e. within the same document) and external (to a different document residing on the same or totally different server) hypertext connections. The interlocking features of the hypertext, URLs and the markup language, have laid foundations for today’s global, blindingly fast and infinitely complex cyberspace. Moreover, the World Wide Web, like gopher before it, was also a powerful electronic glue which smoothly integrated not only most of the existing Internet tools (Email, Usenet, Telnet, Listservs FTP, IRC, and Gopher (but, surprisingly, not WAIS), but also the whole body of online information which could accessed by all those tools. However, the revolutionary strengths of the Web have not been immediately obvious to the most of the Internet community, who initially regarded the WWW as a mere (and possibly clumsy) variant of the then popular Gopher technology. This situation has changed only with the introduction of PC-based Web browsers with user-friendly, graphics-interfaces. World Wide Web Browsers The principle of a client/server division of labour was put to work yet again in the form of a series of WWW browsers such as Mosaic (built in 1993), Lynx (which is an ASCII, Telnet-based client software), Erwise, Viola, Cello, as well as, since 1994, several editions of Netscape and Explorer Each of the Web browsers, except for Lynx, which constitutes a deliberately simplified and thus very fast software, provided Internauts with series of novel capabilities. These are: (a) an ability to handle multi-format, or multimedia (numbers, text, images, animations, video, sound) data within the framework of a single online document; (b) the
172 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

ability to configure and modify the appearance of received information in a manner which best suits the preferences of the reader; (c) the ability to use the browser as a WYSIWYG (“what you see is what you get”) tool for crafting and proofreading of the locally created HTML pages on a user’s PC; (d) ability to acquire, save and display the full HTML source code for any and all of the published web documents. 3.1.6 Elements of Internet Architecture     Protocol Layering Networks Routers Addressing Architecture

NOTES

Protocol Layering To communicate using the Internet system, a host must implement the layered set of protocols comprising the Internet protocol suite. A host typically must implement at least one protocol from each layer. The protocol layers used in the Internet architecture are as follows Application Layer The Application Layer is the top layer of the Internet protocol suite. The Internet suite does not further subdivide the Application Layer, although some application layer protocols do contain some internal sub-layering. The application layer of the Internet suite essentially combines the functions of the top two layers - Presentation and Application - of the OSI Reference Model [ARCH:8]. The Application Layer in the Internet protocol suite also includes some of the function relegated to the Session Layer in the OSI Reference Model. We distinguish two categories of application layer protocols: user protocols that provide service directly to users, and support protocols that provide common system functions. The most common Internet user protocols are:

173

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

  

Telnet (remote login) FTP (file transfer) SMTP (electronic mail delivery)

There are a number of other standardized user protocols and many private user protocols. Support protocols, used for host name mapping, booting, and management include SNMP, BOOTP, TFTP, the Domain Name System (DNS) protocol, and a variety of routing protocols. Transport Layer The Transport Layer provides end-to-end communication services. This layer is roughly equivalent to the Transport Layer in the OSI Reference Model, except that it also incorporates some of OSI’s Session Layer establishment and destruction functions. There are two primary Transport Layer protocols at present:   Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

TCP is a reliable connection-oriented transport service that provides end-to-end reliability, resequencing, and flow control. UDP is a connectionless (datagram) transport service. Other transport protocols have been developed by the research community, and the set of official Internet transport protocols may be expanded in the future. Internet Layer All Internet transport protocols use the Internet Protocol (IP) to carry data from source host to destination host. IP is a connectionless or datagram internetwork service, providing no end-to-end delivery guarantees. IP datagrams may arrive at the destination host damaged, duplicated, out of order, or not at all. The layers above IP are responsible for reliable delivery service when it is required. The IP protocol includes provision for addressing, type-of-service specification, fragmentation and reassembly, and security.

174

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The datagram or connectionless nature of IP is a fundamental and characteristic feature of the Internet architecture. The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a control protocol that is considered to be an integral part of IP, although it is architecturally layered upon IP - it uses IP to carry its data end-to-end. ICMP provides error reporting, congestion reporting, and first-hop router redirection. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is an Internet layer protocol used for establishing dynamic host groups for IP multicasting. Link Layer To communicate on a directly connected network, a host must implement the communication protocol used to interface to that network. We call this a Link Layer protocol. Some older Internet documents refer to this layer as the Network Layer, but it is not the same as the Network Layer in the OSI Reference Model. This layer contains everything below the Internet Layer and above the Physical Layer (which is the media connectivity, normally electrical or optical, which encodes and transports messages). Its responsibility is the correct delivery of messages, among which it does not differentiate. Protocols in this Layer are generally outside the scope of Internet standardization; the Internet (intentionally) uses existing standards whenever possible. Thus, Internet Link Layer standards usually address only address resolution and rules for transmitting IP packets over specific Link Layer protocols.

NOTES

175

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Networks The constituent networks of the Internet system are required to provide only packet (connectionless) transport. According to the IP service specification, datagrams can be delivered out of order, be lost or duplicated, and/or contain errors. For reasonable performance of the protocols that use IP (e.g., TCP), the loss rate of the network should be very low. In networks providing connection-oriented service, the extra reliability provided by virtual circuits enhances the end-end robustness of the system, but is not necessary for Internet operation. Constituent networks may generally be divided into two classes:  Local-Area Networks (LANs) LANs may have a variety of designs. LANs normally cover a small geographical area (e.g., a single building or plant site) and provide high bandwidth with low delays. LANs may be passive (similar to Ethernet) or they may be active (such as ATM). Wide-Area Networks (WANs) Geographically dispersed hosts and LANs are interconnected by wide-area networks, also called long-haul networks. These networks may have a complex internal structure of lines and packetswitches, or they may be as simple as point-to-point lines.



Routers In the Internet model, constituent networks are connected together by IP datagram forwarders which are called routers or IP routers. In this document, every use of the term router is equivalent to IP router. Many older Internet documents refer to routers as gateways. Historically, routers have been realized with packet-switching software executing on a general-purpose CPU. However, as custom hardware development becomes cheaper and as higher throughput is required, special purpose hardware is becoming increasingly common. This specification applies to routers regardless of how they are implemented. A router connects to two or more logical interfaces, represented by IP subnets or unnumbered point to point lines . Thus, it has at least one physical interface. Forwarding an IP datagram generally requires the router to choose the address and relevant interface of
176 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

the next-hop router or (for the final hop) the destination host. This choice, called relaying or forwarding depends upon a route database within the router. The route database is also called a routing table or forwarding table. The term “router” derives from the process of building this route database; routing protocols and configuration interact in a process called routing. The routing database should be maintained dynamically to reflect the current topology of the Internet system. A router normally accomplishes this by participating in distributed routing and reachability algorithms with other routers. Routers provide datagram transport only, and they seek to minimize the state information necessary to sustain this service in the interest of routing flexibility and robustness. Packet switching devices may also operate at the Link Layer; such devices are usually called bridges. Network segments that are connected by bridges share the same IP network prefix forming a single IP subnet. These other devices are outside the scope of this document. 3.1.7 Common uses of the Internet E-mail The concept of sending electronic text messages between parties in a way analogous to mailing letters or memos predates the creation of the Internet. Even today it can be important to distinguish between Internet and internal e-mail systems. Internet e-mail may travel and be stored unencrypted on many other networks and machines out of both the sender’s and the recipient’s control. During this time it is quite possible for the content to be read and even tampered with by third parties, if anyone considers it important enough. Purely internal or intranet mail systems, where the information never leaves the corporate or organization’s network, are much more secure, although in any organization there will be IT and other personnel whose job may involve monitoring, and occasionally accessing, the e-mail of other employees not addressed to them. The World Wide Web Many people use the terms Internet and World Wide Web (or just the Web) interchangeably, but, as discussed above, the two terms are not synonymous.
177

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

The World Wide Web is a huge set of interlinked documents, images and other resources, linked by hyperlinks and URLs. These hyperlinks and URLs allow the web servers and other machines that store originals, and cached copies, of these resources to deliver them as required using HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol). HTTP is only one of the communication protocols used on the Internet. Web services also use HTTP to allow software systems to communicate in order to share and exchange business logic and data. Software products that can access the resources of the Web are correctly termed user agents. In normal use, web browsers, such as Internet Explorer and Firefox, access web pages and allow users to navigate from one to another via hyperlinks. Web documents may contain almost any combination of computer data including photographs, graphics, sounds, text, video, multimedia and interactive content including games, office applications and scientific demonstrations.

Through keyword-driven Internet research using search engines like Yahoo! and Google, millions of people worldwide have easy, instant access to a vast and diverse amount of online information. Compared to encyclopedias and traditional libraries, the World Wide Web has enabled a sudden and extreme decentralization of information and data. It is also easier, using the Web, than ever before for individuals and organizations to publish ideas and information to an extremely large audience. Anyone can find ways to publish a web page or build a website for very little initial cost. Publishing and maintaining large, professional websites full of attractive, diverse and up-to-date information is still a difficult and expensive proposition, however. Many individuals and some companies and groups use “web logs” or blogs, which are largely used as easily updatable online diaries. Some commercial organizations encourage staff to fill them with advice on their areas of specialization in the hope that visitors will be impressed by the expert knowledge and free information, and be attracted to the corporation as a result. One example of this practice is Microsoft, whose product developers publish their personal blogs in order to pique the public’s interest in their work. Collections of personal web pages published by large service providers remain popular, and have become increasingly sophisticated. Whereas operations such as Angelfire
178 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

and GeoCities have existed since the early days of the Web, newer offerings from, for example, Facebook and MySpace currently have large followings. These operations often brand themselves as social network services rather than simply as web page hosts. Advertising on popular web pages can be lucrative, and e-commerce or the sale of products and services directly via the Web continues to grow. In the early days, web pages were usually created as sets of complete and isolated HTML text files stored on a web server. More recently, websites are more often created using content management system (CMS) or wiki software with, initially, very little content. Contributors to these systems, who may be paid staff, members of a club or other organization or members of the public, fill underlying databases with content using editing pages designed for that purpose, while casual visitors view and read this content in its final HTML form. There may or may not be editorial, approval and security systems built into the process of taking newly entered content and making it available to the target visitors. Remote access The Internet allows computer users to connect to other computers and information stores easily, wherever they may be across the world. They may do this with or without the use of security, authentication and encryption technologies, depending on the requirements. This is encouraging new ways of working from home, collaboration and information sharing in many industries. An accountant sitting at home can audit the books of a company based in another country, on a server situated in a third country that is remotely maintained by IT specialists in a fourth. These accounts could have been created by home-working bookkeepers, in other remote locations, based on information e-mailed to them from offices all over the world. Some of these things were possible before the widespread use of the Internet, but the cost of private leased lines would have made many of them infeasible in practice. An office worker away from his desk, perhaps on the other side of the world on a business trip or a holiday, can open a remote desktop session into his normal office PC using a secure Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection via the Internet. This gives the worker complete access to all of his or her normal files and data, including e-mail and other applications, while away from the office.
179

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

This concept is also referred to by some network security people as the Virtual Private Nightmare, because it extends the secure perimeter of a corporate network into its employees’ homes; this has been the source of some notable security breaches, but also provides security for the workers. Collaboration The low cost and nearly instantaneous sharing of ideas, knowledge, and skills has made collaborative work dramatically easier. Not only can a group cheaply communicate and test, but the wide reach of the Internet allows such groups to easily form in the first place, even among niche interests. An example of this is the free software movement in software development, which produced GNU and Linux from scratch and has taken over development of Mozilla and OpenOffice.org (formerly known as Netscape Communicator and StarOffice). Films such as Zeitgeist, Loose Change and Endgame have had extensive coverage on the Internet, while being virtually ignored in the mainstream media. Internet “chat”, whether in the form of IRC “chat rooms” or channels, or via instant messaging systems, allow colleagues to stay in touch in a very convenient way when working at their computers during the day. Messages can be sent and viewed even more quickly and conveniently than via e-mail. Extension to these systems may allow files to be exchanged, “whiteboard” drawings to be shared as well as voice and video contact between team members. Version control systems allow collaborating teams to work on shared sets of documents without either accidentally overwriting each other’s work or having members wait until they get “sent” documents to be able to add their thoughts and changes. File sharing A computer file can be e-mailed to customers, colleagues and friends as an attachment. It can be uploaded to a website or FTP server for easy download by others. It can be put into a “shared location” or onto a file server for instant use by colleagues. The load of bulk downloads to many users can be eased by the use of “mirror” servers or peer-to-peer networks.

180

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

In any of these cases, access to the file may be controlled by user authentication; the transit of the file over the Internet may be obscured by encryption, and money may change hands before or after access to the file is given. The price can be paid by the remote charging of funds from, for example, a credit card whose details are also passed— hopefully fully encrypted—across the Internet. The origin and authenticity of the file received may be checked by digital signatures or by MD5 or other message digests. These simple features of the Internet, over a worldwide basis, are changing the basis for the production, sale, and distribution of anything that can be reduced to a computer file for transmission. This includes all manner of print publications, software products, news, music, film, video, photography, graphics and the other arts. This in turn has caused seismic shifts in each of the existing industries that previously controlled the production and distribution of these products. Internet collaboration technology enables business and project teams to share documents, calendars and other information. Such collaboration occurs in a wide variety of areas including scientific research, software development, conference planning, political activism and creative writing. Streaming media Many existing radio and television broadcasters provide Internet “feeds” of their live audio and video streams (for example, the BBC). They may also allow time-shift viewing or listening such as Preview, Classic Clips and Listen Again features. These providers have been joined by a range of pure Internet “broadcasters” who never had on-air licenses. This means that an Internet-connected device, such as a computer or something more specific, can be used to access on-line media in much the same way as was previously possible only with a television or radio receiver. The range of material is much wider, from pornography to highly specialized, technical web casts. Pod casting is a variation on this theme, where—usually audio—material is first downloaded in full and then may be played back on a computer or shifted to a digital audio player to be listened to on the move. These techniques using simple equipment allow anybody, with little censorship or licensing control, to broadcast audio-visual material on a worldwide basis. Webcams can be seen as an even lower-budget extension of this phenomenon. While some webcams can give full-frame-rate video, the picture is usually either small or

NOTES

181

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

updates slowly. Internet users can watch animals around an African waterhole, ships in the Panama Canal, the traffic at a local roundabout or their own premises, live and in real time. Video chat rooms, video conferencing, and remote controllable webcams are also popular. Many uses can be found for personal webcams in and around the home, with and without two-way sound. You Tube, sometimes described as an Internet phenomenon because of the vast amount of users and how rapidly the site’s popularity has grown, was founded on February 15, 2005. It is now the leading website for free streaming video. It uses a flash-based web player which streams video files in the format FLV. Users are able to watch videos without signing up; however, if users do sign up they are able to upload an unlimited amount of videos and they are given their own personal profile. It is currently estimated that there are 64,000,000 videos on YouTube, and it is also currently estimated that 825,000 new videos are uploaded every day. Voice telephony (VoIP) VoIP stands for Voice over IP, where IP refers to the Internet Protocol that underlies all Internet communication. This phenomenon began as an optional two-way voice extension to some of the instant messaging systems that took off around the year 2000. In recent years many VoIP systems have become as easy to use and as convenient as a normal telephone. The benefit is that, as the Internet carries the actual voice traffic, VoIP can be free or cost much less than a normal telephone call, especially over long distances and especially for those with always-on Internet connections such as cable or ADSL. Thus, VoIP is maturing into a viable alternative to traditional telephones. Interoperability between different providers has improved and the ability to call or receive a call from a traditional telephone is available. Simple, inexpensive VoIP modems are now available that eliminate the need for a PC. Voice quality can still vary from call to call but is often equal to and can even exceed that of traditional calls. Remaining problems for VoIP include emergency telephone number dialling and reliability. Currently, a few VoIP providers provide an emergency service, but it is not universally available. Traditional phones are line-powered and operate during a power failure; VoIP does not do so without a backup power source for the electronics.
182 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Most VoIP providers offer unlimited national calling, but the direction in VoIP is clearly toward global coverage with unlimited minutes for a low monthly fee. VoIP has also become increasingly popular within the gaming world, as a form of communication between players. Popular gaming VoIP clients include Ventrilo and Teamspeak, and there are others available also. The PlayStation 3 and Xbox 360 also offer VoIP chat features. Internet access Common methods of home access include dial-up, landline broadband (over coaxial cable, fiber optic or copper wires), Wi-Fi, satellite and 3G technology cell phones. Public places to use the Internet include libraries and Internet cafes, where computers with Internet connections are available. There are also Internet access points in many public places such as airport halls and coffee shops, in some cases just for brief use while standing. Various terms are used, such as “public Internet kiosk”, “public access terminal”, and “Web payphone”. Many hotels now also have public terminals, though these are usually fee-based. These terminals are widely accessed for various usage like ticket booking, bank deposit, online payment etc. Wi-Fi provides wireless access to computer networks, and therefore can do so to the Internet itself. Hotspots providing such access include WiFi cafes, where would-be users need to bring their own wireless-enabled devices such as a laptop or PDA. These services may be free to all, free to customers only, or fee-based. A hotspot need not be limited to a confined location. A whole campus or park, or even an entire city can be enabled. Grassroots efforts have led to wireless community networks. Commercial Wi-Fi services covering large city areas are in place in London, Vienna, Toronto, San Francisco, Philadelphia, Chicago and Pittsburgh. The Internet can then be accessed from such places as a park bench. Apart from Wi-Fi, there have been experiments with proprietary mobile wireless networks like Ricochet, various high-speed data services over cellular phone networks, and fixed wireless services. High-end mobile phones such as smartphones generally come with Internet access through the phone network. Web browsers such as Opera are available on these advanced
183

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

handsets, which can also run a wide variety of other Internet software. More mobile phones have Internet access than PCs, though this is not as widely used. An Internet access provider and protocol matrix differentiates the methods used to get online. 3.1.8 Marketing The Internet has also become a large market for companies; some of the biggest companies today have grown by taking advantage of the efficient nature of low-cost advertising and commerce through the Internet, also known as e-commerce. It is the fastest way to spread information to a vast number of people simultaneously. The Internet has also subsequently revolutionized shopping—for example; a person can order a CD online and receive it in the mail within a couple of days, or download it directly in some cases. The Internet has also greatly facilitated personalized marketing which allows a company to market a product to a specific person or a specific group of people more so than any other advertising medium. Examples of personalized marketing include online communities such as MySpace, Friendster, Orkut, Facebook and others which thousands of Internet users join to advertise themselves and make friends online. Many of these users are young teens and adolescents ranging from 13 to 25 years old. In turn, when they advertise themselves they advertise interests and hobbies, which online marketing companies can use as information as to what those users will purchase online, and advertise their own companies’ products to those users. 3.1.9 Online Internet Business Models The outward signs of a robust and thriving business are:      Revenue increases Ability to generate profits Success in creating meaningful alliances Success in expanding into new markets Differentiating itself from other business models

184

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

What are the key areas that a profitable web site needs to concentrate on?          Develop a unique e-business website Control the product line Introduce new products on a regular basis Ensure easy and reliable credit-card payment methods Provide customer-friendly policies On-time delivery Keep promises Develop a clever marketing strategy Be the best in your field

NOTES

Existing business models are of many kinds:       Advertising - banner and direct marketing Subscription sites Customer services Directory services Content providers Product sales

Most successful companies pursue several related but different models concurrently. They defy easy categorization by diversifying revenue streams and becoming hybrids in a cost-efficient way. Let’s take a look at some of the top e-businesses in the field today:        E-Bay HomeStore.com Oracle CISCO Amazon.com DoubleClick.com YAHOO!

185

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

EBAY A company that has emerged unscathed from the recent dot-com bust with profits soaring to almost 400% and revenues doubling in the past one year. It has transformed auctions that were limited to garage sales and flea markets into highly evolved emarketplaces. Selling just about anything, from antiques and jewelry to computers, automobiles and even auto insurance, it has 29.7 million registered users today. Adopting an amazing and unique culture, where buyers and sellers of all items are allowed to post their comments online, where credit-card payment facilities are secure and easy, the company projects a trustworthy and reliable image. Apart from bidding, certain high quality goods can be sold at prices fixed by the seller. This site also offers professional services for all kinds of business needs. A widespread global reach makes its easy for a buyer in Hong Kong to bid and buy a product from a seller in Paris while the regional sites in North America are able to offer hard-to-ship merchandise. Person-to-person trading and a barter economy have established the company on a secure B2B and B2C platform. Other companies like Yahoo! and Excite have been quick to catch on and incorporate auctions into their sites. Priceline.com, a site that offers airline tickets on discount has begun experimenting quite successfully with this business model. To summarize, their business model can be elucidated thus:        Automation of traditional methods of selling unique items Reliability in mode of payments Customer friendly company Professional services in addition to just plain selling of goods Global reach Regional diversification Successful advertising

186

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

HOMESTORE.COM Statistics have revealed that realty sites account for about 9.6% of all online visitors. Homestore.com is a company that has dominated the real estate field with 3.28 million customers in January 2001 and is listed among the Fortune top e-50. It registered a growth of 252% at one stage. Homestore.com’s internet business model allows prospective buyers to review properties before buying. Is that all? No, they also offer financial advice, online loans, and buyer’s guides to homes and household items, home improvement tips, remodeling, and safety and security aspects. Useful advice when moving home and tips on resettling has ensured user satisfaction to the core. Their main revenue came in from subscriptions (52%) and the remaining from advertising. As a subscription site they picked a specific topic which a segment of the population would be passionate about and marketed their services through strategic advertising. Subscription sites that allow users access to a regularly updated online database of any kind for a fee are fast evolving into healthy and strong e-businesses. ORACLE This software and service provider entered the digitized world only in 1998, and metamorphosed into a digital pioneer in the span of two years. Innovative products and services and integration of these services have brought them into the forefront of web innovation today. Internet business models like the Biz Online Initiative that deliver simple and complete online services and a host of other tools that customers require in setting up an e-business model, have made them a one stop shop for e-businesses today. Their built-in self-service system for customers, employees and suppliers improved productivity and accuracy and brought down costs by 100’s of millions of dollars. Consulting services with major firms like Sun Professional Systems have established their reliability with customers.

NOTES

187

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Their business formula:      Innovative products and packages Integration of internal processes Exemplary customer service - a user friendly web site that connects customers easily Fast online e-business services Expert consultancy service

Another company using a similar business model is Exodus Communications, an Internet data center that offers a range of web hosting services, bandwidth on demand, security monitoring. Their servers host leading web sites like Yahoo!, e-Bay and Merril Lynch. They allow these firms to deliver content and applications online round the clock without fail. 35% of their revenue comes from a very successful e-business consulting firm whom they have partnered with (Sapient). They are expanding from 19 data centers to 34 data centers this year. CISCO Cisco develops switches and routers for Local Area Networks (LAN) and Wireless Area Networks (WAN) and the related software. They have become the worldwide leaders in networking for the Internet today. 90% of their sales are conducted over the Internet. They offer expertise in planning and executing Internet enabled solutions. The company has grown in the past 7 years with 71 acquisitions to its credit, the latest being its investments in an optical equipment company and speech recognition software makers. Their business model could be termed an acquisition one! AMAZON.COM The customer is King here! Amazon pampers their customers, tracks their tastes and uses this information to create a unique customer experience. This e-tailer cultivates relationships that lead to customers liking and trusting them. This kind of service surpasses the most brilliant technology in use today. Amazon brought in the world of successful oneto-one marketing, a personal touch from another era.

188

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Recently though, they have suffered heavy losses, proving that any successful ebusiness strategy will survive provided it is based on a solid brick and mortar foundation, a la Barnes and Noble, another famous online bookseller. Although barnesandnoble.com and Barnes the Noble Ltd. are run separately, a customer tends to associate trust and comfort in a known and established brand. To summarize, exemplary customer service, successful online advertising and special discounted offers made Amazon and books synonymous terms today. DOUBLECLICK.COM This Fortune e-50 company offers a collection of premium sites for custom adbuys and sponsorships in various fields - Business, automobiles, entertainment, technology, travel and health. They help markets build brands, increase sales, maximize revenue and build one-to-one relationships with their customers. They offer agencies plans to manage online campaigns. Their direct marketing strategies use customer data to refine marketing messages and increase investment returns. One of their divisions, Abacus is one of the largest databases of buyer behavior in about 90 million households in the United States itself. Another division, www.diameter.net conducts online research to evaluate and understand online campaigns and strategies. Some of their clients include www.macromedia.com, www.nasdaq.com, www.networldsolutions.com and www.palm.net. The web has proven to be an amazing vehicle for advertising and reaching millions without spending a dime on postage and printing. Stu Heinecke Services, an advertising solutions company used personalized cartoon direct mail and achieved response rates as high as 100%. Online ads possess tremendous communication powers. Banner ads placed on sites like CNN, Lycos, CompuServe, Pathfinder and The New York Times showed that:      appropriate placement of the ad on specific targeted sites, using a search component or a woman’s face in a banner ad, using odd-shaped attention grabbing banners, including trading links with other sites, and hosting online chat are a sure fire way to get a response. Online advertising is international advertising that gets a 24X7 exposure for much lesser costs.
189

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

YAHOO! The “operating system” of the net and a site for evolving search engines, free news and information services, online ads, banner ads, sports and news, video and audio, clubs and auction stores has become the most popular directory in the web. The value of this successful business model lies in its unique and easy categorization of all pages and subjects - a completely professional looking web site in all. But, a BPI (Buying Power Index) report reveals that more online buying and popularity of a site don’t go hand in hand. Other search engines like Altavista, Excite and Juno seem to have raked in more profits recently. Online advertising was the main revenue for Yahoo!, but they didn’t really check on what kind of ads worked online. Immediate success stopped them from evolving and developing other important aspects of e-business. As a result, this year they have been forced to cut budgets and ads, showing that generalized media doesn’t work compared to specialized media. Also, all of Yahoo’s content is owned by other sites and only licensed for their use. Among the other successful dot-coms, trends revealed that online e-brokers offer the best economic models among consumer-centered Internet companies. Instead of spending on physical infrastructure they concentrated in increasing the volume of transactions. 1-800Flowers.com blended telephone and Internet technologies, Reflect.com, a beauty customization site outlasted other higher profile e-tailers in the business, thus proving that the basic B2C business model is valid. Smart thinking, brilliant business plans, great and innovative promotional ideas are an integral part of any e-success. There is no doubt that in the near future, an average person anywhere in the world will surf the Internet more often than he or she watches television or uses the telephone. As a result, it makes sense for entrepreneurs of all kinds to come up with ideas of generating income by marketing their products or services to these surfers. Competition in cyberspace may become even fiercer in the future and therefore the right business plan is what will eventually ensure long-term success.

190

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

3.2 INTRANET 3.2.1What is an Intranet? The Internet has captured world attention in recent years. In reality, growth of internal networks based on Internet technologies known as the Intranet is outpacing the growth of the global Internet itself. An Intranet is a company-specific network that uses software programs based on the Internet TCP/IP protocol and common Internet user interfaces such as the web browser. Simply put, an Intranet is the application of Internet technologies within an organization private LAN or WAN network. The Intranet environment is completely owned by the enterprise and is generally not accessible from the Internet at large. Today, many Intranets are built around Web servers delivering HTML pages.

NOTES

An Intranet is a company-wide network that is based on Internet technologies. 3.2.2 TCP/IP protocol suite The TCP/IP protocol suite includes the Transport Control Protocol, the Internet Protocol and other protocols. The protocol suite manages all the information that moves
191 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

across the Intranet and Internet and each protocol transferring data across the network uses a different format. These protocols work together to transfer information across the network. Table 3.2.2.a summaries the common TCP/IP protocols. Commonly used TCP/IP protocols

TCP/IP exists as an open standard, anyone can use and develop new applications on top of TCP/IP. It can manage almost all the network tasks on the Intranet and Internet and is also the only protocol required to ensure that the computer systems and communications and networking software are interoperable. 3.2.3 The benefits of Intranets Cross-platform Many corporate computing environments use different computing platforms. The capability to exchange information across platforms is crucial. The Intranet enables companies to unify communication within a multi-platform environment. Hence, companies can mix and match platforms as needed with no adverse effect on the overall environment. Within an Intranet, universal browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet Explorer enable the users to perform the following tasks independent of the platforms used:
192 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

1 2 3 4

create, view and revise documents, participate in discussions and news groups interact with multimedia presentation gain access to the Internet

NOTES

Breaking down the barriers Intranets dissolve the barriers of communication that are created by department walls, geographical location and decentralized resources. Intranets create global accessibility by bringing together individuals and resources from a distributed environment. Employees, customers and vendors are able to access information stored in multiple locations simultaneously. Reducing distribution cost By combining computing and communication in the same system, Intranets reduce distribution costs by eliminating the traditional paper-based internal corporate communication media, such as printed pages, pamphlets, booklets and flyers. Instead, they are published electronically on the company’s Intranet, saving the resources needed to print, distribute and update them. Putting manuals on-line is an example of how a company can reduce paper consumption and hence costs. Most companies have found that hundreds of paper-based applications can be eliminated using Intranets. Immediate delivery Information delivered using an Intranet becomes available almost instantaneously throughout the entire organization. With HTML form-support, users may even fill out forms, post sign-up sheets and schedules on the Intranet. Information can move much more quickly and effectively by removing the need for human intervention. For example, an employee can make a request for taking leave on an Intranet. The request form can be filled out and submitted electronically and can reach the concerned parties in seconds.

193

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Increase internal communication Intranets greatly facilitate communication among employees, especially when they are located in different buildings, cities or countries. Individuals and groups can distribute their ideas to those who need it without having to go through the department traditionally responsible for the distribution of information. Employees in Hong Kong can communicate easily through e-mail with their counterparts in the United States. They can, for example, send project documents electronically, create online forums on new policies and use videoconference to exchange ideas. Minimal learning curve With the increase in popularity of the Internet and the World Wide Web, training users to use the Intranet is easy as many people are already familiar with the Web interface and can translate that experience to Intranet use quickly. Many companies have designed their Intranet pages to look as similar to the Web pages as possible. Getting the customers involved Involving the customers with a company’s Intranet will help that company’s focus move from being product driven to being more customer driven. Customers are no longer required to go through various layers of organizational hierarchies to reach those who build the products or provide the service. Companies are able to build a long-lasting relationship with their customers. Employees can learn first hand on how customers feel about the company’s products and services. At Sun Microsystems, for example, different departments are setting up their own servers to serve their customers directly.

194

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Open standards Internet technologies follow a set of open standards, which facilitate software developers to develop cost effective and easy-to-implement Intranet solutions. Users can choose from a number of vendors for software products. The growth of Internet technologies provides companies with a greater pool of resources to develop their own Intranets. Conversely, traditional GroupWare products have a more limited range of compatible products and fewer specially trained consultants to install and administer them. Scalability Since Intranets are based on Internet technologies, size is not a limitation with Intranets. Unlike traditional GroupWare products, which often charge on a per-client basis, Intranets use open systems to distribute information. The only per-client cost associated with Intranets is the cost of the browsers. 3.2.4 Basic intranet structure       Internet technologies used behind the corporate firewall or in private environment Internet standard mail, web servers, providing access to information, databases, scheduling, etc. threaded discussion groups Multimedia using mime type Virtual private network over public Internet Internet Firewall Intranet

NOTES

3.2.5 Internet Architecture The corporate intranet has been hailed as the most important business tool since the typewriter, but the track record so far has been mixed. Despite many successes, particularly in cost and time savings, many sponsors of corporate intranets are dissatisfied.

195

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

They have spent time and money on development, Net-enabled desktops, even intranet training, but still aren’t enjoying significant enough productivity or cost savings. Why? While critics often point to technological glitches, the real problems may lie in information design. Intranets should help employees collaborate on business processes such as product development or order fulfillment, which create value for a company and its customers. Specifically, intranets centralize the business process in an easily accessible, platformindependent virtual space. Successful intranets allow employees from a variety of departments to contribute the different skills necessary to carry out a particular process. While each department of a company may have its own virtual space, intranets should be organized primarily around the business processes they help employees carry out, rather than the organizational chart of the company. Focusing on processes rather than departments is a widely-hailed business trend. Recent shifts in corporate structure point to the emergence of “communities of process.” Management gurus are helping companies move away from vertical, hierarchical organizational lines towards horizontal, process-oriented groups that link cross-functional teams focused on the same set of business tasks. The trouble is that this requires significant interaction between departments, functions, even countries. Enter the intranet, the ideal vehicle for creating and empowering process-based corporate communities. Successful process-oriented intranets look and work as differently as the processes they enable, but they share several common characteristics. First they are built on smart information design. Second, they focus on tasks, not documents, and aim to integrate those tasks into distinct processes. Finally, the best intranets encourage collaboration by creating shared and familiar spaces that reflect the personality of the company and create a common ground for all employees. Don’t Overlook Design Just as physical work spaces rely on architectural plans to optimize efficiency, an intranet needs to be carefully designed to help employees access information and collaborate effectively. Because the public doesn’t see the intranet, information design for intranets often receives scant attention. Unlike customers, employees are assumed to be insiders, able to easily locate company information. So, while the company Web site usually has the input of the marketing department, design and structure of the intranet is often relegated to the IT department.
196 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

By default, an organizational chart of the company is often used to organize information on the intranet. While seemingly the obvious candidate for the structure of the intranet, an organizational chart actually works against the collaboration the intranet is meant to foster. An organizational chart can’t help employees from the marketing and legal departments collaborate on bringing a document through the approval process. It won’t allow employees from marketing and research and development to work together to create a new product. Think About Tasks Rather Than Documents Thinking of the intranet as a tool means understanding the intranet as more than a collection of documents. While important, documents are usually a means to an end. People use documents to complete tasks. Tasks include fulfilling orders, looking up a customer’s billing history, or collaborating on a research document. To complete these tasks, people need to have related documents and tools close at hand. The principal of organizing by task can be demonstrated by the example of working at a desk. When you sit down to begin a task (e.g., creating a budget), you have a variety of information and tools at hand. While a spreadsheet is a “calculation” tool, and last year’s budget is an “internal document,” both need to be next to each other in order to develop a new budget. Similarly, on the corporate intranet, the tasks of the users rather than the classification of documents or tools, should dictate the organization of the intranet. Designed effectively around dynamic tasks rather than static documents, intranets can contribute to dramatic increases in efficiency (as much as a 40% improvement in time spent processing documents, according to the GIGA Group). Organizing documents within the context of tasks also focuses employees on the function of the documents they are working with. For example, to save employee time while signing up for various retirement plans, information on various retirement plans (including links to financial Web sites) should be placed near the forms actually used to register for those plans. Organize Tasks Into Larger Processes Isolated tasks are usually part of a larger process. Intranets should group together all the tasks that make up a business process. Processes can be relatively discrete, such as tracking deliveries, or getting approval for documents. Or, they can be more complex,
197

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

such as developing or selling products. The most important processes in a company are those that create value for a customer. These are the central processes which every intranet should help employees accomplish. Even simple processes can become more efficient when incorporated into an intranet. For example, when Ford implemented an intranet, the company included an application to help geographically dispersed engineers to get authorization for new projects. What would previously be a time-consuming, expensive process, involving the potential for lost documents and delays, is now centralized in an efficient electronic process. More complex processes can also be effectively integrated into an intranet. For example, Cadence Systems created an integrated section of the intranet for its entire sales process. Each phase of the sales process is represented on the intranet with relevant information and tools. So, the section covering an initial stage of the sales process includes links to customer presentations, sample letters, and internal forms. Organizing all steps of the sales process together also allows for easy tracking of each sales effort. Create Virtual Workgroups Organized Around Processes Intranets can break though departmental walls to help accomplish business processes more efficiently. For example, a customer complaint might involve people and information from the accounting, sales and marketing department. Even though the employees necessary to resolve the complaint work in different departments, they are all involved in the process of customer service. By creating spaces for cross-departmental collaboration, the intranet can help employees collaborate to efficiently carry out the central processes of the company, and cut costs by avoiding in-person conferences and employee reallocations. Intranets (and private extranets) can also bring together employees and partners who are geographically dispersed to work on common problems. Travel costs are eliminated, and employees can increase their productivity by sharing knowledge. For example, a pharmaceutical company is using its intranet to allow scientists all over the world to collaborate on research. A major franchise retailer is using bulletin boards on its intranet to coordinate major marketing projects. Caterpillar is developing an extranet application so that experts from around the world can collaborate with employees to design new products. Other applications for intranet collaboration include complex transactions with lawyers and multiple parties, which rely on access to, and modification of, key documents.
198 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The bulk of discussion about collaboration in and between companies centers around security, certainly an important issue to resolve. What receives less attention-but is central to the value of an intranet-is the design of virtual spaces, which encourage new forms of collaboration. These, in turn, increase the efficiency of key business processes such as product development, marketing and customer service. The Intranet Reflects the Company; the Company Reflects the Intranet The corporate intranet can help a company organize around “communities of process” both on- and off-line. When Texas Instruments initiated a process-centered organization, oriented around collaborative work groups, software development time fell from twenty-two to eight months. The Texas Instruments intranet was established after this shift, and was designed to reflect and enhance the new organization. Whether it precedes or follows the organizational shift, an intranet that encourages this type of collaborative work environment can provide a significant return-on-investment. At the same time, using an intranet to shift the way work is done in an organization requires a cultural change within the organization. Unless there is a clear commitment from senior management to have employees collaborate across departments to more efficiently accomplish key business processes, the intranet may have only limited application and benefit. Even after the intranet is designed to encourage collaboration, marketing the intranet to employees remains essential. As the intranet creates new forms of collaboration, it will challenge traditional ways of doing work and obtaining information. For the intranet to be successful, it must provide ways of empowering all employees, offering concrete incentives for employees to use, and encourage the use, of the intranet. The process-oriented intranet, then, is “in sync” with the company it works for. And this is where graphic design, tone and standards emerge as vital to the intranet’s success. Like it or not, intranets have personalities, which are amalgams of visual style, tone and content. An intranet that reflects the culture of its company will make employees feel more at home, will help dispersed employees feel that they share the same space, and will encourage collaboration and communication around the processes they support. Turner Entertainment Group, for example, created a distinctive, casual feel for its intranet with a home page that uses a refrigerator with magnates to represent the various divisions. The unique imagery created a friendly, shared, familiar space for all employees.

NOTES

199

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

3.2.6 Internet/Intranet Applications From blue-chip companies to one-person start-ups, the Internet and its related technologies have provided new opportunities and new ways of doing business. Webbased systems have enabled organizations to provide maintainable, secure global access to their data and applications. The ease of deployment over the web has made such applications very attractive for enterprise systems. Any device which has a web browser can potentially utilize an internet/intranet application. These applications are no longer restricted to the traditional PC user running Windows, but are also available for PDAs and mobile phones. The introduction of Web Services has widened the scope of web-based applications by allowing other systems to interact with them. Tessella has acquired wide ranging experience of internet and intranet applications, and the majority of our work has a web-based component. We have worked on a variety of web-based systems which have fulfilled many different business roles, including systems such as sophisticated workflow systems that help organizations manage their day to day business, and web front ends to large corporate and scientific databases. We also have experience of developing distributed applications deployed over the internet such as climateprediction.net, the world’s largest climate prediction experiment. Advantages of intranets 1. Workforce productivity: Intranets can help users to locate and view information faster and use applications relevant to their roles and responsibilities. With the help of a web browser interface, users can access data held in any database the organization wants to make available, anytime and - subject to security provisions from anywhere within the company workstations, increasing employees’ ability to perform their jobs faster, more accurately, and with confidence that they have the right information. It also helps to improve the services provided to the users. 2. Time: With intranets, organizations can make more information available to employees on a “pull” basis (ie: employees can link to relevant information at a time which suits them) rather than being deluged indiscriminately by emails.

200

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

3.

Communication: Intranets can serve as powerful tools for communication within an organization, vertically and horizontally. From a communications standpoint, intranets are useful to communicate strategic initiatives that have a global reach throughout the organization. The type of information that can easily be conveyed is the purpose of the initiative and what the initiative is aiming to achieve, who is driving the initiative, results achieved to date, and who to speak to for more information. By providing this information on the intranet, staff have the opportunity to keep up-todate with the strategic focus of the organization. Web publishing allows ‘cumbersome’ corporate knowledge to be maintained and easily accessed throughout the company using hypermedia and Web technologies. Examples include: employee manuals, benefits documents, company policies, business standards, newsfeeds, and even training, can be accessed using common Internet standards (Acrobat files, Flash files, CGI applications). Because each business unit can update the online copy of a document, the most recent version is always available to employees using the intranet. Business operations and management: Intranets are also being used as a platform for developing and deploying applications to support business operations and decisions across the internetworked enterprise. Cost-effective: Users can view information and data via web-browser rather than maintaining physical documents such as procedure manuals, internal phone list and requisition forms. Promote common corporate culture: Every user is viewing the same information within the Intranet.

NOTES

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Enhance Collaboration: With information easily accessible by all authorised users, teamwork is enabled. Cross-platform Capability: Standards-compliant web browsers are available for Windows, Mac, and UNIX.

9.

201

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

3.3 EXTRANET 3.3.1 What is an Extranet? An extranet is a private network that uses Internet protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization’s information or operations with suppliers, vendors, partners, customers or other businesses. An extranet can be viewed as part of a company’s Intranet that is extended to users outside the company (e.g.: normally over the Internet). It has also been described as a “state of mind” in which the Internet is perceived as a way to do business with a pre approved set of other companies business-to-business (B2B), in isolation from all other Internet users. In contrast, business-to-consumer (B2C) involves known server(s) of one or more companies, communicating with previously unknown consumer users. Briefly, an extranet can be understood as a private intranet mapped onto the Internet or some other transmission system not accessible to the general public, but is managed by more than one company’s administrator(s). For example, military networks of different security levels may map onto a common military radio transmission system that never connects to the Internet. Any private network mapped onto a public one is a virtual private network (VPN). In contrast, an intranet is a VPN under the control of a single company’s administrator(s). An argument has been made that “extranet” is just a buzzword for describing what institutions have been doing for decades, that is, interconnecting to each other to create private networks for sharing information. One of the differences that characterized an extranet, however, is that its interconnections are over a shared network rather than through dedicated physical lines. With respect to Internet Protocol networks, RFC 4364 states “If all the sites in a VPN are owned by the same enterprise, the VPN is a corporate intranet. If the various sites in a VPN are owned by different enterprises, the VPN is an extranet. A site can be in more than one VPN; e.g., in an intranet and several extranets. We regard both intranets and extranets as VPNs. In general, when we use the term VPN we will not be distinguishing between intranets and extranets. Even if this argument is valid, the term “extranet” is still applied and can be used to eliminate the use of the above description.”

202

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

It is important to note that in the quote above from RFC 4364, the term “site” refers to a distinct networked environment. Two “sites” connected to each other across the public Internet backbone comprise a VPN. The term “site” does not mean “website.” Further, “intranet” also refers to just the web-connected portions of a “site.” Thus, a small company in a single building can have an “intranet,” but to have a VPN, they would need to provide tunneled access to that network for geographically distributed employees. Similarly, for smaller, geographically united organizations, “extranet” is a useful term to describe selective access to intranet systems granted to suppliers, customers, or other companies. Such access does not involve tunneling, but rather simply an authentication mechanism to a web server. In this sense, an “extranet” designates the “private part” of a website, where “registered users” can navigate, enabled by authentication mechanisms on a “login page”. An extranet requires security and privacy. These can include firewalls, server management, the issuance and use of digital certificates or similar means of user authentication, encryption of messages, and the use of virtual private networks (VPNs) that tunnel through the public network. 3.3.2 Features of Extranet Extranets generally have the following features:  The use of Internet technologies and standards. These include the standardized techniques for transmitting and sharing information and the methods for encrypting and storing information, otherwise known as the Internet Protocol, or IP. The use of Web browsers. Users access Extranet information using a web browser like Microsoft Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator or, more recently, Mozilla’s Firefox. Browser software uses relatively small amounts of memory and resources on a computer. The great thing about browsers is that an application written for a browser can be read on almost any computer without regard to operating system or manufacturer. That makes an application developed for a browser a snap to deploy. A browser on a user’s machine is all the software he or she needs to take full advantage of the Extranet application. No messy and confounding installation disks; fewer clogged hard drives.
203

NOTES



ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES





Security. By their very nature, Extranets are embroiled in concerns about security. To protect the privacy of the information that is being transmitted, most Extranets use either secure communication lines or proven security and encryption technologies that have been developed for the Internet. Central Server/Repository. Extranets usually have a central server where documents or data reside. Members can access this information from any computer that has Internet access.

While these are the broad attributes shared by most Extranets, Extranets vary dramatically in their design and implementation. They can be employed in a wide variety of environments and for very different purposes, like:   Sharing case information Sharing of case-related documents—many Extranets contain document repositories that can be searched and viewed by both lawyer and client online Calendaring—key dates and scheduling of hearings and trials can be shared on-line Providing firm contact information Acting as a “work flow engine” for various suppliers Providing access to firm resources remotely Sharing time and expense information

    

3.3.3 Industry use During the late 1990s and early 2000s, several industries started to use the term “extranet” to describe central repositories of shared data made accessible via the web only to authorized members of particular work groups. For example, in the construction industry, project teams could login to and access a ‘project extranet’ to share drawings and documents, make comments, issue requests for information, etc. In 2003 in the United Kingdom, several of the leading vendors formed the Network of Construction Collaboration Technology Providers, or NCCTP, to promote the technologies and to establish data exchange standards between the different systems. The same type of construction-focused technologies have also been developed in the United States, Australia, Scandinavia, Germany and Belgium, among others. Some
204 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

applications are offered on a Software as a Service (SaaS) basis by vendors functioning as Application service providers (ASPs). Specially secured extranets are used to provide virtual data room services to companies in several sectors (including law and accountancy). There are a variety of commercial extranet applications, some of which are for pure file management, and others which include broader collaboration and project management tools. Also exist a variety of Open Source extranet applications and modules, which can be integrated into other online collaborative applications such as Content Management Systems. Companies can use an extranet to:      Exchange large volumes of data using Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Share product catalogs exclusively with wholesalers or those “in the trade” Collaborate with other companies on joint development efforts Jointly develop and use training programs with other companies Provide or access services provided by one company to a group of other companies, such as an online banking application managed by one company on behalf of affiliated banks Share news of common interest exclusively with partner companies

NOTES



3.3.4 Extranet applications An extranet application is a software data application that provides limited access to your company’s internal data by outside users such as customers and suppliers. The limited access typically includes the ability to order products and services, check order status, request customer service and much more. A properly developed extranet application provides the supply chain connection needed with customers and suppliers to dramatically lessen routine and time consuming communications. Doing so frees up resources to concentrate on customer service and expansion as opposed to administrative office tasks such as data entry.

205

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Just as intranets provide increased internal collaboration, extranets provide increased efficiencies between your company and its customers and/or suppliers. Developing and implementing an extranet application can provide you the competitive edge to stay ahead of the competition in the eyes of your customers and a better ability to negotiate prices with your suppliers. 3.3.5 Disadvantages 1. Extranets can be expensive to implement and maintain within an organization (e.g.: hardware, software, employee training costs) — if hosted internally instead of via an ASP. Security of extranets can be a big concern when dealing with valuable information. System access needs to be carefully controlled to avoid sensitive information falling into the wrong hands. Extranets can reduce personal contact (face-to-face meetings) with customers and business partners. This could cause a lack of connections made between people and a company, which hurts the business when it comes to loyalty of its business partners and customers

2.

3.

3.3.6 E-Commerce Business Models Since eCommerce consists of doing business online or electronically, the business or revenue models are somewhat different than that of a “brick and mortar” business. Common eCommerce models are direct online sales, selling online advertising space, and online commissions. Direct online sales model You can establish your website as your place of business and directly sell to those entering your “store” to make a purchase. Since delivery is often by mail, this is similar to customers buying from a mail order catalog. Software products, e-books, music and video files can be delivered to the customer through the downloading process. Amazon.com is a good example of a business using the direct sales model to gain revenue.

206

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Online advertising space model Just as television and radio stations gain revenue from advertisements, related to the reach or number of viewers they have, so too can popular websites charge for the number of viewers seeing an ad. A better method is to count the number of viewers that click on an ad, taking them to the company’s website. Online commission model Individuals and companies can also be established as affiliates, where they gain a commission for sales made through a company using the direct online sales model. Online companies such as eBay and PayPal charge a commission for their services. Google gains a commission for ads placed on others’ websites. 3.3.6.1 Successful Ecommerce Business Models Five different ways websites can generate revenue by Robert Samuelsen “There’s no such thing as a free lunch!” While this simple economic aphorism seems to have been forgotten in the world of cyberspace, it holds true as much today as it ever has. First lets establish the fact that no site is free - every web site costs money. The web site is stored on a computer, uses web server software, accesses telecommunication resources, and must be maintained. Someone must pay for the computers, software, telecommunication charges, and time. The omnipresent cost either comes from your pocket or some benevolent benefactor. The cost and potential revenue constitutes a business model. Therefore, even the “free” sites have a business model. A public site offered by a library, school, or university has a business model. Free email service has a business model. Free home pages fit into a business model. Every site in the entire world wide web has a business model. There are different business models underlying each website. In actuality, five distinct eCommerce business models form the basic structure for the wide variety of websites today. The five categories are called vanity, billboard, advertising, subscriptions, and storefront sites. [Editor’s Note: Mr. Samuelsen considers affiliate
207

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

programs to be a variant on the storefront model.] While not all drive revenue directly, they all incur costs. In addition, many sites combine several of the five identified business models. Each of the five models have unique characteristics which make it different from the other types. Therefore, it is important to understand their differences. Vanity: Many web sites are started as vanity sites. These sites are often created by individuals as an outlet of self expression, to share a hobby, promote a cause, or find others with similar interests. These sites are created with no intentions of deriving revenue and no illusions of grandeur. It could be as simple as a one page family site or a complex forum on a specific topic. The costs are borne either by the individual or by some altruistic enterprise such as universities, libraries, communities, associations, and even businesses. Nevertheless, the costs are real of these “free” sites. Billboard: Billboard sites (also called brochure or information sites) are designed to derive economic benefit through indirect means from either referred sales, reduced cost, or both. Revenue comes from creating awareness of its products or services via the web, with the actual purchase transaction occurring off-line. Just like a billboard on a highway, success is measured on viewer ship as net citizens “surf” by and are influenced to purchase product. Most corporate sites today put up these electronic brochures to provide information about their products, employment information, or public information. Economic benefit is created through the indirect purchase of goods or services from existing physical outlets and cost savings through the elimination of infrastructure or inefficiency. Finally, some businesses feel this is the best way to avoid channel conflict’s potential pricing disparity between different supply chains. Advertising: Network television, radio, and many periodicals follow the advertising model. All programming and content is funded by advertising dollars, with consumer viewership measuring value. Agencies conduct sophisticated surveys to measure the value and establish the pricing. For eCommerce, advertising can be in the form of banners, sponsorships, ezine ads, and other promotion methods. This is a much-ballyhooed but still largely unproven model on the web. While there are a few sites that are entirely supported by advertising dollars, the lack of websavvy viewership statistics hindering the mass adoption by advertisers? As the knowledge of consumer behavior is further understood, experts will prepare purchase pattern analyses providing advertisers with empirical data to support their promotion campaigns.
208 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Subscriptions: In other media, the subscription models are well established’ accepted by subscribers and nurtured by publishers. On the web, subscriptions are not yet widely accepted by consumers. Of those that are accepted, the subscription model caters to sites targeted to particular niches of individuals who have specific needs. These sites are often specialized with expert content and timely information. The subscriptions fund the development and maintenance of the site. Subscriptions can be paid on a weekly, monthly, or annual basis. Payment through a credit card account is a common payment scheme for subscription sites because of the ability to periodically process the purchase transaction electronically. Storefront: To some people, a products-offered site is narrowly defined as a “true” eCommerce site. A website that offers products for sale is the electronic version of a catalog. These virtual storefronts are built to describe the offering with pictures and words, offer promotions, provide a “shopping cart,” and complete the purchase transaction. Once the product is purchased, the cyber enterprise arranges for product fulfillment including shipping and handling. The fulfillment is sometimes completed by the website enterprise or directly from the manufacturer in a drop shipping arrangement. Some manufacturers are now passing up the intermediary wholesalers and retailers by offering their products directly to consumers. This collapsing of the supply chain is called disintermediation. Although the vast majority of these sites offer tangible products, they can work for service products too. The primary characteristic of these types of sites is the ability to make a one time purchase with no future obligations. While it is impossible to predict the future in this fast moving media, it is obvious that all five business models will remain viable for the near term. Each model will continue to mature both in its acceptance and sophistication. Consumers will increasingly look to the web for physical commerce alternatives because of the limitlessness of the media both in terms of geography and shopping hours. For net entrepreneurs, each model should be examined carefully to understand which model provides the maximum benefit. With the understanding of the business models, financial projections can be easily created and business plans finalized. With the business plan in hand, you will realize even in cyberspace, there is no such thing as a free lunch.

NOTES

209

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Robert Samuelsen operates eVine Online, which he describes as “The web’s first family communication center featuring calendars, photo albums, discussion groups, address books, and more—all in a password protected family environment.” Summary Internet: The Internet is a worldwide, publicly accessible series of interconnected computer networks that transmit data by packet switching using the standard Internet Protocol (IP). It is a “network of networks” that consists of millions of smaller domestic, academic, business, and government networks, which together carry various information and services, such as electronic mail, online chat, file transfer, and the interlinked web pages and other resources of the World Wide Web (WWW). The Internet Tools and their Characteristics: The evolution of the Internet is punctuated by the introduction and mass acceptance of such key resources and tools as Unix, Email, Usenet newsgroups, Telnet, Listserv Mailing List Software, File Transfer Protocol, Internet Relay Chat, WAIS, Gopher, WWW, and more recently by the Altavista search engine, Java language, and finally, the Elements of Internet Architecture  Protocol Layering Networks Routers  Addressing Architecture The outward signs of a robust and thriving business are:  Revenue increases  Ability to generate profits  Success in creating meaningful alliances  Success in expanding into new markets  Differentiating itself from other business models Intranet: An Intranet is a company-specific network that uses software programs based on the Internet TCP/IP protocol and common Internet user interfaces such as the

210

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

web browser. Simply put, an Intranet is the application of Internet technologies within an organization private LAN or WAN network. Why are intranets popular        Inexpensive to implement Easy to use, just point and click Saves time and money, better information faster Based on open standards Scaleable and flexible Connects across disparate platforms Puts users in control of their data

NOTES

Extranet: An extranet is a private network that uses Internet protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization’s information or operations with suppliers, vendors, partners, customers or other businesses. Companies can use an extranet to:      Exchange large volumes of data using Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) Share product catalogs exclusively with wholesalers or those “in the trade” Collaborate with other companies on joint development efforts Jointly develop and use training programs with other companies Provide or access services provided by one company to a group of other companies, such as an online banking application managed by one company on behalf of affiliated banks Share news of common interest exclusively with partner companies



E-Commerce Business Models: Common eCommerce models are direct online sales, selling online advertising space, and online commissions.

211

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Questions for review 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. What is an Internet? Explain its characteristics? List the Internet tools and explain its characteristics What is FTP? Explain web based Client/Server? Describe the elements of Internet architecture? Explain the uses of Internet? What are the key areas that a profitable web site needs to concentrate on? Discuss some successful companies that pursue different business models? What is an intranet? List the benefits of Intranet List the basic intranet structure Describe Internet architecture Discuss Internet/Intranet applications Discuss the integration of web technologies with business models What is an Extranet and list its features Describe the extranet applications Discuss E-Commerce Business models

212

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

NOTES

UNIT IV

E-COMMERCE PAYMENTS AND SECURITY
4.1 ELECTRONIC PAYMENTS AND PROTOCOLS 4.1.1 Electronic Payment Systems Electronic payment is an integral part of electronic commerce. Broadly de-fined, electronic payment is a financial exchange that takes place online between buyers and sellers. The content of this exchange is usually some form of digital financial instrument (such as encrypted credit card numbers, electronic checks, or digital cash) that is backed by a bank or an intermediary, or by legal tender. Three factors are stimulating interest among financial institutions in electronic payments:    decreasing technology costs, reduced operational and processing costs, and increasing online commerce.

The desire to reduce costs is one major reason for the increase in electronic payments. Cash and checks are very expensive to process, and banks are seeking less costly alternatives. It is estimated that approximately 56 percent of consumer transactions in the United States are cash and 29 percent are check. Credits, debits, and other electronic transactions account for about 15 percent of all consumer transactions, and are expected to increase rapidly. Electronic transactions numbered 33 billion in 1993 and are expected to climb to 118 billion by the year 2000. For the same period, paper transactions are forecast to show very modest growth, from 117 billion in 1993 to 135 billion in the year 2000.
213 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Banks and retailers want to wean customers away from paper transactions because the processing overhead is both labor intensive and costly. The crucial issue in electronic commerce revolves around how consumers will pay businesses online for various products and services. Currently, consumers can view an endless variety of products and services offered by vendors on the Internet, but a consistent and secure payment capability does not exist. The solutions proposed to the online payment problem have been ad hoc at best. For instance, in one method marketed by CyberCash, users install client software packages, sometimes known as “electronic wallets,” on their browsers. This software then communicates with “electronic cash registers” that run on merchants’ Web servers. Each vendor’s client works with only that vendor’s own server software, a rather restrictive scenario. Currently, merchants face the unappealing option of either picking one standard and alienating consumers not subscribing to a standard or needing to support multiple standards, which entails extra time, effort, and money. Today, the proliferation of incompatible electronic payment schemes has stifled electronic commerce in much the same way the split between Beta and VHS standards stifled the video industry’s growth in the 1970s. Banks faced similar problems in off-line commerce in the early nineteenth century. Many banks issued their own notes, and a recurrent problem was the tendency of some institutions to issue more notes than they had gold as backing. Further, getting one bank to honor another’s notes was a major problem. Innovations in payment methods involved the creation of new financial instruments that relied on backing from governments or central banks, and gradually came to be used as money. Banks are solving these problems all over again in an online environment. The goal of online commerce is to develop a small set of payment methods that are widely used by consumers and widely accepted by merchants and banks. 4.1.1.1 Types of Electronic Payment Systems Electronic payment systems are proliferating in banking, retail, health care, on-line markets, and even government-in fact, anywhere money needs to change hands. Organizations are motivated by the need to deliver products and services more cost effectively and to provide a higher quality of service to customers. Research into electronic payment systems for consumers can be traced back to the 1940s, and the first applications-credit cards appeared soon after. In the early 1970s,
214 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

the emerging electronic payment technology was labelled electronic funds transfer (EFT). EFT is defined as “any transfer of funds initiated through an electronic terminal, telephonic instrument, or computer or magnetic tape so as to order, instruct, or authorize a financial institution to debit or credit an account.” EFT utilizes computer and telecommunication components both to supply and to transfer money or financial assets. Transfer is informationbased and intangible. Thus EFT stands in marked contrast to conventional money and payment modes that rely on physical delivery of cash or checks (or other paper orders to pay) by truck, train, or airplane. Work on EFT can be segmented into three broad categories: Banking and financial payments    Large-scale or wholesale payments (e.g., bank-to-bank transfer) Small-scale or retail payments (e.g., automated teller machines and cash dispensers) Home banking (e.g., bill payment)

NOTES

Retailing payments Credit cards (e.g., VISA or MasterCard) Private label credit/debit cards (e.g., J.C. Penney Card) Charge cards (e.g., American Express) On-line electronic commerce payments o Token-based payment systems Electronic cash (e.g., DigiCash) Electronic checks (e.g., NetCheque) Smart cards or debit cards (e.g., Mondex Electronic Currency Card) o Credit card-based payment systems Encrypted credit cards (e.g., World Wide Web form based encryption) Third-party authorization numbers (e.g., First Virtual)

215

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

4.1.2 Designing Electronic Payment Systems  Privacy. A user expects to trust in a secure system; just as the telephone is a safe and private medium free of wiretaps and hackers, electronic communication must merit equal trust. Security. A secure system verifies the identity of two-party transactions through “user authentication” and reserves flexibility to restrict information/services through access control. Tomorrow’s bank robbers will need no getaway cars just a computer terminal, the price of a telephone call, and a little ingenuity. Millions of dollars have been embezzled by computer fraud. No systems are yet fool-proof, although designers are concentrating closely on security. Intuitive interfaces. The payment interface must be as easy to use as a telephone. Generally speaking, users value convenience more than anything. Database integration. With home banking, for example, a customer wants to play with all his accounts. To date, separate accounts have been stored on separate databases. The challenge before banks is to tie these databases together and to allow customers access to any of them while keeping the data up-to-date and error free. Brokers. A “network banker”-someone to broker goods and services, settle conflicts, and facilitate financial transactions electronically-must be in place.



 



One fundamental issue is how to price payment system service. For example, should subsidies be used to encourage users to shift from one form of payment to another, from cash to bank payments, from paper-’based to e-cash. The problem with subsidies is the potential waste of resources, as money may be invested in systems that will not be used. Thus investment in systems not only might not be recovered but substantial ongoing operational subsidies will also be necessary. On the other hand, it must be recognized that without subsidies, it is difficult to price all services affordably. · Standards. Without standards, the welding of different payment users into different networks and different systems is impossible. Standards enable interoperability, giving users the ability to buy and receive information, regardless of which bank is managing their money. None of these hurdles are insurmountable. Most will be jumped within the next few years. These technical problems, experts hope, will be solved as technology is improved and experience is gained. The biggest question concerns how customers will take to a paperless and (if not cashless) less-cash world.

216

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.1.3 Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) Protocol SET protocol was initially designed by Visa and MasterCard in 1997 and has evolved since then. SET protocol meets the four security requirements for EC as SSL(Secure Socket Layer) does: authentication, encryption, integrity, and non repudiation. In addition, SET defines the message format, certificate format, and procedure of message exchange as depicted in. The role of payment gateway is to connect the Internet and proprietary networks of banks. Each participating entity needs its own certificate. To keep the consumer’s certificate in his or her personal computer or IC card, software called the electronic wallet, or digital wallet, is necessary. To connect the dig-ital wallet with various merchants, interoperability is a very important characteristic to meet. Electronic Wallet To achieve perfect security, the electronic wallet has to be downloaded into the buyer’s personal computer. Since the interoperability of the cardholder’s digital wallet with any merchant’s software is essential, a consortium of companies (Visa, MasterCard, JCB, and American Express) has established a company called SETCo (Secure Electronic Transaction LLC 1999). This company performs the interoperability test and issues a SET Mark as a confirmation of interoperability. IBM, Netscape, Microsoft, VeriSign, Tandem, and MetaLand provide such interoperable digital wallets. Storage of Certificates If the private key and corresponding public key in a certificate are physically stored in the customer’s personal computer, the customer can use the certificate only at the computer. However, if the certificate is stored in an IC card, the wallet can work if the IC card is inserted into a card reader attached to a computer. Therefore, storing the certificate in IC card seems to be the safest method.

NOTES

217

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Overview of main messages in SET The International Center for Electronic Commerce (ICEC 1999) has developed a system named Smart-SET, which integrates SET protocol with an IC card that can store multiple certificates. Secure socket layer protocol for electronic payment even though SET is a perfect solution for secure electronic payments, a relatively simple version of SSL is currently widely adopted. This is because SET protocol is complex and certificates are not widely distributed in a stable manner. Theoretically, the SSL protocol may use a certificate but it does not include the concept of a payment gateway. Merchants need to receive both ordering information and credit card information because the capturing process initiated by the merchant. The SET protocol, on the other hand, hides the customer’s credit card information from merchants and also hides the order information from banks to protect privacy. This scheme is called dual signature. Until SET becomes popular, a simple version of SSL is a very viable alternative.

218

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.1.3.1 What Features does SET Specify? The following objectives are addressed by SET specifications: Confidentiality of Information To facilitate and encourage financial transactions, it will be necessary for merchants and banks to assure consumers that their payment information is safe and accessible only by the intended recipient. Therefore, credit card account and payment information must be se-cured as it travels across the network, preventing interception of account numbers and expiration dates by unauthorized individuals. SET provides confidentiality by the use of message encryption. Integrity of Information SET ensures that message content is not altered during the transmission between originator and recipient. Payment information sent from consumers to merchants includes order information, personal data, and payment instructions. If any component is altered in transit, the transaction will not be processed accurately. In order to eliminate this potential source of fraud and/or error, SET provides the means to ensure that the contents of all order and payment messages received match the contents of messages sent. Information integrity is ensured by the use of digital signatures. Consumer Account Authentication Merchants need a way to verify that a consumer is a legitimate user of a valid account number. Digital signatures and digital certificates ensure consumer account authentication by providing a mechanism that links a consumer to a specific account number. SET designates a third party called a certificate authority to authenticate the sender and receiver. Merchant Authentication The SET specifications provide a way for consumers to confirm that a merchant has a relationship with a financial institution that allows that merchant to accept bank card payments. Merchant authentication is ensured by the use of digital signatures and merchant certificates.
219

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Interoperability The SET specifications must be applicable on a variety of hardware and software platforms, ands must not prefer one over another. Any consumer with compliant software must be able to communicate with any merchant software that also meets the defined standard Interoperability by the use of standard protocols and message formats. 4.2 SECURITY SCHEMES AGAINST INTERNET FRAUD 4.2.1 Security Issues The Internet is a huge place that hosts several millions of people. As all the people are not honest, illegal activity’ is inevitable. Statistics show that only 10% of computer client is reported and only 2% of the reported client results in with convictions. There are two basic types of criminal activities:  The person who tries to understand and learn the various systems and capabilities of any private network. In this case the person has no intentions to do any damage or to steal any resources but tries to observe the system functionality. For example teenagers who tries to enter into a network out of curiosity till they are caught or deducted. The persons who uses the Internet and the Web to benefit themselves by doing illegal activities such as, stealing software’s, information and causing damage to resources. This type of criminal activity raises the concern for network security.



A large system like Internet has many holes and crevices in which a determined person can easily find the way to get into any private network. There are many terms used to signify the computer criminals. Type of Computer Criminals  Hacker-is a person who has good knowledge about computers and tries to open the data packets and steal the information transmitted through the Internet.

220

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT







Cracker-is someone who specifically breaks into computer systems by bypassing or by guessing login passwords. These persons enter into the network as authenticated users and can cause any harm to the system. Phreaks-are persons who hack phone systems. These people specifically try to scam long distance phone-time for them to control phone switch capability or to hack company automated EBX systems to get free voice-mail accounts or to raid companies existing voice-mail messages. Phracker-is the combination of freak and cracker. A phracker breaks into phone systems and computer systems and specializes in total network destruction.

NOTES

Another major issue in the Internet security is misrepresentation and fraud. One of the reasons of misrepresentation is that on the net it is easy to appear as anyone or anything without the actual presence. For example, shops site displaying goods, which the dealer may not have them physically. But at the same time, creating a scam site is not as easy as it seems to be, because one must host pages somewhere, which makes the provider responsible for the content. For this reason, most Web site providers examines sites and have access to the information that is been provided. With the rapid growth in use of Internet, in future the number of fraud cases in which perpetrators create their own provider site will probably increase. This is possible specially, in case of offshore servers where laws are more favorable to the criminal and enforcement will be very difficult. For this reason, it is increasingly important for Web users to protect themselves. 4.2.2 Security Schemes 4.2.2.1 Encryption Encryption is a technique for hiding data. The encrypted data can be read only by those users for whom it is intended. Nowadays various encryption techniques are available. One of the available techniques commonly used for encryption is Public Key. In Public Key encryption system, RSA Data Security of Redwood City offers the most popular and commercially available algorithm. In a Public Key encryption system each user has two keys-public key and private key. The encryption and decryption algorithms are designed in a way so that only the private key can decrypt data that is encrypted by the public key. And the public key can
221 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

decrypt data, encrypted by the private key. Therefore, one can broadcast the public key to all users. Computer encryption is based on the science of cryptography, which has been used throughout history. Before the digital age, the biggest users of cryptography were governments, particularly for military purposes. Most computer encryption systems belong in one of two categories. Broadly speaking, there are two types of encryption methods:   Secret-key encryption Public-key encryption

SECRET - KEY ENCRYPTION
I n t e r n e t

Anne

Encrypt

Decrypt

Bob

Secret-key encryption, also known as symmetric encryption, involves the use of a shared key for both encryption by the transmitter and decryption by the receiver. Secretkey encryption works in the following way: Anne wishes to send a purchase order (PO) to Bob in such a way that only Bob can read it. Anne encrypts the PO (the plaintext) with an encryption key and sends the encrypted PO (the cipher text) to Bob. Encryption scrambles the message, rendering it unreadable to anyone but the intended recipient. Bob decrypts the cipher text with the decryption key and reads the PO. Note that in secret-key encryption, the encryption key and decryption key are the same (see Fig.). The transmitter uses a cryptographic secret “key” to encrypt the message, and the recipient must use the same key to decipher or decrypt it. A widely adopted implementation of secret-key encryption is data encryption standard (DES). Although secret-key encryption is useful in many cases, it has significant limitations. All parties must know and trust each other completely, and have in their possession a
222 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

protected copy of the key. If the transmitter and receiver are in separate sites, they must trust not being overheard during face-to-face meetings or over a public messaging system (a phone system, a postal service) when the secret key is being exchanged. Anyone who over-hears or intercepts the key in transit can later use that key to read all encrypted messages.
Scrambled message scrambled

NOTES

I n t e r n e t

message

Buyer

Encrypt with private key

Decrypt with private key

seller

Since shared keys must be securely distributed to each communicating party, secretkey encryption suffers from the problem of key distribution-generation, transmission, and storage of keys. Secure key distribution is cumbersome in large networks and does not scale well to a business environment where a company deals with thousands of online customers. Further, secret-key encryption is impractical for exchanging messages with a large group of previously unknown parties over a public network. For in-stance, in order for a merchant to conduct transactions securely with Internet subscribers, each consumer would need a distinct secret key as-signed by the merchant and transmitted over a separate secure channel such as a telephone, adding to the overall cost. Hence, given the difficulty of providing secure key management, it is hard to see secret-key encryption becoming a dominant player in electronic commerce. If secret encryption cannot ensure safe electronic commerce, what can? The solution to widespread open network security is a newer, more sophisticated form of encryption, first developed in the 1970s, known as public-key encryption. Public-Key Encryption Public-key encryption, also known as asymmetric encryption, uses two keys: one key to encrypt the message and a different key to decrypt the message. The two keys are mathematically related so that data encrypted with one key only be decrypted using the other.

223

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Unlike secret-key encryption, which uses a single key shared by two (or more) parties, public-key encryption uses a pair of keys for each party. One of the two keys is “public” and the other is “private.” The public key can be made known to other parties; the private key must be kept confidential and must be known only to its owner. Both keys, however, need to be protected against modification. The best known public-key encryption algorithm is RSA (named after its inventors Rivest, Shamir, and Adleman). In the RSA method, each participant creates two unique keys, a “public key,” which is published in a sort of public directory, and a “private key,” which is kept secret. The two keys work together; whatever data one of the keys “locks,” only the other can unlock. For example, if an individual wants to send a snoop-proof email message to a friend, she simply looks up his public key and uses that key to en-crypt her text. When the friend receives the e-mail, he uses his private key to convert the encrypted message on his computer screen back to the sender’s original message in clear text. Since only the bona fide author of an encrypted message has knowledge of the private key, a successful decryption using the corresponding public key verifies the identity of the author and ensures message integrity. Even if a would-be criminal intercepts the message on its way to the intended recipient, that criminal has no way of deciphering the message without the private key. The computer handles the hard work of manipulating the large numbers used in the math of encrypting and decrypting messages. Table compares secret- and public key systems. Both types of systems offer advantages and disadvantages. Often, the two are combined to form a hybrid system to exploit the strengths of each method. To determine which type of encryption best meets its needs, an organization first has to identify its security requirements and operating environment. Public-key encryption is particularly useful when the parties wishing to communicate cannot rely on each other or do not share a common key. This is often the case in online commerce. Another prominent public key method being used in online commerce today is called Digital Signatures

224

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Comparing Secret key and public key Encryption methods.

NOTES

Digital Signature Digital signatures are used for sending authentication. This also means that the originator cannot falsely deny having signed the data. In addition, a digital signature enables the computer to notarize the message, ensuring the recipient that the message has not been forged transit. Let us consider the following scenario of a customer, interacting with a merchant, Online mart. When the customer orders something from Online mart, he uses Online mart’s public key to encrypt her confidential information. Online Mart then uses its private key to decrypt the message (only a private key can unlock a document deciphered with a public key); thus the customer knows that only Online Mart received that data. To ensure further security, the customer can enclose a digital signature, encrypted with her own private key, which Online Mart could decrypt with the customers public key and know that only the particular customer could have sent it. In the other direction Online mart would send confidential information to the customer using her public key, and only she can decrypt it using her private key. This shows how digital signature works in combination with public key encryption to ensure authentication and privacy. Technically, How Do Digital Signatures Work? Data is electronically signed by applying the originator’s private key to the data. To increase the speed of the process, the private key is applied to a shorter form of the

225

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

data, called a “hash” or “message digest,” rather than to the entire set of data. The resulting digital signature can be stored or transmitted along with the data. The signature can be verified by any party using the public key of the signer. This feature is very useful, for example, when distributing signed copies of virus-free .software. Any recipient can verify that the program re-mains virus-free. If the signature verifies properly, then the verifier has confidence that the data was not modified after 1:Jeing signed and that the owner of the public key was the signer. Digital signatures ensure authentication in the following way. In order to digitally sign a document, a user combines her private key and the document and performs a computation on the composite (key+docurnent) in order to generate a unique number called the digital signature. For example, when an electronic document, such as an order form with a credit card number, is run through the digital signature process, the output is a unique “fingerprint” of the document. This “fingerprint” is attached to the original message and further encrypted with the signer’s private key. If a user is communicating with her bank, she sends the result of the second encryption to her bank. The bank then decrypts the document using her public key, and checks to see if the enclosed message has been tampered with by a third party. To verify the signature, the bank performs a computation involving the original document, the purported digital signature, and the customer’s public key. If the results of the computation generate a matching “fingerprint” of the document, the digital signature is verified as genuine; otherwise, the signature may be fraudulent or the message altered. Digital signatures, variations of which are being explored by several companies, are the basis for secure commerce. A digital signature provides a way to associate the message with the sender, and is the cyberspace equivalent of “signing” for purchases. In this way, consumers can use credit card accounts over the Internet. Digital Certificates Authentication is further strengthened by the use of digital certificates. Before two parties, Bob and Alice, use public-key encryption to conduct business, each wants to be sure that the other party is authenticated. Before Bob accepts a message with Alice’s digital signature, he wants to be sure that the public key belongs to Alice and not to someone masquerading as Alice on an open network. One way to be sure that the public key belongs to Alice is to receive it over a secure channel directly from Alice. However, in most circumstances this solution is not practical.
226 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

An alternative to the use of a secure channel is to use a trusted third party to authenticate that the public key belongs to Alice. Such a party is known as a certificate authority (CA). Once Alice has provided proof of her identity, the certificate authority creates a message containing Alice’s name and her public key. This message, known as a certificate, is digitally signed by the certificate authority. It contains owner identification information, as well as a copy of one of the owner’s public keys. To get the most benefit, the public key of the certificate authority should be known to as many people as possible. Thus by using one public key (that of a CA) as a trusted third- party means of establishing authentication, disparate parties can engage in electronic commerce with a high degree of trust. In many ways, digital certificates are the heart of secure electronic transactions. Through the use of a common third party, digital certificates provide an easy and convenient way to ensure that the participants in an electronic commerce transaction can trust each other. For example, in the credit card industry, Visa provides digital certificates to the card-issuing financial institution, and the institution then provides a digital certificate to the cardholder. A similar process takes place for the merchant. At the time of the transaction, each party’s software validates both merchant and cardholder before any information is exchanged. The validation takes place by checking the digital certificates that were both issued by an authorized and trusted third party. In short, digital certificates ensure that two computers talking to each other may successfully conduct electronic commerce. 4.2.2.2 Firewall A firewall is simply a program or hardware device that filters the information coming through the Internet connection into your private network or computer system. If an incoming packet of information is flagged by the filters, it is not allowed through. Let’s say that you work at a company with 500 employees. The company will therefore have hundreds of computers that all have network cards connecting them together. In addition, the company will have one or more connections to the Internet through something like T1 or T3 lines. Without a firewall in place, all of those hundreds of computers are directly accessible to anyone on the Internet. A person who knows what he or she is doing can probe those computers, try to make FTP connections to them, try to make telnet connections to them and so on. If one employee makes a mistake and leaves a security hole, hackers can get to the machine and exploit the hole. With a firewall in place, the landscape is much different. A company will place a firewall at every connection to the Internet (for example, at every T1 line coming into the
227

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

company). The firewall can implement security rules. For example, one of the security rules inside the company might be: Out of the 500 computers inside this company, only one of them is permitted to receive public FTP traffic. Allow FTP connections only to that one computer and prevent them on all others. A company can set up rules like this for FTP servers, Web servers, Telnet servers and so on. In addition, the company can control how employees connect to Web sites, whether files are allowed to leave the company over the network and so on. A firewall gives a company tremendous control over how people use the network. Firewalls use one or more of three methods to control traffic flowing in and out of the network:  Packet filtering - Packets (small chunks of data) are analyzed against a set of filters. Packets that make it through the filters are sent to the requesting system and all others are discarded. Proxy service - Information from the Internet is retrieved by the firewall and then sent to the requesting system and vice versa. Stateful inspection - A newer method that doesn’t examine the contents of each packet but instead compares certain key parts of the packet to a database of trusted information.

 

Information travelling from inside the firewall to the outside is monitored for specific defining characteristics, then incoming information is compared to these characteristics. If the comparison yields a reasonable match, the information is allowed through. Otherwise it is discarded 4.2.3 Creating a Secure System It’s a known saying Prevention is the best medicine and this implies equally well to compute security. The” first step is to keep the security of your data files such that only the right people can see them. This is especially crucial for any of the following types of data and files.   User passwords Billing files
228 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

    

System and user logs Credit card information Trusted remote system information Compiler Administration tools

NOTES

User passwords and usage logs should be kept secure to keep pirate from looking at those files to figure out how to gain further access to your system. Keeping your password files shadowed or hidden keeps pirates from remotely acquiring your file and then running password cracking programs on the file in their own time. Finally, be sure to protect administration tools as well as compiler. General users to your system should not have access to these tools because, if they fall into wrong hands, the tools can be used to create programs that aid the pirate in greasing security.” 4.2.4 Storing Secure Information The most insure part of the Internet is not the Net itself but the source and destination of users and computers on the net. As the user of the system, you should know the place and the method to store your data. When you are connected to the network your personal system is vulnerable. Because of the nature slip type connectivity and TCP/IP networks, someone else could be probing your system while you are working. Decrypted data residing on your hard disk may be available to outside for snooping. As server and browser security increases almost pirates will be driven to breaking into the system at the source or at the destination. This information of-course applies equally to the both the user and the storeowner. Storeowners must ensure that product information database is secure. Again store owners should ensure that they encrypt archived transactions, as well as transactions in the process of being fulfilled. If a business can afford only lesser security then the best you can do is keep permissions of files hidden from pirates. One of the best security measures that you can take for physically stored data is to have hardware password protection. Many commercial products provide this facility and often work well to keep the data secure. Another security measure is to delete the not required data or information. Simply deleting the information is not enough. Pirates can easily undelete previously deleted information. They can even unformatted a formatted disk after securely deleting file defrayment your drive using any popular disk utility. Such program ensures that the original structure of the disk is recognized leaving no recoverable data. The best solution is to use
229 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

programs like the Defense Departments recommended secure delete program. Such programs are available in software archives throughout the Internet. Before marking the file as deleted, such programs first write repeating sequences of bits to each bit within the file. This ensures that magnetic particles are mixed several times so that traces of data are not readable. Another type of pirating is also done by using, the electromagnetic emissions that come from the monitors. In the early age of computing, programmers could debug programs by turning on a radio and placing it near the computer. The internal clock speed of the computer would oscillate like the radio stations. So they could hear the programming sequence running on the computer. The programmers soon learn how to interpret the different sound frequencies to determine what was happening in their program. A type of technology and research called TEMPEST is available that can reverse this electromagnetic radiation into a reasonable reproduction of the original information. The degree of security for computer connected Into Internet, depends upon the requirements and cost. Every one should take the basic measures of creating secure passwords, not leaving printouts laying around, and keeping hard” Yare secure. One should encrypt sensitive data that sent over the Internet. The basic measures should be enough to cover the average security standards for the company. But monitor the system in, regular intervals. If security breaches are encounter, more sophisticated security measures should be implemented. Particularly, the companies are vulnerable those are involved in national security or those that have such companies as clients.

230

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.3 ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER 4.3.1 What is EFT? An electronic funds transfer (also known as EFT) is a system for transferring money from one bank to another without using paper money. Its use has become widespread with the arrival of personal computers, cheap networks, improved cryptography and the Internet. Since it is affected by financial fraud, the electronic funds transfer act was implemented. This federal law protects the consumer in case a problem arises at the moment of the transaction. The history electronic funds transfer originated from the common funds transfer of the past. Since the 19th century, and with the help of telegraphs, funds transfers were an usual thing in commercial transactions. Finally, it migrated itself to computers and became the electronic money transfers of today. 4.3.2 Where do we find EFT? One of the most common EFT’s is Direct Deposit. It is used by employers for depositing their employees’ salary in a bank account. Other kind of EFT is the automatic charge to your check or savings account. For example, when you are paying a mortgage, the bank will discharge the monthly payment from a pre-accorded bank account. The benefit is that you won’t have to go to the bank to do it. It’s automatic. ATM’s are also used for EFT’s. Since an automatic teller machine is much cheaper than a group of bank tellers, it has helped to bring costs down and beneficiate the costumer. Points of sale (also known as POS) are also part of this group. Those little blue or dark blue machines in which you pass your card are doing an electronic fund transfer from your account to the retail account. 4.3.3 Advantages of EFT: The main advantage of an electronic funds transfer is time. Since all the transaction is done automatically and electronically, the bank doesn’t need to pay a person to do it, a
231

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

person to drive the loans to the other bank, the cost of the transport, the cost of the maintenance of the transport, insurance and the gas of the transport. EFT’s have revolutionized modern banking. Other benefit is immediate payment, which brings an up to date cash flow. You won’t hear either about lost checks causes by the inefficiency of normal mail (nowadays known as snail mail for its velocity compared to emails) and up to date bookkeeping. 4.3.4 Electronic Funds Transfers Initiated By Third Parties. You may authorize a third party to initiate electronic funds transfers between your account and the third party’s account. These transfers to make or receive payment may be one-time occurrences or may recur as directed by you. These transfers may use the Automated Clearinghouse (ACH) or other payments network. Your authorization to the third party to make these transfers can occur in a number of ways. In some cases, your authorization can occur when the merchant posts a sign informing you of their policy. In all cases, the transaction will require you to provide the third party with your account number and bank information. This information can be found on your check as well as on a deposit or withdrawal slip. Thus, you should only provide your bank and account information (whether over the phone, the Internet, or via some other method) to trusted third parties whom you have authorized to initiate these electronic funds transfers. Examples of these transfers include, but are not limited to:    Preauthorized credits. You may make arrangements for certain direct deposits to be accepted into your checking or savings account(s). Preauthorized payments. You may make arrangements to pay certain recurring bills from your checking account(s). Electronic check conversion. You may provide your check to a merchant or service provider who will scan the check for the encoded bank and account information. The merchant or service provider will then use this information to convert the transaction into an electronic funds transfer. This may occur at the point of purchase, or when you provide your check by other means such as by mail or drop box. Electronic returned check charge. Some merchants or service providers will initiate an electronic funds transfer to collect a charge in the event a check is returned for insufficient funds.
232 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI



E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Limitations on frequency of transfers section regarding limitations that apply to savings accounts. ATM Transfers – types of transfers and dollar limitations – You may access your account(s) by ATM using your MasterMoney®  card and personal identification number to:     make deposits to checking account(s) with a check card get cash withdrawals from checking with a check card transfer funds from checking to money market account(s) with a check card get information about the account balance of your checking account(s) with a check card.

NOTES

Some of these services may not be available at all terminals. Currency Conversion. If you effect a transaction with your MasterMoney® Card in a currency other than US Dollars. MasterCard International Incorporated will convert the charge into a US dollar amount. MasterCard International will use its currency conversion procedure, which is disclosed to institutions that issue MasterCard cards. Currently, the conversion rate used by MasterCard International to determine the transaction amount in US dollars for such transactions is generally either a government mandated rate or a wholesale rate determined by MasterCard International for the processing cycle in which the transaction is processed , increased by an adjustment factor established from time to time by MasterCard International. The currency conversion rate used by MasterCard International on the processing date may differ from the rate that would have been used on the purchase date or cardholder statement posting date. Advisory Against Illegal Use. You agree not to use your card(s) for illegal gambling or other illegal purpose. Display of a payment card logo by, for example an online merchant does not necessarily meant that transactions are lawful in all jurisdictions in which the cardholder may be located.

233

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Computer Transfer – types of transfers – You may access your account(s) by computer through the internet by logging onto our website at firststarbank.com and using your user identification number, your password, and a secure web browser, to:            transfer funds from checking to checking transfer funds from checking to money market transfer funds from money market to checking transfer funds from money market to money market transfer funds from line of credit to checking transfer funds from line of credit to money market make payments from checking to third parties make payments from checking or money market to loan account(s) with us get information about: the account balance of checking account(s) the account balance of money market account(s)

Limitations on frequency of transfers. In addition to those limitations on transfers elsewhere described, if any, the following limitations apply:  Transfers from a money market account to another account or to third parties by preauthorized, automatic, telephone, or computer transfer are limited to six per month with no more than three by check, draft, or similar order to third parties. For security reasons, there are other limits on the number of transfers and dollar amount you can make by check card.



FINANCIAL INSTITUTION’S LIABILITY       Liability for failure to make transfers. If we do not complete a transfer to or from your account on time or in the correct amount according to our agreement with you, we will be liable for your losses or damages. However, there are some exceptions. We will not be liable, for instance:

234

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

(1)       If, through no fault of ours, you do not have enough money in your account to make the transfer. (2)       If you have an overdraft line and the transfer would go over the credit limit. (3)       If the automated teller machine where you are making the transfer does not have enough cash. (4)       If the terminal or system was not working properly and you knew about the breakdown when you started the transfer. (5)       If circumstances beyond our control (such as fire or flood) prevent the transfer, despite reasonable precautions that we have taken. (6)       There may be other exceptions stated in our agreement with you. CONFIDENTIALITY We will disclose information to third parties about your account or the transfers you make: (1) (2) (3) (4) where it is necessary for completing transfers; or in order to verify the existence and condition of your account for a third party, such as credit bureau or merchant; or in order to comply with government agency or court orders; or as explained in the separate Privacy Disclosure.

NOTES

4.3.5 Online Catalogs Online catalogs provide easy access to product information. Consumers are benefited because they are able to obtain detailed, up to the minute information about a wide range of products over the Internet, without having to endure the inconvenience of visiting a showroom. For assisted selling, a valuable tool is a marketing encyclopedia, an intelligent electronic catalog that connects sales representatives and customers to a company’s most current product and service information. It provides a single point of entry for harnessing and distributing all product information. Product managers can update information in the database and immediately broadcast the changes throughout the enterprise. Some critical requirements of any marketing encyclopedia are the ability to easily create and maintain a repository of product information; the ability to create multiple search mechanisms to assist in locating information; and the ability to alert sales representatives and customers to bundled products and services, promotions, and complementary products.

235

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

4.3.6 Intelligent Agents The Intelligent agent is software that assists people and acts on their behalf. Intelligent agents work by allowing people to delegate work that they could have done, to the agent software. Agents can, just as assistants can, automate repetitive tasks, remember things the user might have forgotten, intelligently summarize complex data, learn from the user and even make recommendations to the user. In addition to making recommendations to the user, the agents can also make decisions and perform actions based on those decisions. One typical use of the intelligent agent may be found in the exploration of data on the Internet. The Internet can be viewed as a large distributed Information resource, with connecting systems that are designed and implemented by many different organizations with various goals and agendas. The growth of the Internet and correspondingly the vast amount of Information it holds, presents a problem to the users-information overload. This causes a problem of locating the relevant information. As a result much of the information is discarded and processed in a sub optimal manner. The agent technology may help the user by helping the user get around this problem. In times to come it is hoped that agent technology can enhance the feature of electronic commerce by efficiently matching buyers and sellers.

236

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Intelligent Agent Computing Agent Three primary dimensions of the agents have been defined: agency, intelligence and mobility. 1. Agency: The degree of autonomous action that can me taken; that is actions performed without the need for direct human intervention or intervention by other agents. The agents should have control over the actions performed within its system, i.e., not have actions performed by other agents. Other agents can request actions, but the agent itself decides whether to approve and allow the action. 2. Intelligence: The extent to which an agent can understand its own internal state and its external environment. The level of intelligence is further classified according to its ability to respond, to adapt and to take initiative. 3. Respond: Agents should perceive and respond to their environments. 4.4 CREDIT CARD BASED-ELECTRONIC PAYMENT SYSTEM 4.4.1 What is credit card? A credit card is a system of payment named after the small plastic card issued to users of the system. A credit card is different from a debit card in that it does not remove money from the user’s account after every transaction. In the case of credit cards, the issuer lends money to the consumer (or the user) to be paid to the merchant. It is also different from a charge card (though this name is sometimes used by the public to describe credit cards), which requires the balance to be paid in full each month. 4.4.2 Secured credit cards A secured credit card is a type of credit card secured by a deposit account owned by the cardholder. Typically, the cardholder must deposit between 100% and 200% of the total amount of credit desired. Thus if the cardholder puts down Rs. 1000, he or she will be given credit in the range of Rs. 500–Rs. 1000. In some cases, credit card issuers will offer incentives even on their secured card portfolios. In these cases, the deposit required may be significantly less than the required credit limit, and can be as low as 10% of the
237

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

desired credit limit. This deposit is held in a special savings account. Credit card issuers offer this as they have noticed that delinquencies were notably reduced when the customer perceives he has something to lose if he doesn’t repay his balance. The cardholder of a secured credit card is still expected to make regular payments, as he or she would with a regular credit card, but should he or she default on a payment, the card issuer has the option of recovering the cost of the purchases paid to the merchants out of the deposit. The advantage of the secured card for an individual with negative or no credit history is that most companies report regularly to the major credit bureaus. This allows for building of positive credit history. Although the deposit is in the hands of the credit card issuer as security in the event of default by the consumer, the deposit will not be debited simply for missing one or two payments. Usually the deposit is only used as an offset when the account is closed, either at the request of the customer or due to severe delinquency (150 to 180 days). This means that an account which is less than 150 days delinquent will continue to accrue interest and fees, and could result in a balance which is much higher than the actual credit limit on the card. In these cases the total debt may far exceed the original deposit and the cardholder not only forfeits their deposit but is left with an additional debt. Most of these conditions are usually described in a cardholder agreement which the cardholder signs when their account is opened. Secured credit cards are an option to allow a person with a poor credit history or no credit history to have a credit card which might not otherwise be available. They are often offered as a means of rebuilding one’s credit. Secured credit cards are available with both Visa and MasterCard logos on them. Fees and service charges for secured credit cards often exceed those charged for ordinary non-secured credit cards, however, for people in certain situations, (for example, after charging off on other credit cards, or people with a long history of delinquency on various forms of debt), secured cards can often be less expensive in total cost than unsecured credit cards, even including the security deposit. 4.4.2.1 Security Overview Credit card security is based on privacy of the actual credit card number. This means that whenever a person other than the card owner reads the number, security is
238 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

potentially compromised. Since this happens most of the time when a transaction is made, security is low. However, a user with access to just the number can only make certain types of transactions. Merchants will often accept credit card numbers without extra verification for mail order, but then the delivery address will be recorded, so the thief must make sure he can have the goods delivered to an anonymous address (i.e. not his own) and collect them without being detected. Some merchants will accept a credit card number for in-store purchases, whereupon access to the number allows easy fraud, but many require the card itself to be present, and require a signature. Thus, a stolen card can be cancelled, and if this is done quickly, no fraud can take place in this way. For internet purchases, there is sometimes the same level of security as for mail order (number only) hence requiring only that the fraudster take care about collecting the goods, but often there are additional measures. The main one is to require a security PIN with the card, which requires that the thief have access to the card. 4.4.2.2 Credit card numbering The numbers found on credit cards have a certain amount of internal structure, and share a common numbering scheme. The card number’s prefix, called the Bank Identification Number, is the sequence of digits at the beginning of the number that determine the bank to which a credit card number belongs. This is the first six digits for MasterCard and Visa cards. The next nine digits are the individual account number, and the final digit is a validity check code. In addition to the main credit card number, credit cards also carry issue and expiration dates (given to the nearest month), as well as extra codes such as issue numbers and security codes. Not all credit cards have the same sets of extra codes nor do they use the same number of digits. 4.4.3 Credit cards in ATMs Many credit cards can also be used in an ATM to withdraw money against the credit limit extended to the card but many card issuers charge interest on cash advances before they do so on purchases. The interest on cash advances is commonly charged from the date the withdrawal is made, rather than the monthly billing date. Many card issuers levy a commission for cash withdrawals, even if the ATM belongs to the same bank as the
239

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

card issuer. Merchants do not offer cash back on credit card transactions because they would pay a percentage commission of the additional cash amount to their bank or merchant services provider, thereby making it uneconomical. Many credit card companies will also, when applying payments to a card, do so at the end of a billing cycle, and apply those payments to everything before cash advances. For this reason, many consumers have large cash balances, which have no grace period and incur interest at a rate that is (usually) higher than the purchase rate, and will carry those balances for years, even if they pay off their statement balance each month. 4.4.4 Credit Card payment-online networks We can break credit card payment on on-line networks into three basic categories: 1. Payments using plain credit card details. The easiest method of payment is the exchange of unencrypted credit cards over a public network such as telephone lines or the Internet. The low level of security inherent in the design of the Internet makes this method problematic (any snooper can read a credit card number, and programs can be created to scan the Internet traffic for credit card numbers and send the numbers to its master). Authentication is also a significant problem, and the vendor is usually responsible to ensure that the person using the credit card is its owner. Without encryption there is no way to do this. 2. Payments using encrypted credit card details. It would make sense to encrypt your credit card details before sending them out, but even then there are certain factors to consider. One would be the cost of a credit card transaction itself. Such cost would prohibit low-value payments (micro payments) by adding costs to the transactions. 3. Payments using third-party verification. One solution to security and verification problems is the introduction of a third party: a company that collects and approves payments from one client to another. After a certain period of time, one credit card transaction for the total accumulated amount is completed.
240 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.4.5 Encryption and Credit Cards Encryption is instantiated when credit card information is entered into a browser or other electronic commerce device and sent securely over the net-work from buyer to seller as an encrypted message. This practice, however, does not meet important requirements for an adequate financial system, such as non refutability, speed, safety, privacy, and security. To make a credit card transaction truly secure and non-refutable, the following sequence of steps must occur before actual goods, services, or funds flow: 1. A customer presents his or her credit card information (along with an authenticity signature or other information such as mother’s maiden name) securely to the merchant. The merchant validates the customer’s identity as the owner of the cred-it card account. The merchant relays the credit card charge information and signature to its bank or on-line credit card processors. The bank or processing party relays the information tot the customer’s; bank for authorization approval. The customer’s bank returns the credit card data, charge authentication, and authorization to the merchant.

NOTES

2. 3. 4. 5.

In this scheme, each consumer and each vendor generates a public key and a secret key. The public key is sent to the credit card company and put on its public key server. The secret key is re-encrypted with a password, and the unencrypted version is erased. To steal a credit card, a thief would have to get access to both a consumer’s encrypted secret key and password. The credit card company sends the consumer a credit card number and a credit limit. To buy something from vendor X, the consumer sends vendor X the message, ‘It is now time T. I am paying Y dollars to X for item Z,” then the consumer uses his or her password to sign the message with the public key. The vendor will then sign the message with its own secret key and send it to the credit card company, which will bill the consumer for Y dollars and give the same amount (less a fee) to X. (See Fig.4.4.5(a) Nobody can cheat this system. The consumer can’t claim that he didn’t agree to the transaction, because he signed it (as in everyday life). The vendor can’t invent fake charges, because he doesn’t have access to the consumer’s key. He can’t submit the same charge twice, because the consumer included the precise time in the message. To become useful, credit Card systems will have to develop distributed key
241 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

servers and card checkers. Otherwise, a con-centrated attack on these sites could bring the system to a halt. Support for Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) and Pretty Good Privacy (PGP) encryption has been built into several browsers. Both of these schemes can be substantially bolstered with the addition of encryption to defeat snooping attacks. Now any vendor can create a secure system that accepts credit card numbers in about an hour.

Figure 4.4.5(a) Processing payments using encrypted credit cards 4.4.6 Advantages and Disadvantage of credit cards: Consumers use credit cards by presenting them for payment and then paying an aggregate bill once a month. Consumers pay either by flat fee or individual transaction charges for this service. Merchants get paid for the credit card drafts that they submit to the credit card company. Businesses get charged a transaction charge ranging from 1 percent to 3 percent for each draft submitted.

242

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT



Credit cards have advantages over checks in that the credit card company assumes a larger share of financial risk for both buyer and seller in a transaction. Buyers can sometimes dispute a charge retroactively and have the credit card company act on their behalf. Sellers are ensured that they will be paid for all their sales—they needn’t worry about fraud. One disadvantage to credit cards is that their transactions are not anonymous, and credit card companies do in fact compile valuable data about spending habits. Record keeping with credit cards is one of the features consumers value most because of disputes and mistakes in billing. Disputes may arise because different services may have different policies. For example, an information provider might charge for partial delivery of a file (the user may have abandoned the session after reading part of the file), and a movie distributor might charge depending on how much of the video had been downloaded. The cause of interrupted delivery needs to be considered in resolving disputes (e.g., intentional customer action versus a problem in the network or provider’s equipment). In general, implementing payment policies will be simpler when payment is made by credit rather than with cash. The complexity of credit card processing takes place in the verification phase, a potential bottleneck. If there is a lapse in time between the charging and the delivery of goods or services (for example, when an airline ticket is purchased well in advance of the date of travel), the customer verification process is simple because it does not have to be done in real time. In fact, all the relaying and authorizations can occur after the customer-merchant transaction is completed, unless the authorization request is denied. If the customer wants a report (or even a digital airline ticket), which would be downloaded into a PC or other information appliance immediately at the time of purchase, however, many message relays and authorizations take place in real time while the customer waits. Such exchanges may require many sequence-specific operations such as staged encryption and decrying and exchanges of cryptographic keys. Encryption and transaction speed must be balanced, however, as research has show that on-line users get very impatient and typically wait for 20 seconds before pursuing other actions. Hence, on-line credit card users must find the process to be accessible, simple, and fast. Speed will have design and cost implications, as it is a function of network capabilities, computing power, available at every server, and the specific form of the transaction. The infrastructure supporting the exchange must be reliable. The user must feel confident that the supporting payment
243

NOTES

 





ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

infrastructure will be available on demand and that the system will operate reasonably well regardless of component failures or system load conditions. The builders and providers of this infrastructure are aware of customer requirements and are in fierce competition to fulfill those needs. 4.4.7 Infrastructure for On-Line Credit Card Processing Competition among these players is based on service quality, price, processing system speed, customer support, and reliability. Most third-party processors market their services directly to large regional or national merchants rather than through financial institutions or independent sales organizations . Barriers to entry include (1) (2) (3) (4) large initial capital requirements, ongoing expenses related to establishing and maintaining an electronic transaction processing network, the ability to obtain competitively priced access to an existing network, and the reluctance of merchants to change processors. What exactly is at stake here? A lot. In the emerging world of ecommerce,, the companies that own the transaction infrastructure will be able to charge a fee, much as banks do today with ATMs. This could be extremely profitable. Microsoft, VISA, and other companies understand that they have to do something. If they wait for a clear path to emerge, it will be “too little too late.” They know all too well that ecommerce transaction architectures (similar to MS-DOS or Windows) on which other e-commerce applications are developed will be very profitable.

Many companies are developing advanced electronic services for home-based financial transactions, and software companies are increasingly allying with banks to sell home banking. Eventually, the goal would be to offer everything from mutual funds to brokerage services over the network. Many banks are concerned about this prospect and view it as an encroachment on their turf. After years of dabbling, mostly unsuccessfully, with remote banking, banking is receiving a jarring message: Get wired or lose customers. The traditional roles are most definitely being reshuffled, and electronic payment on the Internet can have a substantial effect on transaction processing in the “real” (non
244 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

electronic) world. According to some estimates, trans-action processing services account, for as much as 25 percent of non interest income for banks, so banks clearly stand to lose business. Why banks are on the defensive is obvious if we look at banking in the last ten years. A decade ago, banks processed 90 percent of all bank card transactions, such as VISA and MasterCard. Today, 70 percent of those transactions are processed by nonbanks such as First Data Resources. If software companies and other interlopers become electronic toll-takers, banks could become mere homes for deposits, not the providers of lucrative value-added services. Even more worrisome, banks could lose the all-important direct link to be the customer’s primary provider of financial services that lets them hawk profitable services. The effect of electronic commerce on the banking industry has been one of total confusion. To be fair, things are happening so fast in this area that it’s hard to keep up with it all. 4.4.8 Risks from Mistake and Disputes: Consumer Protection Virtually all electronic payment systems need some ability to keep automatic records, for obvious reasons. From a technical standpoint, this is no problem for electronic systems. Credit and debit cards have them and even the paper-based check creates an automatic record. Once information has been captured electronically, it is easy and inexpensive to keep (it might even cost more to throw it away than to keep it). For example, in many transaction processing systems, old or blocked accounts are never purged and old transaction histories can be kept forever on magnetic tape. Given the intangible nature of electronic transactions and dispute resolution relying solely on records, a general law of payment dynamics and banking technology might be: No data need ever be discarded. The record feature is an after-the-fact transcription of what happened, created without any explicit effort by the transaction parties. Features of these automatic records include (1) (2) (3) (4) permanent storage; accessibility and traceability; a payment system database; and data transfer to payment maker, bank, or monetary authorities.

NOTES

The need for record keeping for purposes of risk management conflicts with the transaction anonymity of cash. One can say that anonymity exists today only because cash is a very old concept, invented long before the computer and networks gave us the ability to track everything. Although a segment of the payment-making public will always desire
245 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

transaction anonymity, many believe that anonymity runs counter to the public welfare because too many tax, smuggling, and/or money laundering possibilities exist. The anonymity issue raises the question: Can electronic payments hap-pen without an automatic record feature? Many recent payment systems seem to be ambivalent on this point. For instance, the Mondex electronic purse touts equivalence with cash, but its electronic wallets are designed to hold automatic records of the card’s last twenty transactions with a statement built in. Obviously, the card-reading terminals, machines, or telephones could all maintain records of all transactions and they probably ultimately will. With these records, the balance on any smart card could be reconstructed after the fact, thus allowing for additional protection against loss or theft. This would certainly add some value versus cash. In sum, anonymity is an issue that will have to be addressed through regulation covering consumer protection in electronic transactions. There is considerable debate on this point. An anonymous payment system without automatic record keeping will be difficult for bankers and governments to accept. Were the regulation to apply, each transaction would have to be reported, meaning it would appear on an account statement making mistakes and disputes easier to resolve. However, customers might feel that all this record keeping is an invasion of privacy resulting in slower than expected adoption of electronic payment systems. The next risk involved is the privacy of the customer making a purchase. Managing Information Privacy The electronic payment system must ensure and maintain privacy. Every time one purchases goods using a credit card, subscribes to a magazine or accesses a server, that information goes into, a database somewhere. Furthermore, all these records can be linked so that they constitute in effect a single dossier. This dossier would reflect what items were bought and where and when. This violates one the unspoken laws of doing business: that the privacy of customers should be protected as much as possible. All details of a consumer’s payments can be easily be aggregated: Where, when, and sometimes what the consumer buys is stored. This collection of data tells much about the person and as such can conflict with the individual’s right to privacy. Users must be assured that knowledge of transactions will be confidential, limited only to the parties involved and their designated agents (if any).Privacy must be maintained against eavesdroppers on the network and against unauthorized insiders. The users must be assured that they cannot be easily duped, swindled, or falsely implicated in a fraudulent transaction. This protection must apply throughout the
246 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

whole transaction protocol by which a good or service is purchased and delivered. This implies that, for many types of transactions, trusted third-party agents will be needed to vouch for the authenticity and good faith of the involved parties.. Managing Credit Risk Credit or systemic risk is a major concern in net settlement systems because a bank’s failure to settle its net position could lead to a chain reaction of bank failures. The digital central bank must develop policies to deal with this possibility. Various alternatives exist, each with advantages and disadvantages. A digital central bank guarantee on settlement removes the insolvency test from the system because banks will more readily assume credit risks from other banks. Without such guarantees the development of clearing and settlement systems and money markets-may be impeded. A middle road is also possible, for example, setting controls on bank exposures (bilateral or multilateral) and requiring collateral. If the central bank does not guarantee settlement, it must define, at least internally, the conditions and terms for extending liquidity to banks in connection with settlement. Despite cost and efficiency gains, many hurdles remain to the spread of electronic payment systems. 4.5 Debit card based-Electronic Payment System 4.5.1 What is a debit card? A debit card (also known as a gift card) is a plastic card which provides an alternative payment method to cash when making purchases. Physically the card is an ISO 7810 card like a credit card; however, its functionality is more similar to writing a cheque as the funds are withdrawn directly from either the cardholder’s bank account (often referred to as a check card), or from the remaining balance on the card. Depending on the store or merchant, the customer may swipe or insert their card into the terminal, or they may hand it to the merchant who will do so. The transaction is authorized and processed and the customer verifies the transaction either by entering a PIN or, occasionally, by signing a sales receipt. In some countries the debit card is multipurpose, acting as the ATM card for withdrawing cash and as a check guarantee card. Merchants can also offer “cashback”/
247

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

”cashout” facilities to customers, where a customer can withdraw cash along with their purchase. The use of debit cards has become wide-spread in many countries and has overtaken the check, and in some instances cash transactions by volume. Like credit cards, debit cards are used widely for telephone and Internet purchases. 4.5.2 Types of debit card A Finnish smart card. The 3 by 5 mm security chip embedded in the card is shown enlarged in the inset. The gold contact pads on the card enable electronic access to the chip. An example of the front of a typical debit card: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Issuing bank logo EMV chip Hologram Card number Card brand logo Expiry date Cardholder’s name

An example of the reverse side of a typical debit card: 1. 2. 3. Magnetic stripe Signature strip Card Security Code

Although many debit cards are of the Visa or MasterCard brand, there are many other types of debit card, each accepted only within a particular country or region, for example Switch (now: Maestro) and Solo in the United Kingdom, Carte Bleue in France, Laser in Ireland, “EC electronic cash” (formerly Eurocheck) in Germany and EFTPOS cards in Australia and New Zealand. The need for cross-border compatibility and the advent of the euro recently led to many of these card networks (such as Switzerland’s “EC direkt”, Austria’s “Bankomatkasse” and Switch in the United Kingdom) being rebranded
248 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

with the internationally recognised Maestro logo, which is part of the MasterCard brand. Some debit cards are dual branded with the logo of the (former) national card as well as Maestro (e.g. EC cards in Germany, Laser cards in Ireland, Switch and Solo in the UK, Pinpas cards in the Netherlands, Bancontact cards in Belgium, etc.). Debit card systems have become popular in video arcades, bowling centers and theme parks. The use of a debit card system allows operators to package their product more effectively while monitoring customer spending. An example of one of these systems is ECS by Embed International. 4.5.3 Online and offline debit transactions Typical debit card transaction machine, branded to McDonalds. There are currently two ways that debit card transactions are processed: online debit (also known as PIN debit) and offline debit (also known as signature debit). In some countries including the United States and Australia, they are often referred to at point of sale as “debit” and “credit” respectively, even though in either case the user’s bank account is debited and no credit is involved. Online debit (“PIN debit” or “debit”) Online debit cards require electronic authorization of every transaction and the debits are reflected in the user’s account immediately. The transaction may be additionally secured with the personal identification number (PIN) authentication system and some online cards require such authentication for every transaction, essentially becoming enhanced automatic teller machine (ATM) cards. One difficulty in using online debit cards is the necessity of an electronic authorization device at the point of sale (POS) and sometimes also a separate PINpad to enter the PIN, although this is becoming commonplace for all card transactions in many countries. Overall, the online debit card is generally viewed as superior to the offline debit card because of its more secure authentication system and live status, which alleviates problems with processing lag on transactions that may have been forgotten or not authorized by the owner of the card. Banks in some countries, such as Canada and Brazil, only issue online debit cards.

NOTES

249

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Offline debit (“signature debit” or “credit”) Offline debit cards have the logos of major credit cards (e.g. Visa or MasterCard) or major debit cards (e.g. Maestro in the United Kingdom and other countries, but not the United States) and are used at point of sale like a credit card. This type of debit card may be subject to a daily limit, as well as a maximum limit equal to the amount currently deposited in the current/checking account from which it draws funds. Offline debit cards in the United States and some other countries are not compatible with the PIN system, in which case they can be used with a forged signature, since users are rarely required to present identification. Transactions conducted with offline debit cards usually require 2-3 days to be reflected on users’ account balances. 4.5.4 Advantages and Disadvantages Debit and check cards, as they have become widespread, have revealed numerous advantages and disadvantages to the consumer and retailer alike. Advantages are as follows:  A consumer who is not credit worthy and may find it difficult or impossible to obtain a credit card can more easily obtain a debit card, allowing him/her to make plastic transactions. Use of a debit card is limited to the existing funds in the account to which it is linked, thereby preventing the consumer from racking up debt as a result of its use, or being charged interest, late fees, or fees exclusive to credit cards. For most transactions, a check card can be used to avoid check writing altogether. Check cards debit funds from the user’s account on the spot, thereby finalizing the transaction at the time of purchase, and bypassing the requirement to pay a credit card bill at a later date, or to write an insecure check containing the account holder’s personal information. Like credit cards, debit cards are accepted by merchants with less identification and scrutiny than personal checks, thereby making transactions quicker and less intrusive. Unlike personal checks, merchants generally do not believe that a payment via a debit card may be later dishonored. Unlike a credit card, which charges higher fees and interest rates when a cash advance is obtained, a debit card may be used to obtain cash from an ATM or a PIN-based transaction at no extra charge, other than a foreign ATM fee.









250

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The debit card has many disadvantages as opposed to cash or credit:  Some banks are now charging over-limit fees or non-sufficient funds fees based upon pre-authorizations, and even attempted but refused transactions by the merchant (some of which may not even be known by the client). Many merchants mistakenly believe that amounts owed can be “taken” from a customer’s account after a debit card (or number) has been presented, without agreement as to date, payee name, and dollar and cent amount, thus causing penalty fees for overdrafts, over-the-limit, amounts not available causing further rejections or overdrafts, and rejected transactions by some banks. Debit cards offer lower levels of security protection than credit cards. Theft of the users PIN using skimming devices can be accomplished much easier with a PIN input than with a signature-based credit transaction. When a transaction is made using a credit card, the bank’s money is being spent, and therefore, the bank has a vested interest in claiming its money where there is fraud or a dispute. The bank may fight to void the charges of a consumer who is dissatisfied with a purchase, or who has otherwise been treated unfairly by the merchant. But when a debit purchase is made, the consumer has spent his/her own money, and the bank has little if any motivation to collect the funds.  For certain types of purchases, such as gasoline, lodging, or car rental, the bank may place a hold on funds much greater than the actual purchase for a fixed period of time. Until the hold is released, any other transactions presented to the account, including checks, may be dishonored, or may be paid at the expense of an overdraft fee if the account lacks any additional funds to pay those items. While debit cards bearing the logo of a major credit card are accepted for virtually all transactions where an equivalent credit card is taken, a major exception is at car rental facilities. Car rental agencies require an actual credit card to be used, or at the very least, will verify the creditworthiness of the renter using a debit card. These companies will deny a rental to anyone who does not fit the requirements, and such a credit check may actually hurt one’s credit score.

NOTES









251

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

4.6 ELECTRONIC CHECKS 4.6.1 E-Checks Electronic checks are designed to accommodate the many individuals and entities that might prefer to pay on credit or through some mechanism other than cash. Electronic checks are modelled on paper checks, except that they are initiated electronically, use digital signatures for signing and endorsing, and require the use of digital certificates to authenticate the payer, the payer’s bank, and bank account. The security/authentication aspects of digital checks are supported via digital signatures using public-key cryptography. Ideally, electronic checks will facilitate new online services by: allowing new payment flows (the payee can verify funds availability at the payer’s bank); enhancing security at each step of the transaction through automatic validation of the electronic signature by each party (payee and banks); and facilitating payment integration with widely used EDI-based electronic ordering and billing processes. Electronic checks are delivered either by direct transmission using telephone lines, or by public networks such as the Internet. Electronic check payments (deposits) are gathered by banks and cleared through existing banking channels, such as automated clearing houses (ACH) networks. E-checks:       contain the same information as paper checks contain are based on the same rich legal framework as paper checks can be linked with unlimited information and exchanged directly between parties can be used in any and all remote transactions where paper checks are used today enhance the functions and features provided by bank checking accounts expand on the usefulness of paper checks by providing value-added information

4.6.2 Benefits of Electronic Checks Electronic checks have the following advantages:  Electronic checks work in the same way as traditional checks, thus simplifying customer education. By retaining the basic characteristics and flexibility of paper checks while enhancing the functionality, electronic checks can be easily understood and readily adopted.

252

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT





Electronic checks are well suited for clearing micro payments; the conventional cryptography of electronic checks makes them easier to process than systems based on public-key cryptography (like digital cash). The payee and the payee’s and payer’s banks can authenticate checks through the use of publickey certificates. Digital signatures can also be validated automatically. Electronic checks can serve corporate markets. Firms can use electronic checks to complete payments over the networks in a more cost-effective manner than present alternatives. Further, since the contents of a check can be attached to the trading partner’s remittance information, the electronic check will easily integrate with EDI applications, such as ac-counts receivable. Electronic checks create float, and the availability of float is an important requirement for commerce. The third-party accounting server can earn revenue by charging the buyer or seller a transaction fee or a flat rate fee, or it can act as a bank and provide deposit accounts and make money from the deposit account pool. Electronic check technology links public networks to the financial payments and bank clearing networks, leveraging the access of public net-works with the existing financial payments infrastructure.

NOTES

4.6.3 How do Electronic Check works? Electronic checks are another form of electronic tokens. They are designed to accommodate the many individuals and entities that might prefer to pay on credit or through some mechanism other than cash. Buyers must register with a third-party account server before they are able to write electronic checks. The account server also acts as a billing service. The registration procedure can vary depending on the particular account server and may require a credit card or a bank account to back the checks. Once registered, a buyer can then contact sellers of goods and services. To complete a transaction, the buyer sends a check to the seller for a certain amount of money. These checks may be sent using e-mail or other transport methods. When deposited, the check authorizes the transfer of account balances from the account against which the check was drawn to the account to which the check was deposited. The e-check method was deliberately created to work in much the same way as a conventional paper check. An account holder will issue an electronic document that contains the name of the payer, the name of the financial institution, the payer’s account
253 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

number, the name of the payee and amount of the check. Most of the information is in uncoded form. Like a paper check, an e-check will bear the digital equivalent of a signature: a computed number that authenticates the check as coming from the owner of the account. And, again like a paper check, an e-check will need to be endorsed by the payee, using another electronic signature, before the check can be paid. Properly signed and endorsed checks can be electronically exchanged between financial institutions through electronic clearinghouses, with the institutions using these endorsed checks as tender to settle accounts. The specifics of the technology work in the following manner: On receiving the check, the seller presents it to the accounting server for verification and payment. The accounting server verifies the digital signature on the check using any authentication scheme. A user’s digital “signature” is used to create one ticket-a checkwhich the seller’s digital “endorsement” transforms into another-an order to a bank computer for fund transfer. Subsequent endorsers add successive layers of information onto the tickets, precisely as a large number of banks may wind up stamping the back of a check along its journey through the system. 4.6.4 Why do we use e-checks? E-Checks have important new features. They offer:       the ability to conduct bank transactions, yet are safe enough to use on the Internet unlimited, but controlled, information carrying capability reduces fraud losses for all parties automatic verification of content and validity traditional checking features such as stop payments and easy reconciliation enhanced capabilities such as effective dating

The E-Check:  can be used by all account holders, large and small, even where other electronic payment solutions are too risky, or not appropriate  is the most secure payment instrument available today  provides rapid and secure settlement of financial obligations  can be used with existing checking accounts can be initiated from a variety of hardware platforms and software applications
254 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.6.5 Comparison with other payment instruments E-Check and Paper Checks The electronic check (e-Check) is an all-electronic enhancement to the paper check and is based on current check law. This white paper briefly compares paper and echecks, based on five categories: usage, cost, and allowance for errors, risk management, and information richness. E-checks and Debit cards Debit cards are used by individuals and to a far lesser extent by businesses, to make payments at the retail point-of-sale, or to obtain cash from ATMs. This white paper will briefly compare the differences between debit cards and e-checks. E-check and Automated Clearing House (ACH) Since electronic checks are debit transactions, this white paper provides a high level comparison of some of the main differences between the ACH debit system and echecks. These differences are reviewed in five main categories: terminology, business practices, underlying technology, transaction authorization, and risk management. E-check and Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) The SET protocol specifications were defined by the credit card industry to facilitate credit card purchases over the Internet. This white paper briefly compares the differences between SET and e-checks. E-check and Home Banking Home banking bill payments are convenient for consumers, and although they have some of the characteristics of electronic payments, there are significant differences between echecks and home banking bill payments. This white paper will briefly explore the differences between the two payment approaches.

NOTES

255

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

4.7 STORED VALUE CARDS AND E-CASH 4.7.1 Smart Cards Smart cards, also called stored value cards, use magnetic stripe technology or integrated circuit chips to store customer-specific information, including electronic money. The cards can be used to purchase goods or services, store information, control access to accounts, and perform many other functions. Smart cards offer clear benefits to both merchants and consumers. They reduce cash-handling expenses and losses caused by fraud, expedite customer transactions at the checkout counter, and enhance consumer convenience and safety. In addition, many state and federal governments are considering stored value cards as an efficient option for dispersing government entitlements. Other private sector institutions market stored value products to transit riders, university students, telephone customers, vending customers, and retail customers. One successful use of stored value cards is by New York’s Metropolitan Transportation Authority (MTA). The MTA is the largest transportation agency in the United States and, through its subsidiaries and affiliates, operates the New York City subway and public bus system, the Long Island Railroad and Metro-North commuter rail systems, and nine tolled intrastate bridges and tunnels. These facilities serve four million customers each workday. In 1994, the MTA began the operation of an automated fare-collection system based on a plastic card with a magnetic stripe. The MetroCard is either swiped through a card reader at subway stations or dipped into a fare box on buses where the fare is decremented. All 3,600 MTA buses became operational in 1996. The full complement of 467 subway stations is expected to be operational by mid-1997. By 1999, the MTA anticipates more than 1.2 billion electronic fare collection transactions a year on subway and bus lines. The management challenges created by smart card payment systems are formidable. Institutions such as the MTA have made a considerable investment in the stored value card processing network, and to get a good return on investment must identify new and innovative ways to achieve additional operating efficiencies and value. 4.7.2 Smart Cards and Electronic Payment Systems The enormous potential of electronic tokens is currently stunted by the lack of a widely accepted and secure means of transferring money on-line. In spite of the many prototypes developed, we are a long way from a universal payment system because
256 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

merchants and banks have to be signed up and a means has to be developed to transfer money. Such a system moreover must be robust and capable of handling a large number of transactions and will require extensive testing and usage to iron out all the bugs. In the meantime, thousands of would-be sellers of electronic commerce services have to pay one another and are actively looking for payment substitutes. One such substitute is the smart card. Smart cards have been in existence since the early 1980s and hold promise for secure transactions using existing infrastructure. Smart cards are credit and debit cards and other card products enhanced with microprocessors capable of holding more information than the traditional magnetic stripe. The chip, at its current state of development, can store significantly greater amounts of data, estimated to be 80 times more than a magnetic stripe. Industry observers have predicted that, by the year 2000, one-half of all payment cards issued in the world will have embedded microprocessors rather than the simple magnetic stripe. The smart card technology is widely used in countries such as France, Germany, Japan, and Singapore to pay for public phone calls, transportation/ and shopper loyalty programs. The idea has taken longer to catch on in the United States, since a highly reliable and fairly inexpensive telecommunications system has favored the use of credit and debit cards. Smart cards are basically of two types:   Relationship-based smart credit cards Electronic purses. Electronic purses, which replace money, are also known as debit cards and electronic money.

NOTES

4.7.2.1 Relationship-Based Smart Cards Financial institutions worldwide are developing new methods to maintain and expand their services to meet the needs of increasingly sophisticated and technically smart customers, as well as to meet the emerging payment needs of electronic commerce. Traditional credit cards are fast evolving into smart cards as consumers demand payment and financial services products that are user-friendly, convenient, and reliable. A relationshipbased smart card is an enhancement of existing card ser-vices and/or the addition of new services that a financial institution delivers to its customers via a chip-based card or other device. These new services may include access to multiple financial accounts, value-added marketing programs, or other information cardholders may want to store on their card.
257 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

The chip-based card is but one tool that will help alter mass marketing techniques to address each individual’s specific financial and personal requirements. Enhanced credit cards store cardholder information including name, birth date, personal shopping preferences, and actual purchase records. This information will enable merchants to accurately track consumer behavior and develop promotional programs designed to increase shopper loyalty. Relationship-based products are expected to offer consumers far greater options, including the following:    Access to multiple accounts, such as debit, credit, investments or stored value for e-cash, on one card or an electronic device A variety of functions, such as cash access, bill payment, balance inquiry, or funds transfer for selected accounts Multiple access options at multiple locations using multiple device types, such as an automated teller machine, a screen phone, a personal computer, a personal digital assistant (PDA), or interactive TVs Companies are trying to incorporate these services into a personalized banking relationship for each customer. They can package financial and non financial services with valueadded programs to enhance convenience, build loyalty and retention, and attract new customers. Banks are also attempting to customize services on smart cards, offering a menu of services similar to those that come up on ATM screens. As with credit cards/banks may link up with health care providers, telephone companies, retailers, and airlines to offer frequent shopping and flyer programs and other services.

4.7.2.2. Electronic Purses and Debit Cards Despite their increasing flexibility, relationship-based cards are credit based and settlement occurs at the end of the billing cycle. There remains a need for a financial instrument to replace cash. To meet this need, banks, credit card companies, and even government institutions are racing to introduce “electronic purses,” wallet-sized smart cards embedded with programmable microchips that store sums of money for people to use instead of cash for everything from buying food, to making photocopies, to paying subway fares. The electronic purse works in the following manner.

258

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

After the purse is loaded with money, at an ATM or through the use of an inexpensive special telephone, it can be used to pay for, say, candy in a vending machine equipped with a card reader. The vending machine need only verify that a card is authentic and there is enough money available for a chocolate bar. In one second, the value of the purchase is deducted from the balance on the card and added to an e-cash box in the vending machine. The remaining balance on the card is displayed by the vending machine or can be checked at an ATM or with a balance-reading device. Electronic purses would virtually eliminate fumbling for change or small bills in a busy store or rush-hour toll booth, and waiting for a credit card purchase to be approved. This allows customers to pay for rides and calls with a prepaid card that “remembers” each transaction. And when the balance on an electronic purse is depleted, the purse can be recharged with more money. As for the vendor, the receipts can be collected periodically in person—or, more likely, by telephone and transferred to a bank account. While the technology has been available for a decade, the cards have been relatively expensive, from $5 to $10. Today the cards cost $1, and special telephones that consumers could install at home to recharge the cards are projected to cost as little as $50. A simple card reader would cost a merchant less than $200. 4.7.3 Electronic or Digital Cash Electronic or digital cash combines computerized convenience with security and privacy that improve on paper cash. The versatility of digital cash opens up a host of new markets and applications. Digital cash attempts to replace paper cash as the principal payment vehicle in online payments. Although it may be surprising to some, even after thirty years of developments in electronic payment systems, cash is still the most prevalent consumer payment instrument. Cash remains the dominant form of payment for three reasons: o o o lack of consumer trust in the banking system; inefficient clearing and settlement of non-cash transactions; and negative real interest rates on bank deposits.

NOTES

These reasons behind the prevalent use of cash in business transactions indicate the need to re-engineer purchasing processes. In order to displace cash, electronic payment systems need to have some cash-like qualities that current credit and debit cards lack. For example, cash is negotiable, meaning that it can be given or traded to someone else. Cash
259 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

is legal tender, meaning that the payee is obligated to take it. Cash is a bearer instrument, meaning that possession is proof of ownership. Cash can be held and used by anyone, even those without a bank account. Finally, cash places no risk on the part of the acceptor; the medium is always good. In comparison to cash, debit and credit cards have a number of limitations. First, credit and debit cards cannot be given away because, technically, they are identification cards owned by the issuer and restricted to one user. Credit and debit cards are not legal tender, given that merchants ‘have the right to refuse to accept them. Nor are credit and debit cards bearer instruments; their usage requires an account relationship and authorization system. Similarly, checks require either personal knowledge of the payer, or a check guarantee system. A really novel electronic payment method needs to do more than recreate the convenience that is offered by credit and debit cards; it needs to create a form of digital cash that has some of the proper-ties of cash. 4.7.3.1 Properties of Electronic Cash o Digital cash must have a monetary value; it must be backed by cash (currency), bank-authorized credit, or a bank-certified cashier’s check. When digital cash created by one bank is accepted by others, reconciliation must occur without any problems. Without proper bank certification, digital cash carries the risk that when deposited, it might be returned for insufficient funds. Digital cash must be interoperable or exchangeable as payment for other digital cash, paper cash, goods or services, lines of credit, deposits in banking accounts, bank notes or obligations, electronic benefits transfers, and the like. Digital cash must be storable and retrievable. Remote storage and retrieval (such as via a telephone or personal communications device) would allow users to exchange digital cash (withdraw from and deposit into banking accounts) from home or office or while travelling. Digital cash should not be easy to copy or tamper with while it is being exchanged. It should be possible to prevent or detect duplication and doublespending of digital cash.

o

o

o

260

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.7.4 Using the Digital Currency Once the tokens are purchased, the e-cash software on the customer’s PC stores digital money undersigned by a bank. The user tan spend the digital-money of any shop accepting e-cash, without having to open an account there first or-having to transmit credit card numbers. As soon as the customer wants to make a payment, the software collects the necessary amount from the stored tokens. Two types of transactions are possible: bilateral and trilateral. Typically, transactions involving cash are bilateral or two-party (buyer and seller) transactions, whereby the merchant checks the veracity of the note’s digital signature by using the bank’s public key. If satisfied with the payment, the merchant stores the digital currency on his machine and deposits it later in the bank to redeem the face value of the note. Transactions involving financial instruments other than cash are usually trilateral or three-party (buyer, seller, and bank) transactions, whereby the “notes” are sent to the merchant, who immediately sends them directly to the digital bank. The bank verifies the validity of these “notes” and that they have not been spent before. The account of the merchant is credited. In this case, every “note” can be used only once. In many business situations, the bilateral transaction is not feasible because of the potential for double spending, which is equivalent to bouncing a check. Double spending becomes possible because it is very easy to make copies of the e-cash, forcing banks and merchants to take extra precautions. To uncover double spending, banks must compare the note passed to it by the merchant against a database of spent notes .Just as paper currency is identified with a unique serial number, digital cash can also be protected. The ability to detect double spending has to involve some form of registration so that all “notes” issued globally can be uniquely identified. However, this method of matching notes with a central registry has problems in the on-line world. For most systems, which handle high volumes of micro payments, this method would simply be too expensive. In addition, the problem of double spending means that banks have to carry added overhead because of the constant checking and auditing logs. (fig 4.7.4(a)) Double spending would not be a major problem if the need for anonymity were relaxed. In such situations, when the consumer is issued a bank note, it is issued to that person’s unique license. When he or she gives it to some-body else, it is transferred specifically to that other person’s license. Each time the money changes hands, the old owner adds a tiny bit of information to the bank note based on the bank note’s serial number and his or her license. If somebody attempts to spend money twice, the bank will
261

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

now be able to use the two bank notes to determine who the cheater is. Even if the bank notes pass through many different people’s hands, whoever cheated will get caught, and none of the other people will ever have to know. The downside is that the bank can tell precisely what your buying habits are since it can check the numbers on the e-cash and the various merchant accounts that are being credited. Many people would feel uncomfortable letting others know this personal information.

Figure 4.7.4(a) Detection of double spending

262

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.7.5 Drawback of E-cash One drawback of e-cash is its inability to be easily divided into smaller amounts. It is often necessary to get small denomination change in business transactions. A number of variations have been developed for dealing with the “change” problem. For the bank to issue users with enough separate electronic “coins” of various denominations would be cumbersome in communication and storage. So would a method that required payees to return extra change. To sidestep such costs, customers are issued a single number called an “open check” that contains multiple denomination values sufficient for transactions up to a prescribed limit. At payment time, the e-cash software on the client’s computer would create a note of the transaction value from the “open check.” 4.7.6 Business Issues and Electronic Cash Electronic cash fulfils two main functions: as a medium of exchange and as a store of value. Digital money is a perfect medium of exchange. By moving monetary claims quickly and by effecting instant settlement of transactions, e-cash may help simplify the complex interlocking credit and liabilities that characterize today’s commerce. For instance, small businesses that spend months waiting for big customers to pay their bills would benefit hugely from a digital system in which instant settlement is the norm. Instant settlement of micro payments is also a tantalizing proposition. The controversial aspects of e-cash are those that relate to the other role, as a store of value. Human needs tend to require that money take a tangible form and be widely accepted, or “legal tender”. In most countries, a creditor by law cannot refuse cash as settlement for a debt. With the acceptability of cash guaranteed by law, most people are willing to bank their money and settle many of their bills by checks and debits, confident that, barring a catastrophe, they can obtain legal tender (cash) on demand. If e-cash had to be convertible into legal tender on demand, then for every unit there would have to be a unit of cash reserved in the real economy: or, to look at it the other way round, there would be cash in the real world for which digital proxies were created and made available. This creates problems, because in an efficient system, if each e-cash unit represents a unit of real cash, then positive balances of e-cash will earn no interest; for the interest they might earn would be offset by the interest foregone on the real cash that is backing them. The enormous currency fluctuations in international finance pose another

NOTES

263

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

problem. On the Internet, the buyer could be in Mexico and the seller in the United States. How do you check-that the party in Mexico is giving a valid electronic currency that has suitable backing? Even if it were valid today, what would happen if a sudden devaluation occurs such as the one in December 1994 where the peso was devalued 30 percent overnight. Who holds the liability, the buyer or the seller? These are not technological issues but business issues that must be addressed for large-scale bilateral transactions to occur. Unless, we have one central bank offering one type of electronic currency, it is very difficult to see e-cash being very prominent except in narrow application domains. From a banker’s point of view, e-cash would be a mixed blessing. Because they could not create new money via lending in the digital world, banks would see electronic money as unproductive. They might charge for converting it, or take a transaction fee for issuing it, but on-line competition would surely make this a low-profit affair. In the short term, banks would probably make less from this new business than they would lose from the drift of customers away from traditional services. It seems unlikely that e-cash would be allowed to realize its potential for bypassing the transaction costs of the foreign exchange market. If you pay yen for e-cash in Osaka and buy something from a merchant based in New York who cashes them for francs, a currency conversion has taken place. That, however, is an activity toward which most governments feel highly defensive; and if e-cash started to bypass regulated foreign exchange markets by developing its own gray market for settlement, then governments might be provoked into trying to clamp down on it. Because of these obstacles, e-cash in its early forms may be denominated in single currencies and exchanged at conventional market rates. Next we will see the risks involved while doing the transactions involving the use of e-cash. 4.7.7 Operational Risk and Electronic Cash Operational risk associated with e-cash can be mitigated by imposing constraints, such as limits on (1) (2) (3) (4) the time over which a given electronic money is valid, how much can be stored on and transferred by electronic money the number of exchanges that can take place before a money needs to be redeposit with a bank or financial institution, and the number of such transactions that can be made during a given period of time.
264 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

These constraints introduce a whole new set of implementation issues For example, time limits could be set beyond which the electronic money, would expire and become worthless. The customer would have to redeem or exchange the money prior to the expiration deadline. For this feature to work; electronic money would have to be timestamped, and time would have to be synchronized across the network to some degree of precision. The objective of imposing constraints is to limit the issuer’s liability. A maximum upper limit could be imposed on the value that could be assigned to any single transaction or that could be transferred to the same vendor within a given period of time. Since the user’s computer could be programmed to execute small transactions continuously at a high rate over the network, a strategy of reporting transactions over a certain amount would be ineffective for law enforcement. However, a well-designed system could enforce a policy involving both transaction size and value with time. For example, an “anonymous coinpurse” feature might be capable of receiving or spending no more than $500 in any twentyfour hour period. Alternatively, the “rate ceiling” for the next twenty-four hours could be made dependent on the rate of use or on the number of exchanges that could be permitted before any electronic money would have to be redeposit in a bank or financial institution and reissued. Finally, exchanges could also be restricted to a class of services or goods (e.g., electronic benefits could be used only for food, clothing, shelter, or educational purposes). The exchange process should allow payment to be withheld from the seller upon the buyer’s instructions until the goods, or services are delivered within a specified time in the future. 4.7.8 Legal Issues and Electronic Cash Electronic cash will force bankers and regulators to make tough choices that will shape the form of lawful commercial activity related to electronic commerce. As a result of the very features that make it so attractive to many, cash occupied an unstable and uncomfortable place within the existing taxation and law enforcement systems. Anonymous and virtually untraceable, cash transactions today occupy a place in a kind of underground economy. This underground economy is generally confined to relatively small scale transactions because paper money in large quantities is cumbersome to use and manipulateorganized crime being the obvious exception. As long as the transactions fare small in monetary value, they are tolerated by the government as an unfortunate but largely insignificant by product of the modern commercial .state. As transactions get larger the government becomes more suspicious and enlists the aid of the banks, through the various currency reporting laws, in reporting large disbursements of cash so that additional oversight can be ordered.
265

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

E-cash on taxation Transaction based taxes (e.g., sales taxes) account for a significant portion of state and local government revenue. But if e-cash really is made to function the way that paper money does, payments we would never think of making in cash-to buy a new car, say, or as the down payment on a house-could be made in this new form of currency because there would be no problem of bulk and no risk of robbery. The threat to the government’s revenue flow is a very real one, and officials in government are starting to take cognizance of this development and to prepare their responses. To prevent an underground economy, the government through law may prevent a truly anonymous and untraceable e-cash system from developing. Just as powerful encryption schemes permit the design of untraceable e-cash systems, so, too, do powerful electronic record-keeping tools permit the design of traceable systems-systems in which all financial transactions are duly recorded in some database, allowing those with access to know more about an individual than anyone could know today. Anything that makes cash substantially easier to use in a broader range of transactions holds the potential to expand this underground economy to pro-portions posing ever more serious threats to the existing legal order. Under the most ambitious visions of e-cash, we would see a new form of currency that could be freely passed off from one computer to another with no record, yet incapable of being forged. A consumer could draw such e-cash electronically from his or her bank. The bank would have a record of that transaction, just as a withdrawal or check is recorded now. But after that, the encrypted e-cash file could be handed off without the knowledge of anyone but the par-ties to the transaction. However, as the politics and business play out, the technology is forcing legal, as issues to be reconsidered. The question e-cash poses is not, “Should the law take notice of this development?” but rather, “How can it not?” By impacting revenue-raising capabilities, e-cash cannot escape government scrutiny and regulation; but it is going to take some serious thinking to design a regulatory scheme that balances personal privacy, speed of execution, and ease of use. Without a functioning system, what the government will do remains a mystery. Moreover, it is not even clear yet that the market as a whole will adopt an anonymous e-cash standard. For now, we are mainly watching and trying to educate ourselves about the likely path of the transition to electronic cash.

266

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

4.7.9 Electronic Tokens An electronic token is a digital analogue of various forms of payment backed by a bank or financial institution. Electronic tokens are of three types: 1. 2. Cash or real-time. Transactions are settled with the exchange of electronic currency. An example of on-line currency exchange is electronic cash (e-cash). Debit or prepaid. Users pay in advance for the privilege of getting information. Examples of prepaid payment mechanisms are stored in smart cards and electronic purses that store electronic money. Credit or post-paid. The server authenticates the customers and verifies with the bank that funds are adequate before purchase. Examples of post-paid mechanisms are credit/ debit cards and electronic checks.

NOTES

3.

The following sections examine these methods of on-line payment. But we must first understand the different viewpoints that these payment instruments bring to electronic commerce. Here are four dimensions that are useful for analyzing the different initiatives. 1. The nature of the transaction for which the instrument is designed , Sometokens are-specifically designed to handle micro payments, that is, payments for small snippets of information. Others are designed for more traditional products. Some systems target specific niche transactions; others seek more general transactions. The key is-to identify the parties involved, the average amounts, and the purchase interaction. 2. The means of settlement used. Tokens must be backed by cash, credit, electronic bill payments (prearranged and spontaneous), cashier’s checks, letters and lines of credit, and wire transfers, to name a few. Each option incurs trade-offs among transaction speed, risk, and cost. Most transaction settlement methods use Credit cards, while others use other proxies for value, effectively creating currencies of dubious liquidity and with interesting tax, risk, and float implications.

267

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

3.

Approach to security, anonymity, and authentication. Electronic tokens vary in the protection of privacy and confidentiality of the transactions. Some may be more open to potentially prying eyes-or even to the participants themselves. Encryption can help with authentication, non reputability, and asset management. The question of risk. Who assumes what kind of risk at what time? The tokens might suddenly become worthless and the customers might have the currency that nobody will accept. If the system stores value in a smart card, consumers may be exposed to risk as they hold static assets. Also electronic tokens might be subject to discounting or arbitrage. Risk also arises if the transaction has long lag times between product delivery and payments to merchants. This exposes merchants to the risk that buyers don’t pay-or vice versa that the vendor doesn’t deliver.

4.

4.7.10 Other Emerging Financial Instruments Several other electronic payment systems are currently being prototyped and tested. These include debit cards, electronic benefit transfer cards, and smart cards. Debit Cards at the Point of Sale (POS) The fastest growing number of electronic transactions today is debit card pointof-sale transactions. Such a transaction occurs when a customer uses a debit card to make a purchase from a merchant (supermarket, gas station, convenience store, or some other store that accepts such cards instead of using cash, check, or credit card). The transaction works much like a credit card transaction. For example, a customer gives an ATM card to the merchant for the purchase. The merchant swipes the card through a transaction terminal, which reads the information; the customer enters his personal identification number (PIN); and the terminal routes the transaction through the ATM network back to the customer’s bank for authorization against the customer’s demand deposit account. The funds, once approved, are transferred from the customer’s bank to the merchant’s bank. These transactions occur within the banking system, and safety of payment is assured. The third-party processors who provide services for merchants are also examined by the federal regulators for system integrity. Both the consumer and the merchant maintain bank accounts, and the funds are transmitted inter-bank within the payment system. Authentication is provided by the use of the digital signature or PIN numbers, just as it is at

268

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

ATMs. Further, PINs are sent through the system in an encrypted form, and the PIN pads and terminals are tamper-proof. Dedicated lines are also often used for transmission, particularly by larger merchants. Debit Cards and Electronic Benefits Transfer Debit cards are being used extensively for electronic benefits transfer (EBT). Electronic benefits transfer uses debit cards for the electronic delivery of benefits to individuals who otherwise may not have bank accounts. In an EBT system, recipients access their benefits in the same way that consumers use debit cards to access their bank accounts electronically: the card is inserted into or swiped through a card reader and the cardholder must enter a PIN associated with that card. The benefit recipient can then access his or her benefits to make a purchase or obtain cash. For example, food stamp purchases are charged against the participant’s allotment, and other purchases or cash distributions are charged against the participant’s cash assistance program allotment. Benefits that can be delivered via EBT generally fall into three cate-gories: federally funded, but state administered benefits (such as food stamps, Aid to Families with Dependent Children programs); state-funded and state-administered benefits (such as general assistance, heating assistance, refugee assistance, and supplemental or emergency payments); and benefits that are both federally funded and federally administered (such as Social Security and Veterans benefits). Through EBT, existing networks and technologies can provide benefit recipients with online access to their funds at pas devices and ATMs. In an EBT process, no paper changes hands, except for the receipt printed for the purchaser by the pas device or the ATM. Recipients can access cash through any number of establishments, including grocers, drugstores, and financial institutions, as well as ATMs. Certain cash payments can also be facilitated by installing pas devices in housing authority and utility company offices to accept rent and bill payments. Electronic benefits transfer has several advantages over paper based, benefit distribution systems. First, EBT is less costly. Currently, many recipients of federal and state benefits must pay significant fees (three or more dollars) to cash their checks. EBT systems are designed to provide nocost or low-cost access methods. - Second, EBT is more convenient than paper methods. EBT eliminates the need to carry food stamp coupons, stand in long lines to cash checks, or accept the entire benefit amount at one time. EBT programs also provide recipients with toll-free customer service lines and multilingual support to handle questions or problems. EBT is safer than cash or coupons, which can be lost or stolen. In EBT, benefits are stored
269

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

electronically, and can be used only when needed and in the amounts required. Recipients control all ac-cess to their benefits through their cards and PINs. They can also deactivate lost or stolen cards immediately and request a replacement card by a toll free phone call. Third, EBT is convenient for retailers. It eliminates the time-consuming task of handling food stamp coupons, making grocery checkout procedures faster and easier. By eliminating checks and coupons, EBT reduces losses associated with theft, forgery, and fraud. Finally, EBT is convenient for the government. Its inherent audit and tracking advantages enhance investigations into suspicious conduct by retailers. EBT improves benefit program management by creating an audit trail and record of benefit usage, ensuring that programs are working properly and effectively. Summary Electronic payment system: Electronic payment is an integral part of electronic commerce. Broadly de-fined, electronic payment is a financial exchange that takes place online between buyers and sellers. Types of Electronic Payment System: Banking and financial payments, Retailing payments, On-line electronic commerce payments Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) protocol: SET protocol meets the four security requirements for EC as SSL (Secure Socket Layer) does: authentication, encryption, integrity, and non repudiation. Security issues: Encryption is a technique for hiding data. Most computer encryption systems belong in one of two categories; there are two types of encryption methods: Secret-key encryption, Public-key encryption Digital Signature: Digital signatures are used for sending authentication. This also means that the originator cannot falsely deny having signed the data. In addition, a digital signature enables the computer to notarize the message, ensuring the recipient that the message has not been forged I transit. Firewall: A firewall is simply a program or hardware device that filters the information coming through the Internet connection into your private network or computer system
270 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

EFT: An electronic funds transfer (also known as EFT) is a system for transferring money from one bank to another without using paper money. Its use has become widespread with the arrival of personal computers, cheap networks, improved cryptography and the Internet. Credit card: A credit card is a system of payment named after the small plastic card issued to users of the system. A credit card is different from a debit card in that it does not remove money from the user’s account after every transaction. Debit card: A debit card (also known as a gift card) is a plastic card which provides an alternative payment method to cash when making purchases. Physically the card is an ISO 7810 card like a credit card; however, its functionality is more similar to writing a cheque as the funds are withdrawn directly from either the cardholder’s bank account (often referred to as a check card), or from the remaining balance on the card. E-checks: Electronic checks are designed to accommodate the many individuals and entities that might prefer to pay on credit or through some mechanism other than cash. Electronic checks are modelled on paper checks, except that they are initiated electronically, use digital signatures for signing and endorsing, and require the use of digital certificates to authenticate the payer, the payer’s bank, and bank account. Smart cards: Smart cards, also called stored value cards, use magnetic stripe technology or integrated circuit chips to store customer-specific information, including electronic money. The cards can be used to purchase goods or services, store information, control access to accounts, and perform many other functions. Smart cards are basically of two types: Relationship-based smart credit cards, Electronic purses. E-cash: Electronic or digital cash combines computerized convenience with security and privacy that improve on paper cash. Digital cash attempts to replace paper cash as the principal payment vehicle in online payments. E-token: An electronic token is a digital analogue of various forms of payment backed by a bank or financial institution. Electronic tokens are of three types: 1. Cash or real-time. 2. Debit or prepaid. 3. Credit or post-paid.

NOTES

271

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Questions for review 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. What is Electronic Payment System? Discuss the various Electronic Payment Systems. Discuss about the benefits of electronic payment system. What is SET protocol? What features does SET specify? Describe security schemes against internet fraud How do you differentiate Secret-key cryptography and Public-key cryptography? How can you ensure and maintain privacy, security in electronic payment. What is EFT? Describe the advantages of EFT What is a credit card? What are the pros and cons of using Credit Cards for electronic payment? Describe the major steps involved in an online credit card transaction. List the advantages and disadvantages of using credit card How do you make your credits cards information secure? What is a debit card? How debit card is different from credit card? Discuss on-line and off-line debit transactions List the advantages and disadvantages of debit card What are electronic cheques? How they are different from traditional cheques? List the benefits of E-check Compare E-check with other payment instruments How electronic checks are differing from credit card? What are smart cards? Compare and contrast smart card and traditional credit cards. How electronic purses work? What are bilateral and trilateral transactions? What all are the risk factors associated with E-cash? How e-cash effect the government revenues? Discuss the other emerging financial instruments

272

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

NOTES

UNIT V

LEGAL AND PRIVACY ISSUES IN E-COMMERCE
5.1 LEGAL ASPECTS OF E- COMMERCE 5.1.1 Legal issues The world is used to conducting business and commerce on signed paper documents. Two millennia of commerce has been based on the written document with its value ‘authorized’ by the signature of a duly authorized officer. The current legal practice has paper documents and signatures affixed thereon as its foundation. Electronic documents and messages, without the familiar signatures and marks, have changes the scene. However, trade still wants to be assured that the electronic world is safe. The EC system must, therefore, offer at least the same level of reliability as that which obtains in the paper world notwithstanding the significant difference between the concepts embodied in electronic messages and paper documents. It is well known that frauds do take place in the traditional paper based commercial transaction. Signatures can be forged, paper document can be tampered with, and even the most secure marks, impression, emblems and seals can be forging. But then these are known, and trade as well as the legal community knows how to deal with these problems. Companies set aside funds to take care of losses due to such frauds. For example, credit-cards companies do know that a very small percentage of transactions is fraudulent in nature. The world is comfortable with these problems, since they have been there for as long as we have been trading. The EC world, on the other hand, exposes us to issues, which were hitherto unknown, since they are directly the outcome of creating documents electronically, transmitting them over world wide computer communication networks. Trading partners exchange documents electronically. They need to convince themselves that such documents are authentic when received over networks, and that their authentication can be established
273 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

in case of dispute. Transactions may be electronic, but the key concept of admissibility of evidence and evidential value of electronic documents, which are central to the law, remain the same. There must be a way to prove that a message existed, that it was sent, was received, was not changed between the sending and receiving, and that it could not be read and interpreted by any third party intercepting or deliberately receiving it. The security of an electronic message, legal requirement, thus gets directly linked to the technical methods for security of computers and networks. From the legal angle, there is a further complication because the electronic message is independent of the actual medium used for storage transmission. The message can be stored on a floppy, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk. Likewise, it may be transmitted over a Local Area Network, a Wide Area Network, a private Value Added Network or the Internet. The physical medium could be coaxial cable, radio link, optical fiber or a satellite communication channel. The legal issues of EC have generated tremendous interest among technologists, traders and legal experts. Many of the early EDI experiments, and even production systems went into operation without any legal interchange agreement between trading partners, between VANs and their customers. No laws for EC existed; in fact they are still in the making. In India, too the Indian Customs EDI system (ICES) Project got off the ground in 1995 without any EC/EDI law in existence, or even a proper interchange agreement. EDI interchange Agreement It is a known fact that a certain discipline is required in the conduct of commerce in the paper world. Simple activities such as preparation of invoices, drawing up commercial contracts, signing, despatch, receipts etc. have to follow certain protocols agreed to by trading partners. These may be formal or in formal. In addition, acceptable rules of conduct are also necessary to achieve the kind of discipline required for smooth and effective trade and commerce. In the EDI world of electronic documents, this kind of discipline has been created through a set of rules that have developed in the form of interchange agreements within a number of user groups, national organization, and regions. At the international level, the UN has adopted the Model Interchange Agreement for the International Commercial Use of Electronic Data Interchange, which applies to the interchange of data and not to the underlying commercial contracts between the parties. It addresses the need for uniformity of agreement so that there are no barriers to international trade on account of different
274 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

solutions for various problems being adopted by countries. The UN has recommended that the member countries should take into account the terms and provisions of the Model Interchange Agreement when framing their own laws on EC. An interchange agreement may be made between trading partners. It establishes the rules they will adopt for using EDII ED transaction. It establishes the rules they will adopt for using EDI/EC transactions. It details the individual roles and legal responsibilities of trading partners for transmitting, receiving, and storing electronic messages. The signing of an interchange agreement signifies that the parties intend to be bound by it, and that they desire to operate within a legal framework. This can help reduce legal uncertainty in the electronic environment. Many of the conventions and agreements relating to international trade do not anticipate the use of EDIIEC. Many national laws, as noted above, also introduce uncertainty regarding the legal validity of electronic document. There are still very few national and international judgments ruling” on the validity of electronic documents, messages or signatures. It” is precisely in this kind of a scenario where clear legal rules and principles are absent, that an interchange agreement provides trading partners with readily available solutions the EDI/ EC relationship between them. It provides a strong legal framework for ensuring that electronic documents will have a legal binding effect, subject to national laws and regulations. The issues, which were addressed by the working party, which prepared this model Interchange Agreement, are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Selection of EDI messages, standards and the methods of communication. Responsibilities for ensuring that the equipment, software and services are operated and maintained effectively; Procedures for making any systems changes which may impair the ability of the trading partners to communicate. . Security procedures and services; The points at which EDI messages have legal effect; The roles and contracts of any third-party service providers; Procedures for dealing with technical errors; The need (if any) for confidentiality; Liabilities in the event of any delay or failure to meet agreed EDI communications requirement; The laws governing the interchange of EDI messages and the arrangements of the parties. Methods for resolving any possible disputes.

NOTES

275

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

The interchange agreement is flexible enough to meet the requirement of all business sectors involved in international trade. Trading partners can feel confident that it addresses the recognised legal issues arising from commercial use of EDI in international trade, and provides a strong legal and practical framework for considering and recording the necessary business decisions. Legal Issues for Internet Commerce Internet commerce raises legal issues through the provision of the following services:  Online marketing  Online retailing ordering of products and services  Financial services such as banking and trading in securities.  Exchange of electronic messages and documents  EDI, electronic filing, remote employee access, electronic transactions.  Trade and commerce over the Internet give rise to several legal issues . 5.1.2 Copyright and the Internet Copyright developed in the printed world to protect the economic interests of creative writers. Copyright law protects only the expression of an idea and idea itself. In due course it protects the originality of artists and innovators too. In recent times, however, the subject matter of copyright has further expanded. For example, the Copyright Designs and Patent Act, 1988 in the UK, allows protection of the following subject matter: Original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic works; the typographical arrangement of published editions of literary, dramatic or musical works; sound recordings; broadcasts; cable programs These have been broadly classified into two groups as ‘author works’ and ‘media works’ by Hector L. Macqueen. The multimedia capability of websites enables all types of work to be ‘published’ on the Internet in the sense that copies can be distributed to users/customers. The problems, however, is that unlike a paper copy, this copy can be readily duplicated and distributed further by the recipient. If the material is in the public domain there are no difficulties. But the copyright law applies to the downloaded matter, much the same way it applies to physical copies.

276

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

5.1.3 Issues Related to Jurisdicary The Internet allows anyone to set up a Website anywhere in the world. Its location could, however, be interpreted to decide the jurisdiction of disputes especially in EC. A Website may accept orders from visitors to the site as part of an Internet store or a shopping mall. For example, amazon.com is a bookstore retailing books. A court law may rule that the location of the Website determines the jurisdiction for that business. This is based on accepted legal practice. Jurisdiction determines which laws would be acceptable. EC on the Internet will grow if the parties doing business know what rules will govern what rules govern their activities. 5.1.4 Service Provider liability Many ISPs provide users access to shared websites, Usenet news, E-mail distribution list etc. These facilities can because by their users to upload unlawful, defamatory, copyright or trademarks infringing material. Unlawful material includes banned publications, hate propaganda, pornography and obscene material, without ISP having chance to review it. Liability for materials distributed in the Internet may be different for the Website operators, and the ISPs. AN ISP could be held liable for the bulletin boards, and for aiding and abetting the commission of an offence such as the distribution of photography. Similarly, third-party liability for defamation,-web sites, etc: “Thus the concerns include libel and defamation, liability for infringement of third-party rights, liability for hosting of unlawful materials. 5.1.5 Formation of an Enforceable Online Contract The growth of EC on the Internet depends to a large extent on the confidence of traders in forming legally enforceable contracts online. The key activities associated with the formation of an enforceable contract do take place on the Internet, viz. offer is communicated by the acceptor and acceptance is received by the offer or from the acceptor. An offer can be communicated orally or in writing; and in the EC environment through Email, Eform is valid, much the same way a fax message is. The offer or can display terms and conditions as a legal notice, on his website. Visitor to the site, who choose to proceed further, even after reading the notice may be constructed as accepting the conditions imposed by it. However, the timing of the acceptance offer determines when the contract is formed. In this case the E-mail of acceptance has to reach the offer or who may say that the contract will be legal only after its receipt (in his notice placed on the Website).
277

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Legal issues are manifold. Whether it is EDI over VANs, or EC over the Internet the primary concern of users is the existence, and enforceability of appropriate laws for EC. In case of dispute, electronic document must be acceptable as legal evidence in courts of law. While the problems of acceptance of and confidence in electronic transactions are there, they are not insurmountable. There is sufficient awareness in, and synergy of action among trade, legal and EC technology communities to make EC happen through appropriate developments in their respective areas. 5.2 ETHICAL, SOCIAL, AND POLITICAL ISSUES IN ECOMMERCE 5.2.1 Ethics, Social and Political issues Defining the rights of people to express their ideas and the property rights of copyright owners are just two of many ethical, social, and political issues raised by the rapid evolution of e-commerce. The ethical, social, and political issues raised in e-commerce, provide a framework for organizing the issues, and make recommendations for managers who are given the responsibility of operating e-commerce companies within commonly accepted standards of appropriateness. Understanding Ethical, Social, And Political Issues in E-Commerce Internet and its use in e-commerce have raised pervasive ethical, social and political issues on a scale unprecedented for computer technology. We live in an “information society,” where power and wealth increasingly depend on information and knowledge as central assets. Controversies over information are often in fact disagreements over power, wealth, influence, and other things thought to be valuable. Like other technologies such as steam, electricity, telephones, and television, the Internet and ecommerce can be used to achieve social progress, and for the most part, this has occurred. However, the same technologies can be used to commit crimes, despoil the environment, and threaten cherished social values. Before automobiles, there was very little interstate crime and very little federal jurisdiction over crime. Likewise with the Internet: Before the Internet, there was very little “cyber crime.” Many business firms and individuals are benefiting from the commercial development of the Internet, but this development also exacts a price from individuals, organizations, and societies. These costs and benefits must be carefully considered by those seeking to make ethical and socially responsible decisions in this new environment.
278 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

The major ethical, social, and political issues that have developed around ecommerce over the past seven to eight years can be loosely categorized into four major dimensions: information rights, property rights, governance, and public safety and welfare as shown in Fig 5.2.1(a). Some of the ethical, social, and political issues raised in each of these areas include the following:  Information rights: What rights to their own personal information do individuals have in a public marketplace, or in their private homes, when Internet technology make information collection so pervasive and efficient? What rights do individuals have to access information about business firms and other organizations? Property rights: How can traditional intellectual property rights be enforced in an internet world where perfect copies of protected works can be made and easily distributed worldwide in seconds? Governance: Should the Internet and e-commerce be subject to public laws? And if so, what law-making bodies have jurisdiction - state, federal, and/or international? Public safety and welfare: What efforts should be undertaken to ensure equitable access to the Internet and ecommerce channels? Should governments be responsible for ensuring that schools and colleges have access to the Internet? Is certain online content and activities - such as pornography and gambling - a threat to public safety and welfare? Should mobile commerce be allowed from moving vehicles?

NOTES







To illustrate, imagine that at any given moment society and individuals are more or less in an ethical equilibrium brought about by a delicate balancing of individuals, social organizations, and political institutions. Individuals know what is expected of them, social organizations such as business firms know their limits, capabilities, and roles and political institutions provide a supportive framework of market regulation, banking and commercial law that provides sanctions against violators. Now, imagine we drop into the middle of this calm setting a powerful new technology such as the Internet and e-commerce. Suddenly individuals, business firms, and political institutions are confronted by new possibilities of behavior. For instance, individuals discover that they can download perfect digital copies of music tracks, something which, under the old technology of CDs, would have been impossible. This can be done, despite the fact that these music tracks still
279 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

“belong” as a legal matter to the owners of the copyright - musicians and record label companies. The introduction of the Internet and e-commerce impacts individuals, societies, and political institutions. These impacts can be classified into four moral dimensions: property rights, information rights, governance, and public safety and welfare Then business firms discover that they can make a business out of aggregating these musical tracks - or creating a mechanism for sharing musical tracks- even though they do not “own” them in the traditional sense. The record companies, courts, and Congress were not prepared at first to cope with the onslaught of online digital copying. Courts and legislative bodies will have to make new laws and reach new judgments about who owns digital copies of copyrighted works and under what conditions such works can be “shared.” It may take years to develop new understandings, laws, and acceptable behavior in just this one area of social impact. In the meantime, as an individual and a manager, you will have to decide what you and your firm should do in legal “grey”- areas, where there is conflict between ethical principles, but no c1ear-cutural guidelines. How can you make good decisions in this type of situation? Before reviewing the four moral dimensions of e-commerce in greater depth, we will briefly review some basic concepts of ethical reasoning that you can use as a guide to ethical decision making, and provide general reasoning principles about social political issues of the Internet that you will face in the future.

Fig 5.2.1(a)

280

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

5.2.2 Basic Ethical Concepts: Responsibility Accountability, and Liability Ethics is at the heart of social and political debates about the Internet. Ethics is the study of principles that individuals and organizations can use to determine right and wrong courses of action. It is assumed in ethics that individuals are free moral agents who are in a position to make choices. Extending ethics from individuals to business firms and even entire societies can be difficult, but it is not impossible. As long as there is a decision-making body or individual (such as a Board of Directors or CEO in a business firm or a governmental body in a society), their decisions can be judged against a variety of ethical principles. If you understand some basic ethical principles, your ability to reason about larger social and political debates will be improved. In western culture, there are ability and liability principles that all ethical schools of thought share: responsibility, account- liability. Responsibility means that as free moral agents, individuals, organizations and societies are responsible for the actions they take. Accountability means that individuals, organizations, and societies should be held accountable to others for the consequences of their actions. The third principle -liability - extends the concepts of responsibility and accountability to the area of law. Liability is a feature of political systems in which a body of law is in place that permits individuals to recover the damages done to them by other actors, systems, or organizations. Due process is a feature of law-governed societies and refers to a process in which laws are known and understood and there is an ability to appeal to higher authorities to ensure that the laws have been applied correctly. Analyzing Ethical Dilemmas Ethical, social, and political controversies usually present themselves as dilemmas. A dilemma is a situation in which there are at least two diametrically opposed actions, each of which supports a desirable outcome. When confronted with a situation that seems to present ethical dilemmas, how can you analyze and reason about the situation? The following is a five step process that should help.  Identify and describe clearly the facts. Find out who did what to whom, and where, when, and how. In many instances, you will be surprised at the errors in the initially reported facts, and often you will find that simply getting
281

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES








the facts straight helps define the solution. It also helps to get the opposing parties involved in an ethical dilemma to agree on the facts. Define the conflict or dilemma and identify the higher order value involved. Ethical, social, and political issues always reference higher values. Otherwise, there would be no debate. The parties to a dispute all claim to be pursuing higher values (e.g., freedom, privacy, protection of property, and the -enterprise system). For example, Double Click and its supporters argue that their tracking of consumer movements on the Web increases market efficiency and the wealth of the entire society. Opponents argue this claimed efficiency comes at the expense of individual privacy, and Double Click should cease its or offer Web users the option of not participating in such tracking. Identify the stakeholders. Every ethical, social, and political issue has stakeholders: players in the game who have an interest in the outcome, who have its vested in the situation, and usually who have vocal opinions. Find out the identity of these groups and what they want. This will be useful later when designing a solution. Identity the options that you can reasonably take. You may find that none of the options satisfies all the interests involved, but that some options do a better job than others. Sometimes, arriving at a “good” or ethical solution may not, always be a balancing of consequences to stakeholders. Identify the potential consequences of your options. Some options may be ethically correct, but disastrous from other points of view. Other options may work in this one instance, but not in other similar instances. Always ask yourself, “what if I choose this option consistently over time?” Once your analysis is complete, you can refer to the following well established ethical principle to help decide the matter.

5.2.3 Privacy and Information Rights The Internet and the Web provide an ideal environment for invading the personal privacy of millions of users on a scale unprecedented in history. Perhaps no other recent issue has raised as much widespread social and political concern as protecting the privacy of over 160 million Web users in the United States alone. The major ethical issues related to ecommerce and privacy includes the following: Under what conditions should we invade the privacy of others?
282 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

What legitimates intruding into others lives through unobtrusive surveillance, market research, or other means? The major social issues related to e-commerce and privacy concern the development of “exception of privacy” or privacy norms, as well as public attitudes. In what areas of should we as a society encourage people to think they are in “private territory” as opposed to public view? The major political issues related to ecommerce and privacy concern the development of statutes that govern the relations between record keepers and individuals. The Concept of Privacy Privacy is the moral right of individuals to be left alone, free from surveillance or interference from other individuals or organizations, including the state. Privacy is a girder supporting freedom: Without the privacy required to think, write, plan, and associate independently and without fear, social and political freedom is weakened, and perhaps destroyed. Information privacy is a subset of privacy. The right to information privacy includes both the claim that certain information should not be collected at all by governments or business firms, and the claim of individuals to control over personal of whatever information that is collected about them. Individual control over personal information is at the core of the privacy concept. Due process also plays an important role in defining privacy. The best statement of due process in record keeping is given by the Fair Information Practices doctrine developed in the early 1970s and extended to the online privacy debate in the late 1990s (described below). Legal Protections In the United States, Canada, and Germany, rights to privacy are explicitly granted in or can be derived from, founding documents such as constitutions, as well as in specific statutes. In England and the United States, there is also protection of privacy in the common law, a body of court decisions involving torts or personal injuries. For instance, in the United States, four privacy-related torts have been defined in court decisions involving claims of injury to individuals caused by other private parties intrusion on solitude, public disclosure of private facts, publicity placing a person in a false light, and appropriation of a person’s name or likeness (mostly concerning celebrities) for a commercial purpose. In the United States, the claim to privacy against government intrusion is protected primarily by the First Amendment guarantees of freedom of speech and association and the Fourth:
283

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Amendment protections against unreasonable search and seizure of one’s personal documents or home, and the Fourteenth Amendment’s guarantee of due process. In addition to common law and the Constitution, there are both federal laws and state laws that protect individuals against government intrusion and in some cases define privacy rights vis-a-vis private organizations such as financial, education, and media institutions (cable television and video rentals) Ta able 5.2.2.(a) Federal Privacy Laws
NAME General Federal Privacy Laws Freedom of Information Act of 1966 Gives people the right to inspect information about themselves held in government files, also allows other individuals and organizations the right to request disclosure of government records based on the publics right to know Privacy Act of 1947, as amended Regulates the federal government’s collection, use, and disclosure of data collected by federal agencies. Gives individuals right to inspect and correct records. Electronic Communications Privacy Act Makes conduct that would infringe on the security of electronic communications illegal of 1986 Computer Matching and Privacy Regulates computerized matching of files held by different government agencies Makes conduct that would infringe on the security of computer based files illegal Limits access to personal information maintained by state Motor vehicle departments to these with legit mate business purposes Also gives drivers the option to prevent disclosure of driver’s license information to marketers and the general public DESCRIPTION

Protection Act of 1983 Computer Security Act of 1987

Driver’s Privacy Protection Act of 1994

Privacy Laws affecting Private Institutions Regulates the credit investigating and reporting industry. Gives people the right to inspect credit records if they have been denied credit and provides procedures for correcting information Family Educational Rights and Privacy Requires schools and colleges to give students and their parents access to student records and to allow Act of 1974 them to challenge and correct information limits disclosure of such records to third parties Regulates the financial industry’s use of personal Right to Financial Privacy Act of 1978 financial records establishes procedures that federal agencies mist follow to gain access to such records Privacy Protection Act of 1980 Prohibits government agents from conducting unannounced searches of press offices and files if no one in the office is suspected of committing a crime. Cable Communications Policy Act of Regulates the cable industry’s collection and disclosure of information concerning subscribers 1984 Fair Credit Reporting Act of 1970 Video Privacy Protection Act of 1988 Prevents disclosure of a person’s video rental records without court order or consent
284 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

5.3 PROTECTING INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY Intellectual property is considered to be intangible property created by individuals or corporations. Information technology has made it difficult to protect intellectual property, because computerized information can be so easily copied or distributed on networks. 5.3.1 Intellectual Property Rights Next to privacy, the most controversial ethical, social, and political issue related to e-commerce is the fate of intellectual property rights. For instance, if you personally create an ecommerce site, it belongs entirely to you, and you have exclusive rights to use this “property” in any lawful way you see fit. But the Internet potentially changes things. Once intellectual works become digital, it becomes difficult to control access, use, distribution, and copying. These are precisely the areas that intellectual property seeks to control. Digital media differ from books, periodicals, and other media in terms of ease of replication, transmission, and alteration; difficulty in classifying a software work as a program, book, or even music; compactness - making theft easy; and difficulty in establishing uniqueness. Before widespread use of the Internet, copies of software, books, magazine articles, or films had to be stored on physical media, such as paper, computer disks, or video tape, creating some hurdles to distribution. The Internet technically permits millions of people to make perfect digital copies of various works - from music to plays, poems, and journal articles - and then to distribute them nearly cost-free to hundreds of millions of Web users. The proliferation of innovation has occurred so rapidly that few entrepreneurs have stopped to consider who owns the patent on a business technique or method their site is using. The spirit of the Web has been so free-wheeling that many entrepreneurs ignored trademark law and registered domain names that could easily be confused with another company’s registered trademarks. In short, the Internet has demonstrated the potential for destroying traditional conceptions and implementations of intellectual property law developed over the last two centuries. The major ethical issue related to e-commerce and intellectual property concerns how we (both as individuals and as business professionals) should treat property that belongs to others. From a social point of view, the main questions are: Is there continued
285

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

value in protecting intellectual property in the Internet age? In what ways is society better off, or worse off, for having the concept of property apply to intangible ideas? From a political perspective we need to ask how the Internet and ecommerce can be regulated or governed to protect the institution of intellectual property while at the same time encouraging the growth of e-commerce and the Internet. 5.3.2 Types of Intellectual Property Protection There are three main types of intellectual property protection:  Copyright,  Patent and  Trademark law. The goal of intellectual property law is to balance two competing interests - the public and the private. The public interest is served by the creation and distribution of inventions, works of art, music, literature, and other forms of intellectual expression. The private interest is served by rewarding people for creating these works through the creation of a time-limited monopoly granting exclusive use to the creator. Maintaining this balance of interests is always challenged by the invention of new technologies. In general, the information technologies of the last century - from radio and television to CD-ROMs and the Internet - have at first tended to weaken the protections afforded by intellectual property law. . Owners of intellectual property have usually been successful in pressuring Congress and the courts to strengthen the intellectual property laws to compensate for any technological threat, and even to extend protection for longer periods of time and to entirely new areas of expression. In the case of the Internet and ecommerce technologies, once again, intellectual property rights are severely challenged. 5.3.2.1 Copyright: The Problem of Perfect Copies and Encryption In the United States, copyright law protects original forms of expression such as writings (books, periodicals, and lecture notes), art, drawings, photographs, music, motion pictures, performances, and computer programs from being copied by others for a minimum of 50 years. Copyright does not protect ideas -just their expression in a tangible medium such as paper, cassette tape, or handwritten notes.

286

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Since the first federal Copyright Act of 1790, the congressional intent behind copyright laws has been to encourage creativity and authorship by ensuring that creative people receive the financial and other benefits of their work. Most industrial nations have their own copyright laws, and there are several international conventions and bilateral agreements through which nations coordinate and enforce their laws. In the mid-1960s, the Copyright Office began registering software programs, and in 1980, Congress passed the Computer Software Copyright Act, which clearly provides protection for source and object code and for copies of the original sold in commerce, and sets forth the rights of the purchaser to use the software while the creator retains legal title. For instance, the HTML code for a Web page - even though easily available to every browser - cannot be lawfully copied and used for a commercial purpose, say, to create a new Web site that looks identical. Copyright protection is clear-cut: It protects against copying of entire programs or their parts. Damages and relief are readily obtained for infringement. The drawback to copyright protection is that the underlying ideas behind a work are not protected, only their expression in a work. A competitor can view the source code on your Web site to see how various effects were created and then reuse those techniques to create a different Web site without infringing on your copyright. Look and Feel “Look and feel” copyright infringement lawsuits are precisely about the distinction between an idea and its expression. For instance, in 1988, Apple Computer sued Microsoft Corporation and Hewlett-Packard Inc. for infringing Apple’s copyright on the Macintosh interface. Among other claims, Apple claimed that the defendants copied the expression of overlapping windows. Apple failed to patent the idea of over-lapping windows when it invented this method of presenting information on a computer screen in the late 1960s. The defendants counter claimed that the idea of overlapping windows could only be expressed in a single way and, therefore, was not protect able under the “merger” doctrine of copyright law. When ideas and their expression merge (Le., if there is only one way to express an idea), the expression can-not be copyrighted, although the method of producing the expression might be patentable. Fair Use Doctrine Copyrights, like all rights, are not absolute. There are situations where strict copyright observance could be harmful to society, potentially inhibiting other rights such as
287

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

the right to freedom of expression and thought. As a result the doctrine of fair use has been created. The doctrine of fair use permits teachers and writers. to use copyrighted materials without permission under certain circumstances. The fair use doctrine draws upon the First Amendment’s protection of freedom of speech (and writing). Journalists, writers, and academics must be able to refer to, and cite from, copyrighted works in order to criticize or even discuss copyrighted works. Professors are allowed to clip a contemporary article just before class, copy it, and hand it out to students as an example of a topic under discussion. 5.3.2.2 Patents: Business Methods and Processes A patent grants the owner an exclusive monopoly to the ideas behind an invention for 20 years. The congressional intent behind patent law was to ensure that inventors of new machines, devices, or industrial methods would receive the full financial and other rewards of their labor and yet still makes widespread use of the invention possible by providing detailed diagrams for those wishing to use the idea under license from the patent’s owner. Patents are obtained from the United States Patent and trademark Office (USPTO), created in 1812. Obtaining a patent is much more difficult and time-consuming than obtaining copyright protection (which is automatic with the creation of the work). Patents must be formally applied for, and the granting of a patent is’ determined by ‘Patent Office examiners who follow a set of rigorous rules. Ultimately, federal courts decide when patents are valid and when infringement occurs. Patents are very different from copyrights because patents protect the ideas themselves and not merely the expression of ideas. There are four types of inventions for which patents are granted under patent law: machines, man-made products, compositions of matter, and processing methods. The Supreme Court has determined that patents extend to “anything under the sun that is made by man” as long as the other requirements of the Patent Act are met. There are three things that cannot be patented: laws of nature, natural phenomena, and abstract ideas. For instance, a mathematical algorithm cannot be patented unless it is realized in a tangible machine or process that has a “useful” result (the mathematical algorithm exception). In order to be granted a patent, the applicant must show that the invention is new, original, novel, non obvious, and not evident in prior arts and practice. As with copyrights,
288 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

the granting of patents has moved far beyond the original intent of Congress’s first patent statute that sought to protect industrial designs and machines. Patent protection has been extended to articles of manufacture (1842), plants (1930), surgical and medical procedures (1950), and software (1981). The Patent Office did not accept applications for software patents until a 1981 Supreme Court decision that held that computer programs could be a part of a patentable process. Since that time, thousands of software patents have been granted. Virtually any software program can be patented as long as it is novel and not obvious. Essentially, as technology and industrial arts progress, patents have been extended to both encourage entrepreneurs to invent useful devices and promote widespread dissemination of the new techniques through licensing and artful imitation of the published patents (the creation of devices that provide the same functionality as the invention but use different methods) (Winston, 1998). Patents encourage inventors to come up with unique ways of achieving the same functionality as existing patents. For instance, Amazon’s patent on one-click purchasing caused Barnesandnoble.com to invent a simplified two-click method of purchasing. The danger of patents is that they stifle competition by raising barriers to entry into an industry. Patents force new entrants to pay licensing fees to incumbents, and thus slow down the development of technical applications of new ideas by creating lengthy licensing applications and delays. E-commerce Patents Much of the Internet’s infrastructure and software was developed under the auspices of publicly funded scientific and military programs in the United States and Europe. Unlike Samuel F. B. Morse, who patented the idea of Morse Code, and made the telegraph useful, most of the inventions that make the Internet and e-commerce possible were not patented by their inventors. The early Internet was characterized by a spirit of worldwide community development and sharing of ideas without consideration of personal wealth. This early Internet spirit changed in the mid-1990s with the commercial development of the World Wide Web. Business firms began applying for “business methods” and software patents.

NOTES

289

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

“Business Methods” Patents In 1998, in a landmark decision that paved the way for Internet business methods patents, a Federal Circuit Court of Appeals in the State Street Bank & ‘Dust v. Signature Financial Group, Inc.Financial Group, Inc. case upheld the claims of Signature Financial to a valid patent for a business method that allows managers to monitor and record financial information flows generated by a partner fund ( a “hub and spoke” system). In hub and spoke financial systems, mutual funds (the spokes) pool their funds into a single portfolio to achieve greater financial leverage, diversification, and higher returns. Signature Financial had invented and obtained a patent (“Data Processing System for Hub and spoke Financial Services Configuration”) on such a system in 1993. State Street Bank & trust attempted to license the system from Signature Financial, but when negotiations broke down, State Street sought to have the patent declared invalid and unenforceable because business methods could not be patented. However, the Federal Appeals Court threw out the socalled business methods exception under which it was thought business methods could not be patented. The court concluded that business methods should be treated like any process and that Signature Financial had invented a business method that could be patented. The court ruled there was no reason to disallow business methods from patent protection, or any “step by step process, be it electronic or chemical or mechanical, that involves an algorithm in the broad sense of the term.” 5.3.2.3 Trademarks: Online Infringement and Dilution Trademark law is a form of intellectual property protection for trademarks - a mark used to identify and distinguish goods and indicates their source. Trademark protections exist at both the federal and state levels in the United States. The purpose of trademark law is two fold. First, the trademark law protects the public in the market-place by ensuring that it gets what it pays for and wants to receive. Second, trademark law protects the owner - who has spent time, money, and energy bringing the product to the marketplace - against piracy and misappropriation. ‘Trademarks have been extended from single words to pictures, shapes, packaging, and colors”. Some things may not be trademarked: common words that are merely descriptive (“clock”), flags of states and nations, immoral or deceptive marks, or marks belonging to others. Federal trademarks are obtained, first, by use in interstate commerce, and second, by registration with the U.S. Patent and ‘Trademark Office (USPTO). ‘Trademarks are granted for a period of ten years, and can be renewed indefinitely.
290 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Disputes over federal trademarks involve establishing infringement. The test for infringement is twofold: market confusion and bad faith. Use of a trademark that creates confusion with existing trademarks, causes consumers to make market mistakes, or misrepresents the origins of goods is an infringement. In addition, the intentional misuse of words and symbols in the marketplace to extort revenue from legitimate trademark owners (“bad faith”) is proscribed. In 1995, Congress passed the Federal ‘Trademark Dilution Act, which created a federal cause of action for dilution of famous marks. This new legislation dispenses with the test of market confusion (although that is still required to claim infringement), and extends protection to owners of famous trademarks against dilution, which is defined as any behavior that would weaken the connection between the trademark and the product. Dilution occurs through blurring (weakening the connection between the trademark and the goods) and tarnishment (using the trademark in a way that makes the underlying products appear unsavoury or unwholesome). 5.4 CYBER LAW, CONTRACTS AND WARRANTIES 5.4.1 Cyber law Cyber law is a term used to describe the legal issues related to use of communications technology, particularly “cyberspace”, i.e. the Internet. It is less a distinct field of law in the way that property or contract are, as it is an intersection of many legal fields, including intellectual property, privacy, freedom of expression, and jurisdiction. In essence, cyber law is an attempt to apply laws designed for the physical world to human activity on the Internet. Jurisdiction and sovereignty Issues of jurisdiction and sovereignty have quickly come to the fore in the era of the Internet. The Internet does not tend to make geographical and jurisdictional boundaries clear, but Internet users remain in physical jurisdictions and are subject to laws independent of their presence on the Internet. As such, a single transaction may involve the laws of at least three jurisdictions: 1) the laws of the state/nation in which the user resides, 2) the laws of the state/nation that apply where the server hosting the transaction is located, and 3) the
291

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

laws of the state/nation which apply to the person or business with whom the transaction takes place. So a user in one of the United States conducting a transaction with another user in Britain through a server in Canada could theoretically be subject to the laws of all three countries as they relate to the transaction at hand. Another major problem of cyber law lies in whether to treat the Internet as if it were physical space (and thus subject to a given jurisdiction’s laws) or to act as if the Internet is a world unto itself (and therefore free of such restraints). Those who favor the latter view often feel that government should leave the Internet community to self-regulate. John Perry Barlow, for example, has addressed the governments of the world and stated, “Where there are real conflicts, where there are wrongs, we will identify them and address them by our means. We are forming our own Social Contract. This governance will arise according to the conditions of our world, not yours. Our world is different” (Barlow, A Declaration of the Independence of Cyberspace). A more balanced alternative is the Declaration of Cyber secession: “Human beings possess a mind, which they are absolutely free to inhabit with no legal constraints. Human civilization is developing its own (collective) mind. All we want is to be free to inhabit it with no legal constraints. Since you make sure we cannot harm you, you have no ethical right to intrude our lives. So stop intruding!”. Other scholars argue for more of a compromise between the two notions, such as Lawrence Lessig’s argument that “The problem for law is to work out how the norms of the two communities are to apply given that the subject to whom they apply may be in both places at once” (Lessig, Code 190). 5.4.2 Contracting and Contract Enforcement in EC Any contract includes three essential elements: an offer, an acceptance and consideration. The Contract is formed when one party accepts the offer of another party. An offer is a commitment with certain terms made to another party such as declaration of willingness to buy or sell a product or service. An acceptance is the expression of willingness to take an offer, including all of its stated terms. Consideration is the agreed upon exchange of something valuable, such as money, property or future services. Contracts are a key element of traditional business practice, and they are equally important on the Internet. Offers and acceptances can occur when parties exchange email messages, engage in electronic data interchange (EDI) or fill out forms on web pages.
292 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

These Internet communications can be combined with traditional methods of forming contracts, such as exchange of paper documents, faxes and verbal agreements made over the telephone or in person. When enforcing contracts, courts tend to view offers and acceptances as actions that occur within a particular context. If the actions are reasonable under the circumstances, courts tend to interpret those actions as offers and acceptances. For example, courts have held the various actions—including mailing a check, shipping goods, shaking hands, nodding one’s head, taking an item off a shelf, or opening a wrapped package—are all, in some circumstances, legally binding acceptances of offers. Writing Contracts on the web An early decision in the 1800’s held that a telegraph transmission was writing. Later courts have held that tape recordings of spoken words, computer files on disks and faxes are writings. Thus the parties to an electronic commerce contract should find it relatively easy to satisfy the writing requirement. Courts have been similarly generous in determining what constitutes a signature. A signature is any symbol executed or adopted for the purpose of authenticating writing. It is reasonable to assume that a symbol or code included in an electronic file would constitute a signature. Firms concluding international electronic commerce do not need to worry about the signed writing requirement in most cases. The main treaty that governs international sales of goods, Article 11 of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sales of Goods (CISG), requires neither a writing nor a signature to create a legally binding acceptance. 5.4.3 Warranties on the web Any contract for the sale of goods includes implied warranties. A seller implicitly warrants that the goods it offers for sale are fit for the purposes for which they are normally used. If the seller knows specific information about the buyer’s requirements, acceptance of an offer from the buyer may result in an additional implied warranty of fitness, which suggests that the goods are suitable for the specific uses of the buyer. Sellers could create explicit warranties, often unintentionally, by making general statements in brochures or other advertising materials about product performance or suitability for particular tasks.

NOTES

293

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

5.5. TAXATION AND ENCRYPTION POLICIES: 5.5.1 Introduction on Taxation Electronic Commerce (“Ecommerce”) presents unique challenges to federal and state tax authorities. Ecommerce involves commerce using the Internet: typically purchases and sales through computers. Because Ecommerce involves computers communicating with each other at the speed of light, transactions are both instantaneous and largely anonymous. In contrast, mail order and telephone solicitation, two traditional forms used by remote sellers, involve the delivery of goods from a specific physical location to a specific location by means of a common carrier. Although states and local jurisdictions have wrestled with the issue of collecting taxes from out-of-state mail order sellers and telephone solicitors for decades, the internet allows almost any small business to sell to customers in different states and countries. The concept of taxation involves jurisdiction. From the Boston Tea Party Rebellion in which tea was taxed as it physically landed on American shores, to sophisticated concepts in international taxation, a government’s authority to tax has always been based on territory and jurisdiction. For instance, the U.S. government taxes its residents on their world-wide income because they are connected with the U.S. through citizenship and residency. Also, the U.S. taxes foreign individuals and businesses who are receiving income from U.S. sources. But the U.S. cannot tax a foreign citizen who is not a U.S. resident on earnings from a foreign source. With the internet, a business can move to so-called tax haven jurisdictions and conduct business outside the taxing jurisdiction of any country. Also, because of the speed in which transactions occur and the absence of a traditional paper trail, especially with intangible property transmitted by computer such as software, digital music or books and services, it will be very difficult, if not impossible to apply traditional notions of jurisdiction to tax these transactions. While governments who rely on an income tax to fund themselves will have great difficulty taxing Ecommerce, states and local jurisdictions that rely on sales and property taxes to fund their operations are in steep trouble. As discussed below, the U.S. constitution requires a sufficient physical connection with the state or local jurisdiction by a company to
294 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

burden the business with a tax obligation, and merely selling property, services or goods to a customer who resides in a state is not sufficient nexus. In short, it will take a Constitutional amendment to change the commerce clause, and it extremely doubtful that U.S. citizens will vote to tax themselves on internet transactions. In fact, outside of pressure from state and local tax authorities, there is little ground swell for internet taxation by politicians. According to a Gallup Poll, 73% of active internet users oppose an internet sales tax, compared to 14% in favor (Source: San Francisco Chronicle, September 15, 1999, page D2). According to 36% of the respondents who use the internet, they would be less likely to vote for a politician who voted to tax internet transactions. But brick and mortar retailers who sell their products in physical locations, contend that internet taxes are needed to equalize the tax burden for competitive reasons. Some of the unique features of Ecommerce include:  Computer-to-Computer transactions without a paper trail;  Anonymous transactions, especially if a new form of electronic cash takes hold;  Lack of information on the location of the seller and purchaser;  Electronic delivery of goods (books, CDs and movies in electronic form) and services (brokerage or accounting services); and  Bundling of taxable and non-taxable items, such as taxable goods with taxexempt services. 5.5.2 Current Law - A Moratorium on Internet Taxes Currently, under the Internet Taxation Freedom Act (“ITFA”), passed in 1988 there is a 3-year moratorium on federal and state taxation imposed on internet transactions. The moratorium began on October 21, 1998 and remains in effect until October 21, 2001. ITFA’s purpose is to halt the rush by states to tax transactions occurring on the internet until Congress has had the opportunity to study the issue and make recommendations. Congress realized that the internet needed time to grow as a viable medium for commerce, without being subjected to taxing regimes imposed by the states. Congress noted that the internet was inherently susceptible to multiply and discriminatory taxation in ways that traditional commerce was not. Congress was concerned that because internet
295

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

transactions involved a number of computers and routers, routing transactions throughout the country and even throughout the world, potentially dozens of jurisdictions could attempt to tax a single transaction. Thus, ITFA would protect internet business from being taxed in complicated and unexpected ways by remote jurisdictions. Discriminatory Taxes A discriminatory tax traditionally involved a tax that favored local commerce over interstate commerce, but the definition under ITFA has been broadened to include the coverage of the tax, its application or a differential tax rate. In other words, if an ecommerce transaction is subject to a tax that is any different from a tax imposed on similar property, goods or services through other means, then the tax is discriminatory. Example: If the purchase of a book over the internet is subject to a tax that is different from purchasing a book in a bookstore, the tax is discriminatory. The same would be true if the taxing authority charged a higher rate of tax for ecommerce purchases of books. However, it is permissible to charge a lower rate on an ecommerce transaction. It other works, a taxing jurisdiction may discriminate in favor of ecommerce. Ecommerce conducted by out-of-state vendors do not have an obligation to collect sales taxes if traditional remote sellers, such as mail-order and telephone solicitation vendors do not collect sales taxes. Sales tax cannot be levied on because the purchaser uses ecommerce to access the seller’s computer to acquire property, goods or service. Also, states cannot use an “agency nexus” theory to claim that a purchaser’s ISP is an in-state agent for the seller. Example: If a purchaser in California uses his computer to connect with a bookseller’s computer located in Nevada, no state or political subdivision may levy a sales tax, even if the purchaser used a California ISP to connect to the internet. Example: If a Nevada-based seller hosts his website on a California computer and a California resident purchases a book, California cannot claim there is an agency nexus to tax the transaction. In addition, if a remote seller in one state, uses a computer in another state for internet access or online services, there is no agency relationship between the remote seller and the company providing the access or online services.
296 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Example: A New Hampshire company, with no physical presence in California, hosts its website with a California ISP, California cannot impose a sales tax on transactions because a California ISP was involved. If books, magazines, newspapers or forms of tangible information are not subject to sales tax, then downloads of that same information cannot be taxed. A tax obligation cannot be imposed on a different entity such as a credit card company, if the vendor selling the product, service or property would be the entity responsible to collect sales tax under conventional commerce. Multiple Taxes Multiple taxes on the same transaction or service either in the same taxing jurisdiction or tow or more taxing jurisdictions are prohibited. There is an exception if the tax is imposed by a state and a local subdivision, such as California’s sales tax and San Francisco County’s add-on sales tax for it Bay Area Rapid Transit. This could occur if a state taxed internet access services as telecommunications services and then taxed located telephone services as well. Unless a credit is given to eliminate any double-taxation, such a tax would violate the prohibition against multiple taxation. Exceptions to ITFA transactions. Vendors who knowingly conduct ecommerce involving obscene or materials that are otherwise harmful to minors cannot rely on ITFA as a defense against taxation. However, the vendor can use ITFA as a defense if he uses credit card verification or procedures to insure he is dealing with persons over age 17. The exception does not apply to internet information and search services such as Yahoo, Lycos or Alta Vista or ISPs that host such websites or telecommunication companies that transmit information over the internet. Bundled software that includes protected ecommerce or internet applications are protected under ITFA, but only in proportion to the ecommerce or internet applications.

NOTES

297

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

5.5.3 Taxation of Ecommerce - The Significant Issues Nexus - The Foundation of State and Local Taxation The Interstate Commerce Clause of the U.S. Constitution prevents the states and their political subdivisions from imposing taxes that unduly burden interstate commerce. The key issue is whether the company that is being taxed as sufficient connection (nexus) with the taxing authority. Example: A company that operates in Nevada and does not sell products in California or to California residents cannot be taxed by California. Converse, both California and San Francisco have the right to tax a company physically located in San Francisco, such as a hotel, even though the guests might reside in another state. The problem comes when a business is not physically located in California, but sells to California residents. Under what circumstances may California levy a tax on sales to California residents? In Quill v North Dakota, 504 U.S. 298, 1992, the U.S. Supreme Court held that a remote seller could be required to collect sales taxes only if the seller had the requisite nexus with the buyer’s state. Quill corporation sold office furniture products through a catalogue. Although it was not physically present in North Dakota and did not have a sales agents in the state, the North Dakota Supreme Court held that by selling its product to North Dakota customers, Quill established an economic presence in North Dakota which created nexus for sales tax purposes. The U.S. Supreme Court held otherwise and ruled that a state could impose a requirement that a company collect and remit sales taxes, the company had to have substantial connections (a physical presence) with the state. Under the commerce clause, a mailorder company without a physical location, employees or sales agents in North Dakota could not be compelled to collect sales tax on its sales to North Dakota customers. It is the commerce clause’s concept of nexus that prohibits most ecommerce transactions from being taxed. In general, the duty to collect a sales or use tax depends on where the sale is located and whether the buyer is a consumer or a business. Three general rules apply: 1. Retail sales by venders to in-state consumers are subject to sales tax on the purchase, but the vendor has the obligation of collect and remit the tax to the tax agency.
298 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

2.

Out-of-state vendors making consumer sales are not required to collect and remit sales taxes, unless the vendor has sufficient nexus under the commerce clause with the purchaser’s state to require collection. If the out-of-state vendor cannot be required to collect the tax, then the consumer is legally obligated to pay a self-assessed tax directly to the taxing agencies on the purchase. This is usually referred to as a “use” tax, instead of a sales tax, since the consumer is paying a tax for the use of the property. As a practical matter, this is virtually impossible to enforce, hence the emphasis on requiring out-of-state vendors to collect and remit the tax.

NOTES

3.

The absence of nexus in the mail order cases is profoundly greater in the Ecommerce context. Not only do internet companies not have physical presence in the taxing jurisdiction, often then can be located outside the jurisdiction of the U.S. altogether. Even if a transaction can be theoretically taxed, in reality, Ecommerce transactions occur instantaneously and without identity of the seller’s or buyer’s location. Because the sales tax is destination based, unless a state or locality can pinpoint the physical location of the seller and buyer, it is impossible to determine jurisdiction for sales tax purposes. Example: California wants to apply a sales tax to the sale of software to its residents. In order to California to levy the tax, it must determine that the purchase is a California resident and that the seller has sufficient nexus with California to be required to collect and remit the sales tax. Without ascertaining the location of the seller or buyer, California cannot determine whether the purchaser was a California resident and whether the seller had sufficient physical presence in California. Note: If the goods or property purchased are tangible, such as an actual book, CD or a shirt, then the traditional notions applicable to mail order taxation could be applied since it could be ascertained where the goods were shipped and where they were delivered. Will Ecommerce Really Erode the Tax Base for States and Localities? Although state and local tax officials express grave concern that the Ecommerce will decimate the ability for states and localities to levy taxes on these transactions, this response might be overblown. Currently, states and localities cannot tax remote sellers anyway, unless they have sufficient nexus with the state. This means that mail order and
299 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

telephone solicitation commerce by remote sellers is not subject to tax. Unless the Supreme Court drastically alters its reading of the Constitutions’s commerce clause, or there is a constitutional amendment allowing taxation of remote sellers, Ecommerce merely continues the trend to avoid taxes by engaging in remote selling without a physical presence. Most services and intangible products are not currently subject to sales taxes anyway. In California, services, such as legal, accounting, and medical costs, are not subject to sales taxes. Neither are food or medicine. Therefore, Ecommerce involving intangible goods or services will not cause an erosion of the tax base. Even if a remote seller is not subject to sales tax rules, a state’s citizen is supposed to self-assess a use tax which is equal to the sales tax, but the states have been lax in enforcing this requirement. The answer to Ecommerce taxation in particular and remote selling in general, is to require a state or locality’s resident to self-assess the tax that should have been collected by the remote seller. There is no prohibition against the use tax; the problem lies in enforcement. Therefore, although Ecommerce prevents states from forcing remote sellers from collecting and remitting sales tax, the ultimate tax liability is not affected since in-state consumers have the legal tax liability to self-assess and pay the tax anyway. Although Ecommerce in rapidly growing, as of 1988, it represents much less than 1% of total consumer spending. Remember that business-to-business sales are subject to use tax payments by in-state businesses, and approximately 80% of current Ecommerce is business-to-business. To the extent Ecommerce is merely a substitute for other remote seller transactions, Ecommerce does not affect the tax base since remote sales involving mail order or telephone solicitation are exempt from sales tax under the commerce clause. There is evidence that even if all Ecommerce was subject to sales taxes, the revenue generated to the states and localities would represent about one-tenth of one percent of all sales and use taxes collected. Also, sales and use taxes continue to grow, despite Ecommerce.

300

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

5.5.4 The Future for Ecommerce Taxation The Commission on Electronic Commerce, created by the ITFA legislation, has not been able to make any headway in the taxation debate, but several members have voice support for Internet taxes, provided the tax is simple to calculate for businesses. This could mean a uniform tax rate agreed to by all the states, or technological advances that would allow businesses to calculate the sales tax simply and without a large investment in time and resources. Unfortunately, the current state and local tax systems, which number close to 7,500 throughout the U.S., are notoriously parochial minded when it comes to defending their jurisdiction. In Texas alone, there are more than 1,300 separate sales tax jurisdictions. These numbers could be significantly increased if states and local jurisdictions were allowed to tax Ecommerce. Small businesses would be buried in costly paperwork attempting to comply with all these rules. That is precisely why the commerce clause in the Constitution prohibits taxes and is an undue burden on interstate commerce. 5.5.5 Encryption policy: Encryption is a technique for hiding data. The encrypted data can be read only by those users for whom it is intended. Nowadays various encryption techniques are available. One of the available techniques commonly used for encryption is Public Key. In Public Key encryption system, RSA Data Security of Redwood City offers the most popular and commercially available algorithm. In a Public Key encryption system each user has two keys-public key and private key. The encryption and decryption algorithms are designed in a way so that only the private key can decrypt data that is encrypted by the public key. And the public key can decrypt data, encrypted by the private key. Therefore, one can broadcast the public key to all users. Computer encryption is based on the science of cryptography, which has been used throughout history. Before the digital age, the biggest users of cryptography were governments, particularly for military purposes.
301

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Most computer encryption systems belong in one of two categories. Broadly speaking, there are two types of encryption methods:   Secret-key cryptography Public-key cryptography

Data Encryption Standard (DES) A widely-adopted implementation of secret-key cryptography is Data Encryption Standard (DES). The actual software to perform DES is readily available at no cost to anyone who has access to the Internet. DES was introduced in 1975 by IBM, the National Security Agency (NSA), and the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) (which is now called NIST). DES has been extensively researched and studied over the last twenty years and is definitely the most well-known and widely used cryptosystem in the world. DES is secret-key, symmetric cryptosystem: When used for communication, both sender and receiver must know the same secret key, which is used both to encrypt and decrypt the message. DES can also be used for single user encryption, for example, to store files on a hard disk in encrypted form. In a multi-user environment, however, secure-key distribution becomes difficult; public-key cryptography, discussed in the next subsection, was developed to solve this problem. DES operates on 64-bit blocks with a 56-bit secret key. Designed for hardware implementation, it operation is relatively fast and works well for large bulk documents or encryption. Instead of defining just one encryption algorithm, DES defines a whole family of them. With a few exceptions, a different algorithm is generated for each secret key. This means that everybody can be told about the algorithm and your message will still be secure. You just need to tell others your secret key a number less than 256. The number 256 is also large enough to make it difficult to break the code using a brute force attack (trying to break the cipher by using all possible keys). DES has withstood the test of time. Despite the fact that its algorithm is well known, it is impossible to break the cipher without using tremendous amounts of computing power. A new technique for improving the security of DES is triple encryption (Triple DES), that is, encrypting each message block using three different keys in succession. Triple DES, thought to be equivalent to doubling the key size of DES, to 112 bits, should prevent decryption by a third party capable of single-key exhaustive search. Of course, using triple-encryption takes three times as long as singleencryption DES. If you use DES three times on the same message with different secret
302 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

keys, it is virtually impossible to break it using existing algorithms.. Over the past few years several new, faster symmetric algorithms have been developed, but DES remains the most frequently used. 5.5.6 Customer’s Trust Online 1. Presentation The look of a site conveys a sense of personality and influences the degree to which visitors are prepared to trust the site owner. If an organisation already has a corporate identity then the site should be consistent with this. On-screen design and copy styles should reflect existing printed literature. A company’s colours may need re-working online, to a new palette that is fast to download to the computer screen. Developing a brand to work online is a new task. The internet is tactile - web pages should look, sound and move in ways that reinforce the company’s existing image. 2. Navigation If customers walk into a new high street shop they can usually find their way around. There are conventions for laying out a shop and customers unconsciously understand and follow them. Online conventions are still being developed. Therefore, some judgement will be needed to make first-time visits successful. The challenge is to create enticement – to explore the store - without customers getting lost. On the home page a site’s purpose must be clear to the first-time visitor. Use simple words to describe the site’s content and make it easy for visitors to find what they are looking for by giving clear instructions. 3. Fulfilment Goods have now been selected and your customer has made it to the checkout. At this point most shopping carts are abandoned. Websites can keep customers’ trust by taking them through a transparent transaction process. At all times customers should know where they are in the checkout process and they should be able to find out what happens later. It must be easy to see: How orders are to be processed The company’s returns policy. Online and offline customer support services The company’s security policy for
303

NOTES

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

personal information. If you have shops on the high street, give customers the option to return goods there. And remember to train your staff to handle returned online orders. 4. Familiar Names & Logos Names that we know and trust are familiar and friendly. If we see them on a website we trust the website more. Customers trust sites where they can see the familiar logos of credit card brands, major software companies and web security organizations. If your company is trusted by these organizations, don’t hide it. Should your company have a familiar name, use it to build customer expectation of the site’s content, the quality of products and the level of service support. Web customers will have higher service expectations than offline customers. They may expect service delivered in real time, with transparency and, above all, with consistency. 5. Technology Too much technology can be daunting. Use technology as a transparent aid to navigation and activity. Aim for graphics and functions in proportion to your customer’s needs. These needs will change with your customer’s experience. Are you handling visitors new to the web trade or devotees?
 

Newcomers need signposts and easy navigation. Old hands need quick routes to every part of the site.

Younger visitors and technically aware customers may be more tolerant of higher technical demands. Make sure that technology supports your sales process and does not obscure it: Automatically recognise returning customers Help to complete forms correctly Design forms to work with software programs that automatically add user details to the form 5.5.7 Steps to Plan Successful E-Commerce Respond Fast If the plan is to respond to customer wishes, then the most successful plan will be the one that responds fastest. This means that every component of the plan should be built
304 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

with the intention of proving a principle. Ask yourself if your customers want this? If they do, then a more robust version can be built. If they don’t, then you can redirect your time and resources and use the knowledge gained to good effect elsewhere. Test out Your Plan In the online marketplace everything is a test until it’s proven by the customer. Successful testing follows a simple rule: Test one Thing at a Time Only test changes that can be measured directly. If a test includes more than one change, it’s almost always impossible to measure the effect of each one. Test to learn from the customer and to improve one step at a time. Challenge Internal Assumptions Remove internal processing costs to make dramatic improvements to profit margins. Analyse each sales process to clarify what it is that staff spend time doing. In particular, look for processes in which information is transferred. How many steps can be eliminated by outsourcing tasks to your customers and suppliers? Who is best placed to make the original information entry? Can that information be shared to avoid reentering the same information? What information could customers, suppliers and distributors find for themselves, computer to computer? With the time saved, what could your staff do to add more value for customers? Focus on Customer, Supplier & Distributor Benefits What’s in it for customers, suppliers and distributors? Have you asked what they’d like? The web’s very good at research. Are you offering them a new way to use an existing service or a completely new service? Is it faster, cheaper, more convenient or just new and online? What new information do they get? Decide what you can reliably offer each group now and plan a phased introduction of more complex services. Complexity often arises from integrating tried and tested stand-alone services.

NOTES

305

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES

Give Good Reasons to Use Online Services Not all customers will automatically move to an online service simply because it’s there. Equally, in a service’s early stages it may not make good sense to risk overwhelming a new online channel by quickly moving large numbers of customers over to the new service. If you prefer customers to use an online channel, find ways to: Inform them that it is there (they may not know this) Tell them how to change over Incentivise the swap to make it worthwhile Introduce the new service as a special privilege beta test programme Calculate the Three Sets of Costs Very few organisations have all the resources in-house to start offering online services. There are three sets of costs that should be calculated: 1. Current company costs that will be altered by the online changes  both internal and external costs Cost to implement the changes  interim support may be needed  training for staff whose tasks change New cost assumptions, post change  long-term cost-savings  long-term outsourcing arrangements  ongoing online development plans

2.

3.

Help Staff Adapt to Online Working An online service will affect your staff and the work that they do. If your organisation is typical, there will be a progressive transfer from processing tasks towards customer service. Some may find this work more fulfilling; others will not enjoy the increased interaction with customers. Unless a company’s online services are entirely online, staff who is to fulfil new service roles will require assistance to develop new skills. They will almost certainly require some training in how to make the most of the new technology for the benefit of their customers.
306 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

E-COMMERCE TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

Summary  Internet commerce raises legal issues through the provision of the following services:

NOTES

Online marketing Online retailing ordering of products and services Financial services such as banking and trading in securities. Exchange of electronic messages and documents EDI, electronic filing, remote employee access, electronic transactions. Trade and commerce over the Internet give rise to several legal issues  The growth of EC on the Internet depends to a large extent on the confidence of traders in forming legally enforceable contracts online. The key activities associated with the formation of an enforceable contract do take place on the Internet, viz. offer is communicated by the acceptor and acceptance is received by the offer or from the acceptor. The ethical, social, and political issues raised in e-commerce, provide a framework for organizing the issues, and make recommendations for managers who are given the responsibility of operating e-commerce companies within commonly accepted standards of appropriateness. The Concept of Privacy: Privacy is the moral right of individuals to be left alone, free from surveillance or interference from other individuals or organizations, including the state. Privacy is a girder supporting freedom: Without the privacy required to think, write, plan, and associate independently and without fear, social and political freedom is weakened, and perhaps destroyed.  Intellectual property is considered to be intangible property created by individuals or corporations. Information technology has made it difficult to protect intellectual property, because computerized information can be so easily copied or distributed on networks.





307

ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

DBA 1727

NOTES



There are three main types of intellectual property protection: Copyright, Patent and Trademark law. Cyber law is a term used to describe the legal issues related to use of communications technology, particularly “cyberspace”, i.e. the Internet. It is less a distinct field of law in the way that property or contract are, as it is an intersection of many legal fields, including intellectual property, privacy, freedom of expression, and jurisdiction. In essence, cyber law is an attempt to apply laws designed for the physical world to human activity on the Internet. Contracting and Contract Enforcement in EC: Any contract includes three essential elements: an offer, an acceptance and consideration. The Contract is formed when one party accepts the offer of another party. The outdated and overly complex mechanisms used by thousands of jurisdictions to tax traditional transactions is clear that a fundamental restructuring of our current sales tax laws is needed to simply tax collection, to decrease the burden of compliance on business and to deal with the increasingly integrated economy of Ecommerce.







Questions for review 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. List the major legal issues of EC Discuss the EDI Interchange agreement Define ethics Discuss the ethical, social and political issues in EC What are the basic ethical concepts Define privacy Define Intellectual property Describe the three main types of intellectual property protection What is contracting? How is it enforced in EC Discuss taxation in EC Describe the significant issues of taxation in EC Define encryption policy Define DES Discuss the steps to plan successful EC
308 ANNA UNIVERSITY CHENNAI

Sponsor Documents

Or use your account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Forgot your password?

Or register your new account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Lost your password? Please enter your email address. You will receive a link to create a new password.

Back to log-in

Close